DCS GUIDE

F/A-18C HORNET LOT 20 BY CHUCK

LAST UPDATED: 25/09/2020 1
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
• PART 1 – INTRODUCTION PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS
• PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR AND COUNTERMEASURES
• PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF
• PART 5 – TAKEOFF PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL
• PART 6 – LANDING PART 14 – AUTOPILOT
• PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING
• PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
PART 17 – OTHER RESOURCES

Special thanks to Paul "Goldwolf" Whittingham for creating the guide icons. 2
 The McDonnell Douglas F/A-18 Hornet is a twin-engine, supersonic, all-
weather, carrier-capable, multirole combat jet, designed as both
HORNET
a fighter and attack aircraft (hence the F/A designation). Designed
F/A-18C

by McDonnell Douglas (now Boeing) and Northrop, the F/A-18 was derived
from the latter's YF-17 in the 1970s for use by the United States
Navy and Marine Corps.

The Hornet is highly maneuverable, owing to its good thrust-to-weight ratio,

digital fly-by-wire control system, and leading-edge extensions, which allow
the Hornet to remain controllable at high angles of attack. The trapezoidal
wing has a 20-degree sweepback on the leading edge and a straight trailing
edge. The wing has full-span, leading-edge flaps and the trailing edge has
single-slotted flaps and ailerons over the entire span. The Hornet is also
notable for having been designed to reduce maintenance, and as a result,
has required far less downtime than its heavier counterparts, the F-14
Tomcat and the A-6 Intruder. Its mean time between failures is three times
greater than any other Navy strike aircraft, and requires half the
maintenance time. Its General Electric F404 engines were also innovative in
that they were designed with operability, reliability, and maintainability first.
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

The engine, while unexceptional in rated performance, demonstrates

exceptional robustness under various conditions and is resistant to stall and
flameout. The F404 engine connects to the airframe at only 10 points and
can be replaced without special equipment; a four-person team can remove
the engine within 20 minutes.

3
 The F/A-18 has a top speed of Mach 1.8 (1,034 knots, 1,190 mph or 1,915 km/h at 40,000 ft or 12,200 m). It can carry a wide variety of bombs and missiles, including air-to-
air and air-to-ground, supplemented by the 20-mm M61 Vulcan cannon. It is powered by two General Electric F404 turbofan engines, which give the aircraft a high thrust-
to-weight ratio. The F/A-18 has excellent aerodynamic characteristics, primarily attributed to its leading-edge extensions (LEX). The fighter's primary missions are fighter
HORNET
F/A-18C

escort, fleet air defense, suppression of enemy air defenses, air interdiction, close air support, and aerial reconnaissance. Its versatility and reliability have proven it to be a
valuable carrier asset, though it has been criticized for its lack of range and payload compared to its earlier contemporaries, such as the Grumman F-14 Tomcat in the fighter
and strike fighter role, and the Grumman A-6 Intruder and LTV A-7 Corsair II in the attack role.
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

4
 The DCS Hornet we have at the moment is the “C” version, also known as
“Legacy” or “Charlie” Hornet. As early access progresses and more
weapons and sensors are integrated, the Hornet will become one of the
HORNET
F/A-18C

most versatile aircraft, being able to precisely drop unguided bombs, fire
short and long-range air-to-air missiles like the Sidewinder and the
AMRAAM, and eventually use an ATFLIR targeting pod, HARMs, SLAM-ERs
and other high-tech systems of the kind. The cockpit feels modern with its
DDIs (Digital Display Indicator) AMPCD (Advanced Multi-Purpose Color
Display), Moving Map and Heads-Up Display. There is a lot of functionality
embedded in all of these pages and the UFC (Up-Front Controller) is
instinctive enough to make even the most complicated tasks relatively
straightforward. The Hornet seems to have been designed to be a Jack of
all Trades that could be used in more or less any type of mission, which
makes it a great choice for those who want to do different things.

The F/A-18C is an incredible product, even if it is still being developed.

Carrier operations are stressful and require an ungodly amount of hours of
practice before being any good at all. It is genuinely the most stressful
thing I’ve ever done in DCS, air-to-air refueling included. The flight model
by itself is something completely different. The FCS (Flight Control System)
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION

needs to be studied and understood if you want to fly “with it” instead of
fighting “against it”. Yes, you will have to tame the beast. That’s part of its
charm.

This aircraft gives you a great sense of power, purpose and achievement.
Learning to fly it properly is no easy task but the aircraft has such character
that it makes the whole experience very rewarding. Once you get that
exhilarating feeling of catching the third wire during a difficult carrier
landing… you’ll understand what I’m talking about.

5
 F/A-18C
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION HORNET

6
 Note: In your controls, make sure you check your “Trim” controls since the default version of the game has your trim hat set to changing your view rather than
HORNET trim the aircraft. Since most of you are probably equipped with a TRACKIR already, I suggest you make sure the Trim Hat Switch is set up properly.
F/A-18C

To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

select “Axis Commands” in the upper scrolling
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

menu.

To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

on the axis you want to modify and then click
on “Axis Tune”.

7
HORNET
Bind the following axes:
F/A-18C

• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 4, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100,

CURVATURE AT 15)
• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 4, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100,
CURVATURE AT 15)
• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100,
CURVATURE AT 10)
• THRUST – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM
• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT

NOTE
A small deadzone in the PITCH and ROLL axis must be set via the AXIS TUNE
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

menu. Why? Because the autopilot will not be able to engage if the stick is not
completely centered, and most sticks are not completely zeroed by definition
(even the Thrustmaster Warthog). If you don’t set a deadzone, you run into
the risk of not being able to engage your autopilot since your stick will always
be detected as “not completely centered” even if the position offset is
negligible.

8
HORNET
WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED
F/A-18C

DISPENSE SWITCH (AFT) TRIMMER PUSH

(Grey button on RHS) TRIMMER RIGHT WING DOWN
TRIMMER PULL
TRIMMER LEFT WING DOWN Select Sidewinder
Select Amraam
Select Sparrow
ZOOM IN SLOW Select Guns
Weapon Release TDC - DEPRESS
ZOOM OUT SLOW
CAGE/UNCAGE BUTTON
Gun Trigger: Second
Detent

Sensor Control Sw. FWD HARM Target Sequence

PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

Sensor Control Sw. RIGHT COMM Switch: COMM 1 /RAID / FLIR Button
Sensor Control Sw. AFT COMM Switch: COMM 2
Sensor Control Sw. LEFT RADAR ELEVATION
Sensor Control Sw. DEPRESS CONTROL AXIS

Undesignate / Nose Wheel Steer Switch SPEED BRAKE RETRACT

SPEED BRAKE EXTEND TDC FORWARD

TDC RIGHT
TDC AFT
Autopilot / Nosewheel TDC LEFT
Steering Disengage (Paddle)
ATC Engage/Disengage
Throttle Finger Lift (BOTH)

+ TOE BRAKES (MAPPED ON PEDALS) 9

HORNET
WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED
F/A-18C

Redkite also has a nice profile that you can use that is closer to the real
Hornet stick and throttle setup. Link: https://youtu.be/iKLrnJpc8I4
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP

10
 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

11
 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

12
 JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Note:
Night Vision Goggles and JHMCS are mutually exclusive
helmet-mounted devices; you can only equip one or the
HORNET
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request.
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

13
 TIP: Pilot body can be toggled on/off by pressing “RSHIFT+P”
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

14
 Mirror
Click to fold/unfold
HORNET
F/A-18C

Mirror
Click to fold/unfold

Mirror
Click to fold/unfold
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Right DDI (Digital

Left DDI (Digital Display Indicator)
Display Indicator)

AMPCD (Advanced
Multipurpose Color Display)
15
 “Towel Rack” Handles
When the F-18 is catapulted from its carrier, the pilot doesn’t hold the
HORNET
F/A-18C

flight stick yet; he grabs a handle instead nicknamed “towel rack” or

“towel rail”.

The F/A-18 being the first fly-by-wire airplane to operate off the carrier, its
flight control computers will seek the optimum angle-of-attack (8.1 alpha)
off the catapult, which means that the pilot doesn’t have to touch
anything during the catapult launch. Once the aircraft is airborne and the
initial AOA is set, the pilot then grabs the stick.
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

16
HORNET
F/A-18C

Magnetic Transmitter Unit

Used to generate a magnetic field used to determine HMD (Helmet-
Mounted Display) position/orientation, which is used by the JHMCS
(Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System).
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Left AVTR (Airborne Video Tape

Recorder) Camera
Left AVTR Status Lights Records left DDI. Used for mission debrief

Left AVTR Recorder

17
 Hydraulic Isolate Switch Encrypted Radio Relay Switch
• ORIDE: Hydraulic circuit 2B isolation is overridden to Cipher/Off/Plain COMM1 Radio Set Antenna
allow in-flight recharging of APU accumulator. Selector Switch
• Norm: Normal Mode Upper/Auto/Lower Radio Antenna Select
HORNET
Encrypted Radio G Transmit Switch
F/A-18C

COMM1/OFF/COMM2
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
NUC WPN Switch Antenna Selector Switch
Not simulated ALE-39 Countermeasures Upper/Auto/Lower IFF Antenna Select
Dispenser Set Reset Switch
MC (Mission Computer) Switch
Allows the set either Mission Computer 1 or 2
to OFF in case of malfunction. Switch is set to
“Normal” during normal operation.
VOX (Voice-Activated Intercom)
OBOGS (On-Board Oxygen Volume Control Knob
Generating System) Switch Cold Mic / Hot Mic
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Oxygen Flow Switch

ICS (Intercom System)
Volume Control Knob

ILS (Instrumented Landing

System) Preset Channel Selector

ILS Frequency Input Selector RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) Volume Control Knob
UFC: Up-Front Controller
MAN: Manual WPN (Weapon Delivery System) Volume Control Knob

IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) MIDS A and B (Multifunctional Information

CRYPTO Switch Distribution System A & B) Volume Control Knob
HOLD / NORM / ZERO

TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) Volume Control Knob

IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
Mode 4 Switch IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
DIS/AUD / DIS / OFF Master Switch AUX (Auxiliary Systems) Volume Control Knob 18
Normal / Emergency
 FCS (Flight Control System) Speed Brake Circuit Breaker Launch Bar Circuit Breaker
HORNET Channel 1/2 Circuit Breakers
F/A-18C

APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) Switch

OFF / ON

APU READY Light

Engine Crank Switch

LEFT / OFF / RIGHT

T/O (Takeoff) Trim Pushbutton

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Rudder Trim Switch

Gain Switch
NORM sets a normal flaps scheduling.
OVERRIDE allows the pilot to select a fixed
value for speed, altitude, and AOA inputs to the
flight control computers and thus a fixed
leading and trailing edge flap position
dependent on FLAP switch position.

FCS (Flight Control System)

Reset Switch

19
 Generator Tie Control Switch
HORNET NORM (Closed) / RESET (Open)
F/A-18C

Refueling Probe Control Switch

EXTEND / RETRACT / EMERGENCY EXTENDED
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

External Wing Fuel

Tanks Control Switch
OVERRIDE / NORM / STOP

External Center Fuel

Tank Control Switch Formation Lights Dimmer Control Knob
OVERRIDE / NORM / STOP

Throttle Friction Adjustment Lever

Internal Wing Fuel Tank Control
Switch Position Lights Dimmer Control Knob
Fuel Dump Switch • NORM: Normal
• INHIBIT: Prevents normal fuel transfer to
internal wing fuel tanks.
Strobe Light Switch
BRIGHT / OFF / DIM 20
 Position Lights (Red on left hand side)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Strobe Light Switch Formation Lights

BRIGHT / OFF / DIM
Dimmer Control Knob

Position Lights Dimmer Control Knob

Position Light (White)

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Strobe
Formation Light

Formation Light

Position Lights (Green on right hand side)

Formation Light

Exterior Lights Switch (L)

Used to toggle all exterior lights

Formation Light Landing/Taxi Light

21
 Note:
Night Vision Goggles and JHMCS are mutually exclusive
helmet-mounted devices; you can only equip one or the
HORNET
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request.
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Night Vision Goggles (NVG) Controls:

• RSHIFT+H: On/Off
• RSHIFT+RALT+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Down 22
• RSHIFT+RCTRL+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Up
HORNET
F/A-18C

Left Throttle

Dispense Switch Throttle Designator Controller

Right Throttle AFT – OFF – FWD Switch

Antenna Elevation Control

Communications Switch
COMM1 – COMM2
MIDS A – MIDS B Exterior Lights Switch

Speed Brake Switch

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

EXTEND – OFF – RETRACT

HARM Target Sequence
/RAID / FLIR Button

CAGE/UNCAGE Button ATC Engage/Disengage

Switch

Finger Lifts

Finger lifts act as a stopper that prevents throttles from

accidentally going from IDLE to OFF once engines are started.
In order to shut down an engine, finger lifts are raised by
pressing “0” for right throttle and “9” for left throttle.

23
 Flares & Chaff DISPENSE Button
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

GROUND POWER Placard

Four ground power switches are provided on the ground power panel. Each controls a group of systems
and/or instruments and prevents operation of the systems/instruments on external power during
maintenance, unless the respective Ground Power switch is placed to the ON position. If switch is set to
AUTO, system/instrument is automatically de-energized with ground power ON.

GROUND POWER 1 Switch GROUND POWER 3 Switch

POSITION A POSITION A
MISSION COMPUTER 1, MSDRS (Maintenance Signal Data ALQ-126, ALE-39, INTFER BLANKER, ANTI SKID, OXY-GAGING,
recording set), Left DDI (Digital Display Indicator) ALR-67
POSITION B POSITION B
MISSION COMPUTER 2, POSITION A Equipment SMS, AWW 4, HARM, FLIR, LST (Laser-Designated Target),
GUN DECODER, POSITION A Equipment
GROUND POWER 2 Switch
POSITION A GROUND POWER 4 Switch
Right DDI, HUD, RADAR, INS (Inertial Navigation System), POSITION A
EHSI (Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator) ICS (Intercom Communication System)
POSITION B POSITION B
TACAN, ADC (Air Data Computer), UHF 1 & 2, RADAR ICS, FCES (Flight Control Electronic System)
ALTIMETER, CSC (Communication System Control), ADF
(Automatic Direction Finder), BCN (Beacon), RDR AUG RCVR,
ILS, Datalink, IFF, KIT, EMD (Engine Monitor Display), STBY
INSTRUMENTS, KY-58, UFC (Up-Front Controller), POSITION A
Equipment
24
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Bar Switch

RETRACT (UP)/ EXTEND (DOWN) Flaps Switch
AUTO / HALF / FULL

Anti-Skid Switch Selective Jettison Switch

• Left Fuselage Missile
• SAFE
• Right Fuselage Missile
Landing/Taxi Light Switch • Rack Launcher
• Stores
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Hook Bypass Switch

CARRIER / FIELD

Ground Power 1 Switch

A ON / AUTO / B ON Jettison Button
Ground Power 2 Switch
A ON / AUTO / B ON

Ground Power 4 Switch Emergency Parking Brake Lever

A ON / AUTO / B ON Horizontal Handle Position: Parking Brake disengaged
Vertical Handle Position: Parking Brake engaged
• Left Click: Rotates handle left
• Right Click: Rotates handle right
• Mousewheel Scroll: Pull or stow handle

Brake Pressure Indicator

(x1000 psi)

Ground Power 3 Switch

A ON / AUTO / B ON
Fire & Bleed Air Test Switch
TEST A / NORM / TEST B
External Power Switch 25
RESET / NORM / OFF
HORNET
F/A-18C

Canopy Jettison Handle

Pull Handle to Jettison Canopy
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Warning Tone Silence Button

Down Lock Override Button

If landing gear lever’s mechanical stop remains
extended after takeoff (preventing movement of the
handle from the DOWN to the UP position), the
DOWN LOCK OVERRIDE button retracts the
mechanical stop from the landing gear control Cockpit Left Louver (Air Flow
handle, allowing it to be moved from DOWN to UP. Outlet)

Landing Gear Lever

26
 Emergency Jettison Button Engine Nozzle Position (% open)

Engine Fuel Flow (x100 lbs/hour)

HORNET
F/A-18C

EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) (deg C)

Engine RPM Indication (%RPM)

Engine Oil Pressure

(psi) IFEI (Integrated Fuel / Engine Indicator)
Buttons
• MODE: Toggles IFEI modes
Center Station Jettison Button • QTY: Toggles five sub-level fuel quantity format
displays (shown above). Normal fuel format
shows T (Total Fuel) and I (Internal Fuel).
Left/Right Inboard Station • UP ARROW: Increases Bingo Fuel Level
Jettison Buttons
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

• DOWN ARROW: Decreases Bingo Fuel Level

• ZONE: Displays Local or Zulu Time
Left/Right Outboard Station • ET: Stopwatch Elapsed Time Function
Jettison Buttons
Fuel Quantity Indicators (lbs)
Fuel indicator will vary based on what QTY IFEI sub-
Nose Landing Gear Indicator level is selected.
Illuminated = deployed

Bingo Fuel Setting (lbs)

Left/Right Landing Gear Indicators “Bingo Fuel” is the fuel quantity required to go back
Illuminated = deployed to base safely. This is set by the pilot manually.

Half & Full Flaps Indicator Clock (Time)

Illuminated = flaps selector to HALF or FULL and Can be either Local Time or Zulu Time
airspeed is below 250 kts

Flaps Abnormal Condition Indicator IFEI (Integrated Fuel /

Illuminated = flaps selector to HALF or FULL, and airspeed is above
250 kts or abnormal flap condition (any flap is off or lacks hydraulic Engine Indicator)
pressure), or aircraft is in speed recovery mode, or GAIN switch is in Brightness Control Video Recording Mode Selector Switch
the ORIDE position. Manual / OFF / Auto
Video Recording Selector Switch
Full Flaps Indicator HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display), LDDI (Left Digital Video Recording Selector Switch
Display Indicator), RDDI (Right Digital Display Indicator)
27
Illuminated = flaps deployed to FULL and airspeed is below 250 kts HUD (Heads-Up Display), LDIR, RDDI (Right DDI)
 DDI (Digital Display
HORNET
F/A-18C

A/G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode Button Indicator) Power Switch

OFF / Night Mode / Day Mode

A/A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Button

Fire Extinguisher
Discharge Pushbutton
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

DDI OSBs (Option Select Buttons)

These buttons select different options and menus in various
Tactical and Support pages

DDI Contrast Knob

Master Arm Switch

28
DDI Brightness Knob
 Master Caution Pushbutton
HORNET
F/A-18C

Left Engine FIRE Warning/Extinguisher Light

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Left Warning/Caution Advisory Lights

GO: Successful BIT (Built-In Test) of ALQ-165 (ASPJ, Airborne Self NO GO: Unsuccessful BIT (Built-In Test) of ALQ-165 (ASPJ, Airborne
Protection Jammer). Remains illuminated until BIT mode is Self Protection Jammer). Remains illuminated until BIT mode is
deselected. deselected. ALQ-126 jammer is inoperable.
L BLEED: Left engine bleed air valve is automatically closed due to R BLEED: Right engine bleed air valve is automatically closed due to
the Fire & Bleed Air Test switch or bleed air leak or fire has been the Fire & Bleed Air Test switch or bleed air leak or fire has been
detected in left engine bleed air ducting. detected in left engine bleed air ducting.
SPD BRK: Speed brake is not fully retracted STBY: ALQ-165 (ASPJ) is set to STBY (Standby) on the ECM
(Electronic Countermeasure) panel.
L BAR: Launch bar malfunction; nose gear cannot retract. Launch REC: Indicates aircraft is being illuminated by a threat’s radar.
bar can only be extended with weight on wheels.
L BAR: Launch bar extended with weight on wheels. XMIT: Lit when ECM Jammer is transmitting.

ASPJ OH: ALQ-165 (ASPJ, Airborne Self Protection Jammer) is

Overheating 29
 HUD Video Recording GO light
Option Select Pushbuttons and Displays
UFC (Upfront Controller) Display
HORNET

HUD (Heads-Up Display) BIT (Built-In Test)

F/A-18C

Shown: COMM 1 Frequency

Initiate Button
UFC Keypad
ENT: Enter (validates & saves entered values)
CLR: Clears selected data

HUD Video Recording NO GO light

UFC (Up-Front Control) UFC Brightness Control Knob

I/P Pushbutton Function Mode Key

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

EM CON: Emission Control System ON/OFF

I/P: Identification-of-Position (used by IFF)

COMM2 Radio Volume Knob

ADF 1/2 Function Select Switch
COMM2 Radio Frequency Display
• 1-20: Preset Radio Channel Display
• G: Guard Channel
COMM1 Radio Volume Knob • M: Manual Channel
• C: Cue Channel
• S: Maritime (Sea) Channel

COMM1 Radio Frequency Display

• 1-20: Preset Radio Channel Display COMM2 Radio Channel Selector Knob
• G: Guard Channel • Scroll mousewheel: changes channel
• M: Manual Channel • Left click: pushes knob to select channel
• C: Cue Channel
• S: Maritime (Sea) Channel Function Mode Keys
A/P: Sets UFC for Autopilot system relief modes
IFF: Sets UFC for IFF system
TCN: Sets UFC for TACAN
COMM1 Radio Channel Selector Knob ILS: Sets UFC for Instrumented Landing System
• Scroll mousewheel: changes channel D/L: Sets UFC for Datalink
• Left click: pushes knob to select channel BCN: Radar Beacon Identification System ON/OFF
ON/OFF: Powers UFC ON or OFF
30
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

HUD Symbology Brightness Selector Knob Black Level Control

Day mode increases brightness, while night mode has Adjusts NFLR (or NAVFLIR, Navigation Forward-Looking Infrared)
reduced brightness video plus or minus half a shade of gray per increment when
rotated.

HUD Symbology Brightness Control

HUD Video Control Switch
• Enables NFLR (or NAVFLIR, Navigation Forward-Looking
HUD Symbology Reject Switch Infrared) video to be displayed on the HUD with
• REJ 1 removes aircraft Mach number, aircraft Gs, bank selectable polarity (white hot / black hot)
angle and pointer, airspeed box, altitude box, peak • Modes: OFF / VIDEO / W/B (White/Black)
positive G and required ground speed cue from the
HUD.
• REJ 2 removes all REJ 1 symbology plus heading scale, HUD Balance Control
current heading indication, command heading marker,
Adjusts the HUD stroke brightness relative to the raster brightness.
NAV/TACAN range, and ET/CD timer.

HUD (Heads-Up Display) Control Panel

Attitude Source Selector Knob

• Selects which source is used to determine aircraft attitude in the
AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer Altitude Switch EADI (Electronic Attitude Display Indicator) DDI page.
Brightness Control Selects whether barometric altimeter (BARO) or radar • Modes: INS (Inertial Navigation System) / Automatic / Standby31
altimeter (RDR) altitude is displayed on the HUD
 Vertical Velocity (ft/min)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Aircraft Heading
HUD/BRU alignment crosses
Pilots line up their helmet-mounted display with
the Heads-Up Display/Boresight Reference Unit
Heading Scale by adjusting their seat height and making sure
both crosses are aligned.

Aircraft Pitch Ladder (deg)

Airspeed (kts)

Altitude (ft)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Angle of Attack (deg)

Mach Number

Aircraft Gs
(Accelerometer) Velocity Vector

Peak Aircraft G
Bank Angle Reference Line (45 deg)

Bank Angle Reference Line (30 deg)

Bank Angle
Bank Angle Reference Line (10 deg)

Bank Angle Reference Line (5 deg)

Bank Angle Reference Line (0 deg) 32

HORNET
F/A-18C

AoA (Angle of Attack) Bracket

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

AoA (Angle of Attack) Indexer Lights

33
HORNET
F/A-18C

LOCK light
Illuminates when radar has locked target. Single Target Track
(STT) and target within Rmax range (maximal missile range).

SHOOT light
Illuminates when weapon release interlocks are satisfied.
• Steady light: indicates that missile is within Rmax range,
or that gun target is within a firing solution.
• Flashing light: indicates that missile is within Rne (No
Escape missile range)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Strobe light
Flashes when missile shot is valid.

34
 APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) FIRE Right Engine FIRE Warning/Extinguisher
Warning/Extinguisher Light
HORNET

Light
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Right Warning/Caution Advisory Lights

RCDR ON: Flight Recorder is ON DISP: Countermeasure dispense program
is active
AI: Airborne Intercept (AI) Radar locked to SAM: Surface-to-Air Missile tracking
aircraft radar locked to aircraft. Light is solid when
radar is tracking and flashing when
guiding a missile.
CW: Aircraft illuminated by Continuous AAA: Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA) fire
Wave (CW) radar control radar is locked to aircraft. Steady
light for all radar directed AAA except
ZSU-23-4, in which the light will flash at 3
Hz.
35
 IR (Infrared) Cool Switch
DDI (Digital Display Used to start cooldown cycle for the AIM-9 infrared seeker to increase
Indicator) Power Switch sensitivity and reduce background noise.
• NORM: Seeker head cooldown cycle is active
HORNET
F/A-18C

OFF / Night Mode / Day Mode

• OFF: Cooling will still be sent to the AIM-9 seekers if there is no weight
on wheels, Master Arm switch is set to ARM, and AIM-9 is selected as
the priority weapon. Otherwise, cooling cycle is inactive.
Note: there is enough coolant to last three hours.

HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)

Brightness Control Switch

Magnetic Compass
Used as a backup
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

DDI OSBs (Option Select Buttons)

These buttons select different options and menus in various
Tactical and Support pages

DDI Brightness Knob

DDI Contrast Knob

Spin Recovery Spin Recovery Mode Switch

Mode ACTIVE light RCVY: Spin Recovery System ON
NORM: Spin Recovery System OFF 36
HORNET
F/A-18C

Standby Attitude Indicator

Caging Knob
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Standby Attitude Indicator

ALR-67 RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

RWR Intensity Knob

Standby Attitude Indicator

Test Button

Cockpit Right Louver (Air Flow

Outlet)

Standby Airspeed Indicator Standby Altimeter (ft)

(x100 kts)

Standby Vertical Velocity Indicator 37

HORNET

CRS (Course) Set Switch

F/A-18C

Heading Set Switch

AMPCD Symbology Brightness

AMPCD Mode Switch Control
Day/Night

AMPCD (Advanced
Multipurpose Color Display)
AMPCD Brightness Control
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

AMPCD OSBs DMS: Moving Map – Digital Map Set

(Option Select Button)

HSI (Horizontal Situation

Indicator) Overlay
Shown in Green

AMPCD Gain Control

AMPCD Contrast Control

38
 ALR-67 RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
Control Buttons
• POWER pushbutton: turns on RWR
HORNET
• DISPLAY pushbutton: when pressed, LIMIT light on
F/A-18C

DISPLAY pushbutton comes on and emitter display is

limited to the six highest priority emitters.
• SPECIAL pushbutton: N/A
ECM (Electronic Countermeasures) • OFFSET pushbutton: when pressed, ENABLE light on
Jettison OFFSET pushbutton switch comes on, and overlapping
symbols are separated to ease reading of display
• BIT pushbutton: enables RWR Built-In Test
DIS (Display) Type Selector
Selects priority of emitter type to be
displayed RWR Audio Control Knob
• N: Normal
• I: Intercept
• A: AAA (Anti-Aircraft Artillery)
• U: Unknown RWR Display DMR (Dimmer)
• F: Friendly Control Knob
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Dispenser Switch
BYPASS / ON / OFF
ECM (Electronic Countermeasures) Mode
Selector
• OFF: turns OFF ECM pod
• STBY: Standby mode
• BIT: ECM jammer pod Built-In Test
• REC: Smart Standby (pod emits based on signal
received)
• XMIT: ECM jammer is actively transmitting

Rudder Pedal
Adjustment Lever

Cabin Pressure Altitude (x1000 ft)

Auxiliary Release Switch
Enables jettison of hung stores or store
and rack/launcher combinations from
BRU-32/A racks on stations 2, 3, 5, 7 and 8.

39
 Weapon Release Button Sensor Control Switch
Gun Trigger Switch AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
HORNET

(Front of Stick)
F/A-18C

Pitch & Roll Trim Hat Switch

Paddle Switch
(Nosewheel steering disengage,
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Autopilot disengage & G-limiter

override switch)

Recce Event Mark Button

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
Weapon Select Switch
• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
• RIGHT: Select Amraam
• LEFT: No Function

40
 Arresting HOOK Light
Illuminates when Arresting Hook Wing Fold Lever
is in transition PULLED: Released / PUSHED: LOCKED
Right Mouse Button: lever moves clockwise
HORNET
Cockpit Right Louver Left Mouse Button: lever move anti-clockwise
Arresting Hook Lever
F/A-18C

Scroll Mousewheel: Pull/Stow Lever

(Air Flow Outlet) UP: Hook retracted
DOWN: Hook deployed
FCS AV COOL Switch
• NORM: Both FCC (Flight Controls Controller) and both
Landing Checklist transformer-rectifiers are cooled by avionics air.
• EMERG: FCCA and right transformer-rectifier cooled by
ram air, while FCC B and left transformer-rectifier
BUNO Placard cooled by avionics air.
Aircraft’s Bureau Number (BuNo), or
the USN/USMC serial number.

Radar Altimeter (x100 ft)

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Radar Altimeter BIT Light (Green)

Illuminates when RADALT BIT (Built-In Test) is occurring

Radar Altimeter LOW ALTITUDE Light (Red)

Illuminates when RADALT below Low Altitude Pointer

Radar Altimeter ON/OFF Indicator

Radar Altimeter is inhibited (OFF) above 5000 ft since
RADALT reading is not precise enough at that height

Radar Altimeter Low Altitude Pointer

Typically set to 200 ft for SHORE LANDINGs and
320 or 370 ft for carrier landings

Radar Altimeter Switch

• Push knob: RADALT test
• Turn knob: powers radar
altimeter and sets low
altitude index pointer

Hydraulic Pressure
Indicator (x1000 psi) 41
 Arresting Hook
Wings (Spread)
HORNET Lever (Retracted)

Wing Fold Lever

F/A-18C

(Wings Folded)

Arresting Hook
(Deployed)

Wings (Folded)
On aircraft carriers, wing folding is used
to save space on the hangar deck.
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Arresting Hook In
Transition

Wing Fold Lever

(Wings Spread)

Arresting Hook 42
Lever (Deployed)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Right Warning/Caution Advisory Lights

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

CK SEAT: APU ACC: BATT SW:

Ejection seat needs to be APU accumulator pressure Battery switch is
checked since it has not necessary for engine starting set to ON
been armed is insufficient

FCS HOT: GEN TIE:

Flight control computer and GEN TIE switch set to RESET
transformer/rectifier are
undercooled due to
insufficient avionics cooling
In right hand equipment bay.

FUEL LO: FCES:

Fuel quantity remaining is A function has been lost in
below 800 lbs in either of one or more axis of the Flight
two feed tanks Control Electronics Systems.
Loss of one of the eleven
flight control functions.

L GEN: R GEN:
Left generator outputs has Right generator outputs has
failed or is turned off failed or is turned off

43
HORNET Canopy Switch
F/A-18C

R GEN (Right Generator) Switch

FWD: NORM Cabin Pressurization Switch
AFT: OFF FWD: NORM Pressure
MIDDLE: DUMP Pressure
AFT: RAM/DUMP Pressure
Battery Switch
• FWD: NORM
• MIDDLE: OFF Defogging Handle
• AFT: OVERRIDE (Energizes E battery contactor
FWD: HIGH
regardless of charge status of U battery)
AFT: LOW

L GEN (Left Generator) Switch Windshield Anti-Ice/Rain Switch

FWD: NORM
•
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

FWD: High-volume high-pressure air at 250 deg F is

AFT: OFF
distributed across windshield for anti-ice
• MID: OFF
• AFT: Low-volume low-pressure air at 250 deg F is
U (Utility) Battery & E (Emergency) distributed across windshield to clear rain

Battery Voltmeters
Engine Bleed Air Select Switch (Switch can be turned & pulled)
• BOTH: Bleed airflow is provided to the ECS by both engines
• R OFF: Bleed airflow is provided to the ECS by left engine only
• L OFF: Bleed airflow is provided to the ECS by right engine only
• OFF: All bleed airflow from engines is shut off, including ECS cooling, cabin
ECS (Environmental Control pressurization, and warm air. Ram air is automatically used instead
System) Mode Switch • AUG (PULL): Allows APU to augment bleed air pressurization of the cabin when
• FWD: AUTO aircraft has weight on wheel and engine operating at less than intermediate
• MIDDLE: MAN settings.
• AFT: OFF/RAM

Engine Anti-Ice Switch

Cockpit Air Temperature • FWD: ON (Allows hot bleed air to circulate through engine
inlet and engine components)
Control Knob • MID: OFF
• AFT: TEST (Triggers ice caution message)

Pitot Heater Switch

• FWD: ON (Heaters are on when AC power is available)
• AFT: AUTO (Heaters are on when aircraft is airborne) 44
HORNET
Lighting Mode Switch
F/A-18C

• NVG: Night Vision Goggle setting, reduced brightness for warning,

caution and advisory lights, main and console lighting. Enables NVG
compatible flood lights to illuminate the consoles.
• NITE: Night setting, reduced brightness for warning, caution and
advisory lights, and normal intensity for main and console lighting
• DAY: Day setting, maximum brightness
LST/NFLR switch
Laser Spot Tracker/Navigation Forward-Looking
Infrared (LST/NFLR) sensor
Chart Light Dimmer Knob
INS (Inertial Navigation System) Mode Selector
• OFF: No Power to INS
• INS CV: INS Carrier Align mode
• INS GND: INS Ground Align mode
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

• NAV: INS Navigation mode

• IFA: Initiates INS In-Flight Alignment
Flood Light Dimmer Knob • GYRO: AHRS (Attitude Heading Reference Set) emergency
mode
• GB: INS does a Gyro Bias calibration
Instrument Panel Light Dimmer Knob • TEST: INS BIT (Built-In Test)

LTD/R switch
• LTD/R stands for Laser Target Designator/Ranger
• Switch can be set to ARM, SAFE or AFT

Console Light Dimmer Knob Radar Mode Switch

OFF / STANDBY / OPERATE / PULL EMERGENCY

Warning/Caution Light Dimmer Knob FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) Sensor Switch

ON / STBY / OFF

Lights Test Switch 45

 Arresting Hook Circuit Breaker
HORNET

FCS (Flight Control System)

F/A-18C

Channel 4 Circuit Breaker LG (Landing Gear) Circuit Breaker

FCS (Flight Control System)

Channel 3 Circuit Breaker
FCS BIT (Flight Control System Built-In Test)
Switch
Hold “Y” key binding to set it to ON. You will need this
binding since the FCS BIT can only be initiated when holding
both the FCS BIT switch and an OSB (Option Select Button)
on the DDI (Digital Display Indicator)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

VINSON KY-58 Radio Encryption Cockpit Utility Light

Power Select Knob

KY-58 Fill Select Knob

KY-58 Mode Select Knob

KY-58 Volume Knob

46
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Right AVTR (Airborne Video Tape

Recorder) Camera
Records right DDI. Used for mission debrief
Right AVTR Status Lights

Right AVTR Recorder

47
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Ejection Seat Arming Handle

DOWN: ARMED
UP: SAFE

Seat Height Adjustment Ejection Seat Manual Override Handle

Switch

Shoulder Harness Control

Handle
LOCK/UNLOCK Ejection Seat Control Handle
48
 TACTICAL MENU SUPPORT MENU
The DDI and AMPCD pages can be divided in two main
pages: the TACTICAL menu and the SUPPORT menu.
HORNET
F/A-18C

Each of these pages contains their own sub-menus

that can be selected with OSBs (Option Select Button).

You can switch between TACTICAL and SUPPORT main

pages by clicking on the OSB next to the incrementing
time on the lower section of the DDI. Once the OSB is
pressed, a boxed TAC menu will appear. If the OSB is
pressed again, a boxed SUPT menu will appear .
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

STORES sub-menu RDR ATTK sub-menu TGT DATA sub-menu HSI sub-menu ADI sub-menu
Showcases what stores & equipment Radar display page Target Data page Horizontal Situation Indicator EADI (Electronic Attitude Display Indicator) page
is loaded on the aircraft
FUEL sub-menu FPAS sub-menu
Fuel page Flight Performance Advisory System
HUD sub-menu AZ/EL sub-menu (N/A) FLIR sub-menu
Heads-Up Display repeater page Azimuth/Elevation page Targeting Pod feed page
UFC BU sub-menu (N/A) MIDS sub-menu
Up-Front Controller Back-up page Multifunctional Information Distribution System page

EW sub-menu SA sub-menu ENG sub-menu CHKLST sub-menu FCS sub-menu

Early Warning page (includes Radar Situational Awareness page Engine Data page Checklist page Flight Control System page
Warning Receiver display)
MUMI sub-menu (N/A) BIT sub-menu 49
Memory Unit Mission Initialization page Built-In Test page
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

STORES sub-menu TACTICAL MENU RDR ATTK sub-menu

HUD sub-menu EW sub-menu 50

 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

SA sub-menu
TACTICAL MENU

51
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

AZ/EL sub-menu TACTICAL MENU FLIR sub-menu

TGT DATA sub-menu 52

HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

HSI sub-menu FUEL sub-menu

SUPPORT MENU

FCS sub-menu53
ADI sub-menu
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

ENG sub-menu

SUPPORT MENU

BIT sub-menu

CHKLST sub-menu 54
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

SUPPORT MENU

FPAS sub-menu MIDS sub-menu

Flight Performance Advisory System (FPAS) Page. The FPAS The Multifunctional Information Distribution System
advises the pilot of the altitude and airspeed corresponding to (MIDS) is the NATO name for the communication
maximum inflight fuel efficiency based on current operating component of Link-16 Datalink System. MIDS is an
conditions. The range and airspeed data provided by FPAS advanced command, control, communications,
appears on the FPAS DDI page from the SUPT menu. computing and intelligence (C4I) system
incorporating high-capacity, jam-resistant, digital
communication links for exchange of near real-time
tactical information, including both data and voice,
among air, ground, and sea elements. MIDS is
intended to support key theater functions such as
surveillance, identification, air control, weapons
engagement coordination and direction for all
Services. 55
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

SUPPORT MENU

MUMI sub-menu UFC BU sub-menu

56
 For DDI, MPCD, UFC and HUD operation, Backy51 created a nice guide for it. It’s a useful resource.

Forum link:
HORNET
F/A-18C

https://forums.eagle.ru/showthread.php?t=212389

Abbreviated Aircrew Checklist link:

https://www.digitalcombatsimulator.com/en/files/3300819/
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

57
 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

M61A2 Vulcan Gun

58
 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

Attack Indexer
Landing Gear Angle of

59
 Speed Brake
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Bar
(Retracted)

Flaps
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Tailhook (Arresting Hook)

Launch Bar
(Hooked in catapult shuttle)

LEX (Leading Edge Extension) Leading Edge Slats Holdback Bar

Catapult Shuttle
60
 Hangar Deck
HORNET
F/A-18C

Hangar Deck

Flight Deck
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Centerline

Hangar Deck

Ladder Lines

CVN-73 George Washington Aircraft Carrier 61

 No. 1 Catapult
HORNET Weapons Elevator
F/A-18C

Catapult Control Station

PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

No. 2 Catapult

No. 3 Catapult

No. 4 Catapult
62
 Steam Catapult Launch Rail
HORNET
F/A-18C

JBD (Jet Blast Deflector)

Deflects engine jet blast in order to not damage any aircraft
or injure carrier crew. They also act as heat shields since
many carrier-launched aircraft takeoff with afterburners on.
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

63
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Integrated Catapult Control Station

(ICCS), also called “The Bubble”.

64
HORNET
F/A-18C

Elevator
(Upper Level)
Elevator
Elevator (Upper Level)
(Upper Level)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Elevator
(Upper Level)

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

(Lower Level) (Lower Level) (Lower Level) (Lower Level)
65
 Arresting Wires
These wires are used to help the aircraft brake when landing on the carrier. The aircraft hook catches one of these
wires and brings the aircraft to a full stop. When landing, you have to aim for the third wire. The first wire landing is
a short landing, while a fourth wire landing is a long one.
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

66
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

IFLOLS (Improved Fresnel Lens Optical

Landing System)
Also called as “the ball” or “meatball”, the IFLOLS is used as
visual aid to land on the carrier. 67
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

LRLLS (Long Range Laser Lineup System)

Used for Case III recoveries to provide a visual cue to see
the lateral deviation from the centerline.

68
HORNET
F/A-18C

“The Island”
Building used to direct flight operations
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

69
 Primary Flight Control
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Bridge

Flag Bridge

70
 LSO
HORNET Radio callsign: “Paddles”
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

LSO (Landing Signal Officer) Station

Used for directing players in a multiplayer setting or
observing aircraft in a single player setting.

71
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Yellow Shirts
These include the Plane Directors who will guide you around the deck and into
position for launch. All taxi guidance comes from these personnel.
Other yellow shirts include Flight Deck Officers, Arresting Gear Officers,
Catapult Officers (Shooters), Catapult Spotters and Aircraft Handling Officers.

72
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

Green Shirts
You will encounter these personnel during launch as Catapult and Arresting Gear crews position the holdback bar and ensure
proper attachment to the catapult shuttle. Maintenance personnel of various specialties may also be on hand to troubleshoot
last minute problems with the aircraft.
73 equipment
Other green shirts include Helicopter Landing Signal Enlisted (LSE), Cargo-handling personnel, Ground support
troubleshooters, Hook runners and Photographers mates.
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

White Shirts
You will encounter these personnel during launch as Final Checkers give your aircraft a last-minute look for problems.
The Landing Signal Officers (LSO) are also white shirts.
Other white shirts include Safety personnel, Medical personnel, Quality Assurance personnel and Air Transfer Officers (ATO).
74
HORNET
F/A-18C

Brown Shirts
These include Plane Captains and
Line Petty Officers. Aircraft general
maintenance and servicing is
performed by these personnel. They
are responsible for the safe
operation of the aircraft in flight
Red Shirts and are often referred to as
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT

These are the Aviation Ordnancemen who build, test, transport, and load weapons on the aircraft. ‘owning’ the aircraft.
They also test and maintain the aircraft gun systems, as well as avionics and release equipment used
to employ weapons in the air.
Crash and salvage crews and Explosive Ordnance Disposal (EOD) personnel are also red shirts.
Blue Shirts
These personnel position aircraft on the deck when they are not being taxied by
the pilot. They include Aircraft handlers (pushers, chockers, chainers, etc.),
Tractor Drivers, Messengers and Phone Talkers and Elevator Operators.

Purple Shirts
These are the Fueling personnel who are responsible
for safely refueling aircraft and equipment on deck.
This is an important job due to the extreme risk fire 75
poses to a crowded flight deck.
 F/A-18C
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT HORNET

76
 F/A-18C
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE HORNET

77
 1
PRE-START-UP
1. Set Ejection Seat Lever – DOWN & ARMED
HORNET
3
F/A-18C

Set Harness Lever - FWD

2. Parking Brake Lever – ENGAGED
3. MASTER ARM switch – SAFE 8
4. Battery Switch – ON (Right Click) 6
Note: This will power the engine igniters,
canopy and IFEI (Integrated Fuel / Engine 4
Indicator) panel.
5. Check that hydraulic brake pressure gauge
displays at least 3000 psi
6. (Optional) Right click and hold Fire & Bleed Air
5
Test switch to the “Channel A” (Forward)
position to start the Fire/Bleed Air Test for
Detection Loop A.
• Wait for the aural warnings sequence
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

to finish before releasing the switch.

The switch will be sprung back to the
middle position on release. You should
hear “Engine Fire Left, Engine Fire Left,
Engine Fire Right, Engine Fire Right,
APU Fire, APU Fire, Bleed Air Left, 1a
1b 2
Bleed Air Left, Bleed Air Right, Bleed Air
Right!” Ejection Seat Not Armed
Ejection Seat Armed
• Left and right engine bleed air switches
will be automatically closed during and
after the test. We will have to re-open
them later on. 6 8 Fire & Bleed Air Test will illuminate all FIRE and BLEED
7. (Optional) Cycle Battery switch to OFF (left cautions for the duration of the test.
click), then back to ON (right click) to rewind
test audio tape. Alternatively, you can wait 10
seconds for the tape to rewind. Parking brake shown in default ENGAGED
8. (Optional) Left click and hold Fire & Bleed Air position. The way to engage it is to rotate the
Test switch to the “Channel B” (Aft) position to lever in the vertical PARK position by left-clicking
start the Fire/Bleed Air Test for Detection Loop the lever, then pull it by scrolling the
B. Wait for the aural warnings sequence to mousewheel.
finish before releasing the switch. The switch 78
will be sprung back to the middle position.
 START-UP PROCEDURE
9. Verify that no APU ACC (Auxiliary Power Unit Accumulator)
HORNET
F/A-18C

caution is visible on the Standby Caution Panel.

10. Left click on the APU switch to set it to ON (FWD) to start the
APU (Auxiliary Power Unit)
10
11. Verify that the APU ACC caution is visible on the Standby 9
Caution Panel and that the APU starts spooling up. In real 11
life, the Plane Captain (PC) would give you this confirmation, 12
but in DCS you can just listen for the APU spooling sound.
12. Once APU green light illuminates, the APU is now running. 13
The APU will provides air pressure for the F404 engines’ 14
pneumatic ATS (Air Turbine Starter). Engine Cranking 17
13. Start right engine first by setting Engine Crank switch – R 15a
(RIGHT) using right-click.
Note: It’s good practice to start the right engine since it
provides most of the hydraulic pressure available for the
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

brakes.
14. Right Engine cranking will begin as the AMAD (Airframe Throttle to OFF
Mounted Accessory Drive), which is pneumatically
connected to the APU’s starter, transmits power from the 15a 19a
ATS to the engine. Engine RPM will rise to approx. 25 %
RPM.
15. When Right Engine RPM reaches 25 %, press RSHIFT+HOME 17
to move the right throttle from the OFF detent to the IDLE Engine Running
detent to open the fuel valves and introduce fuel. Igniters 16
will kick in and trigger an engine lightoff.
16. Verify that EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) does not exceed Throttle to IDLE
750 deg C until engine stabilizes.
17. Wait for Right Engine RPM to stabilize around 60-65 % RPM. 15b
Confirm that right generator is running by checking that the 19b
R GEN caution is extinguished.
18. During engine start, the GPWS (Ground Proximity Warning
System) and Flight Controls voice alert system will do a BIT
(Built-In Test). Don’t worry, that’s normal. You will hear “Roll
Left, Roll Left! Flight Controls, Flight Controls!” and a
“Deedle deedle” sound.
19. Reset MASTER CAUTION pushbutton by pressing it. 79
 START-UP PROCEDURE
20. Power Left and Right DDIs (Digital Display Indicator) by setting each DDI knob to DAY (right click).
HORNET
F/A-18C

21. Turn on AMPCD (Advance Multi-Purpose Color Display) by setting its Brightness knob to the right
22. Turn HUD brightness control lever right to power Heads-Up Display.
23. Turn BLK LVL knob to the right
24. Set ALT switch to RDR to use the radar altimeter as an altitude reference
25. Set ATT switch to AUTO
26. Right-click Bleed Air Switch to rotate it 360 degrees clockwise from NORMAL back to NORMAL to re-open engine bleed air valves.
You should hear the ECS (Environmental Control System) kick in as engine bleed air valves open.
27. Left click and hold CANOPY switch to CLOSE to close canopy.
27

20
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

20

22 23

24
26 25

80
21
 START-UP PROCEDURE
28. Start INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment. 28a
HORNET
F/A-18C

INS GROUND ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

You can either use a Normal alignment (takes roughly 8 minutes) or a Stored Heading
alignment (takes roughly 90 seconds), which results in a quicker alignment. 28e
a) If on ground, set INS Selector switch to GND INS (Ground) to start the INS alignment phase. 28d INS ALIGNMENT Complete (OK)
b) If you wish to use a Stored Heading, press the DDI button next to STD HDG, then the stored
heading alignment will proceed and last for approx. 90 seconds. Otherwise, the normal
alignment will proceed and last for 8 minutes.
c) The alignment will take a few seconds to start. You can monitor the INS (Inertial Navigation
System) Ground Alignment progress on the AMPCD. The GRND QUAL timer displays the time
remaining in seconds. 28f
d) Once OK appears next to GRND QUAL, the INS alignment is complete.
e) Set the INS selector to INS IFA (In-Flight Alignment) if a GPS is available (any mission set
during 1986 or later should have it). POS/AINS mode (Position/Assisted-INS) will be visible
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), meaning that the GPS is used in conjunction with
INS to provide the position of the aircraft.
f) If no GPS is available (mission set before 1986), set INS selector to NAV instead.

28e

28c INS ALIGNMENT time

28a remaining (seconds)

28b

81
 START-UP PROCEDURE
28. Start INS (Inertial Navigation System) Alignment. 28a
HORNET
F/A-18C

INS CARRIER (SEA) ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

You can either use a Normal alignment (takes roughly 8 minutes) or a Stored Heading alignment
(takes roughly 90 seconds), which results in a quicker alignment. 28e
a) If on an aircraft carrier, set INS Selector switch to CV INS (Carrier) to start the INS alignment 28d INS ALIGNMENT Complete (OK)
phase. With CV mode, the alignment will take its positional data directly from the carrier via a
SINS (Ship Inertial Navigation System) cable or a datalink radio frequency, which is already set up.
b) If you wish to use a Stored Heading, press the DDI button next to STD HDG, then the stored
heading alignment will proceed and last for approx. 90 seconds. Otherwise, the normal alignment
will proceed and last for 8 minutes.
c) The alignment will take a few seconds to start. You can monitor the INS (Inertial Navigation 28f
System) Ground Alignment progress on the AMPCD. The GRND QUAL timer displays the time
remaining in seconds.
d) Once OK appears next to GRND QUAL, the INS alignment is complete.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

e) Set the INS selector to INS IFA (In-Flight Alignment) if a GPS is available (any mission set during
1986 or later should have it). POS/AINS mode (Position/Assisted-INS) will be visible on the HSI
(Horizontal Situation Indicator), meaning that the GPS is used in conjunction with INS to provide
the position of the aircraft.
f) If no GPS is available (mission set before 1986), set INS selector to NAV instead.

28e

28c INS ALIGNMENT time

28a remaining (seconds)

CV CBL:
SINS Cable Connected

28
28b
82
 START-UP PROCEDURE
29. Verify that there are no cautions for engine 2 (like HYD 2A, HYD 2B, R GEN)
HORNET
F/A-18C

30. Set left DDI (Digital Display Indicator) to the FCS (Flight Control System) page
a) Press the OSB (Option Select Button) under TAC (Tactical) MENU to
select the SUPT (Support) MENU
b) Press the OSB next to FCS
31. Press the MASTER CAUTION pushbutton two times to re-stack the cautions and 29
advisories together. The FCS page will then be more visible.
32. The “X”s on the FCS page indicate a FCS system error. In our case, the errors are
probably due to wing droop caused by the aircraft being parked for too long.
33. Press the FCS RESET button to reset FCS faults. “X”s should disappear.
34. On the right DDI, the BIT FAILURES (Built-In Test) page is displayed. Press the
OSB next to STOP to stop the indications from blinking.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

30a 30b

31a 33a
34

32 33b

31b
83
Cautions and advisories un-stacked Cautions and advisories re-stacked
 START-UP PROCEDURE
35. Hold the LIGHTS TEST switch to test lights. Make sure
HORNET
F/A-18C

cautions illuminate properly, then release the switch.

36. Start left engine first by setting Engine Crank switch – L
(LEFT) using left-click.
37. Left Engine cranking will begin as the AMAD (Airframe 35a
Mounted Accessory Drive), which is pneumatically 36
connected to the APU’s starter, transmits power from the
ATS to the engine. Engine RPM will rise to approx. 25 %
RPM.
38. When Left Engine RPM reaches 25 %, press RALT+HOME to
38a 38a Throttle to OFF
move the left throttle from the OFF detent to the IDLE
detent to open the fuel valves and introduce fuel. Igniters
will kick in and trigger an engine lightoff.
39. Verify that EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) does not exceed
750 deg C until engine stabilizes.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

40. Wait for Left Engine RPM to stabilize around 60-65 % RPM.
Confirm that left generator is running by checking that the L
GEN caution is extinguished.

35b
Engine Cranking

40
38b Throttle to IDLE

39

40 84
Engine Running
 START-UP PROCEDURE
47
41. Verify that there are no cautions for engine 1 (like HYD 1A, HYD 1B, L GEN)
HORNET
F/A-18C

42. Following the second engine start, the APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) will shutdown
automatically approximately 1 minute after both engines are stabilized to IDLE.
43. Set OBOGS (On-Board Oxygen Generating System) switch – ON
44. Set HOOK BYPASS switch to FIELD if operating on an airfield or to CARRIER if operating on an
aircraft carrier.
45. Set FLAPS lever to HALF
46. Set ANTI-SKID switch ON if operating on a ground airfield
Set ANTI-SKID switch OFF if operating on a carrier
47. Set RADAR switch to OPERATE
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

42
45

43
46 41

44

85
 START-UP PROCEDURE
48. Run FCS BIT Test
HORNET
F/A-18C

a) On the BIT FAILURES page, click the OSB next to FCS-

MC to enter the Flight Control System – Mission
Computer Built-In Test page
b) MC1 and MC2 status should be GO. FCSA and FCSB
status should be PBIT GO. This means the FCS BIT
Test needs to be performed.
c) Press and hold “Y” key binding to hold the FCS BIT
switch to ON (UP) position.
d) While FCS BIT switch is held (Y), press the OSB next
to “FCS” to start the FCS BIT test. FCSA and FCSB 48b 48c
status will be “IN TEST” for the duration of the test.
49. Flight controls will move for the duration of the test. Test
will be complete when the FCSA and FCSB status will be GO.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

49
48a

Flight control surfaces will move automatically during FCS BIT Test

48d

48d
86
 START-UP PROCEDURE 50
50. Adjust AMPCD Gain, Contrast and Symbology brightness as
HORNET
F/A-18C

required. This will greatly improve readability. For night

operations, I would recommend setting AMPCD mode to 50
NGT since the brightness of the moving map can easily blind
you in low light conditions.
51. Set ZULU time in the cockpit. On the AMPCD, press the OSB
next to the TIMEUFC.
52. Then, go on the UFC (Up-Front Controller) and press the OSB
next to ZTOD to display ZULU time on the Heads-Up Display
once the aircraft wheels are OFF the ground.
53. Press the T/O TRIM button to set the aircraft trim for takeoff
configuration.
54. Set PITOT HEAT switch – AUTO (only use ON in case of icing
conditions on ground since AUTO inhibits Pitot Heat on
ground to maximize available power on takeoff)
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

52

50
50
51

53

54
87
 START-UP PROCEDURE Wings Unlocked

55. Set HUD repeater on the left DDI

HORNET
F/A-18C

a) Press the OSB next to MENU to enter the TAC page

b) Press the OSB next to HUD
56. Set FCS page on right DDI
a) Press the OSB next to MENU twice to enter the FCS page
b) Press the OSB next to FCS
57. If you are on the ground, verify that WINGS FOLD lever is in the SPREAD position (they may be folded if
you start from an aircraft carrier). If wings are folded, right click on the lever to set it to SPREAD, wait for
the wings to deploy all the way and confirm visually that the wings are deployed properly. Then, scroll
mousewheel to push the WING FOLD lever IN (PUSHED). The WING UNLK caution should disappear on
the HUD Repeater once wings are spread and locked. Keep your wings folded if on an aircraft carrier.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

Wings Folded

57

Wings Spread

88
 START-UP PROCEDURE
58. Set Radar Altimeter warning index to 200 ft if you intend to takeoff from a ground airfield (shore) or 80 ft from a carrier.
HORNET
F/A-18C

59. Uncage Standby Attitude Indicator. Red flag should be removed.

60. Set BINGO FUEL (minimum fuel needed to return to base) based on your mission profile by using the UP or DOWN arrow buttons on
the IFEI panel. Usually I set 8000 lbs.
61. Press the ALR-67 PWR button to power the Radar Warning Receiver (RWR)
62. Set ECM selector to STBY.
63. Set DISPENSER switch to ON (Middle).

59
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

58

61

62

63
60
89
 START-UP PROCEDURE
64. Set STROBE switch ON 68
HORNET
F/A-18C

65. Set POSITION LIGHTS switch to BRT

66. Set FORMATION LIGHTS to BRT Exterior Lights
67. Turn on lights using the throttle Exterior Lights switch (“L”) as required. Switch
67
68. Set LANDING/TAXI light switch – ON (UP)
69. Left click on Parking Brake lever to disengage it (PUSHED = DISENGAGED).
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

69a

Parking Brake Engaged (Out/Pulled)

66

65

69b

64

Parking Brake Disengaged (In/Pushed) 90

 START-UP PROCEDURE
Canopy Open
70. Remove chocks if installed (this is usually
HORNET
F/A-18C

the case when operating on an aircraft

carrier)
a) Make sure your canopy is open to
communicate to the ground crew
b) Press “\” (communication menu
binding) to contact ground crew
c) Press “F8” to select “Ground Crew”
d) Press “F4” to select “Wheel
Chocks”
e) Press “F2” to “Remove Wheel
Chocks”.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

70b
70a

70c

70d

70e

91
70e
 START-UP PROCEDURE 75

71. Power Up IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system by pressing the IFF Button, then
HORNET
F/A-18C

holding the ON button on the UFC for a few seconds. When « ON » is

displayed, the IFF has been powered up correctly.
72. Power Up Datalink system by pressing the D/L Button, then holding the ON
button on the UFC for a few seconds. When « ON » is displayed, the Datalink
has been powered up correctly.
73. On UFC, set desired Datalink Frequency by entering it on the scratchpad, then
pressing « ENT ». 127 is used by default, you can keep it.
74. Adjust all volume knobs on the Audio Panel as required. Take special care to
check that the MIDS A and MIDS B volume knobs are turned up
(Multifunctional Information Distribution System).
75. Verify on MIDS SUPT page that Datalink information is correct (Network, AIC, 74
F/F, Voice frequencies).
76. Equip either JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) helmet or NVGs
(Night Vision Goggles) as required.
PART 4 – START-UP PROCEDURE

a) Press “\” (communication menu binding) to contact ground crew

b) Press “F8” to select “Ground Crew”
c) Press “F8” to “Change helmet-mounted device”. 76
d) Press either “F1” for JHMCS or “F2” for NVGs.
77. If you want to use the JHMCS, turn HMD brightness knob to BRT.

72c 73
71c 77

71a 71b 72a 92

72b
 F/A-18C
PART 5 – TAKEOFF HORNET
SHORE TAKEOFF

93
HORNET
SHORE TAKEOFF
1. Ensure Anti-Skid Switch is set to ON (UP Position), and Flaps are
F/A-18C

HALF (MIDDLE position), chocks are removed, Launch Bar is

RETRACTED and Parking Brake is released
2. Throttle up and start taxiing
3. Aircraft is steered using the nosewheel steering (NWS),
controlled with rudder pedals.
• The default NWS LOW GAIN Mode allows +/- 16 deg
and is displayed as NWS on the HUD. Nosewheel Steering LOW GAIN Mode
• The NWS HIGH GAIN Mode allows +/- 75 deg steering, (NWS)
which is useful on aircraft carriers or small spaces. You
can activate it by pressing and holding the «Undesignate
/Nosewheel Steer Switch» (key binding: « S ») button on
NWS (LOW GAIN): +/-16 deg
your HOTAS. This steering mode is displayed as NWS HI
on the HUD. NWS HI (HIGH GAIN): +/-75 deg

Nosewheel Steering HIGH GAIN Mode

(NWS HI)

1
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

Paddle Switch
(Nosewheel steering disengage, Autopilot
disengage & G-limiter override switch)

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button

94
HORNET
SHORE TAKEOFF
4. Once lined up on the runway, hold brakes and
F/A-18C

throttle up to 80 % RPM
5. Release brakes and set throttle fully forward to
engage afterburners

4
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

95
HORNET
SHORE TAKEOFF
6. When reaching approx. 150 kts, hold stick back to
F/A-18C

set an aircraft pitch of 7 degrees AoA

7. Once you have a positive climb, raise landing gear 150 kts Airspeed, hold stick back to 7 Maintain AoA until the HUD water line
up before reaching 240 kts deg AoA (Angle of Attack) goes above the horizon line
8. Set Flaps lever – AUTO
9. Set ALTITUDE Switch to BARO once reaching an
altitude of 3000 ft to use Barometric Altitude as a
reference for your HUD.

6a

6b

9
Water Line
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

96
 F/A-18C
PART 5 – TAKEOFF HORNET
SHORE TAKEOFF

97
 F/A-18C
PART 5 – TAKEOFF HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF

98
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
1. Make sure the INS alignment was done with the INS Selector switch to CV. With CV mode, the alignment will take its positional data directly from the carrier via a SINS (Ship Inertial
F/A-18C

Navigation System) cable or a datalink radio frequency. Once alignment is finished, remember to verify that the INS Selector switch is set back to INS IFA (In-Flight Alignment) if a GPS
is available (any mission set during 1986 or later should have it) or at NAV if no GPS is available.
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

99
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF Canopy Open

2. Remove chocks if installed (this is usually the case when operating on an aircraft
F/A-18C

carrier)
a) Make sure your canopy is open to communicate to the ground crew
b) Press “\” (communication menu binding) to contact ground crew
c) Press “F8” to select “Ground Crew”
d) Press “F4” to select “Wheel Chocks”
e) Press “F2” to “Remove Wheel Chocks”.
3. In a carrier environment, it is highly recommended to taxi with your wings folded to
facilitate movement on the deck and minimize any risk of collision with obstacles or
other aircraft.

Wings Folded
2b

2a

2c

3
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

2d

2e

100
2e
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
4. Set Anti-Skid Switch to OFF (Down Position)
F/A-18C

5. Set Launch Bar to RETRACTED

6. Set HOOK BYPASS to CARRIER
7. Release Parking Brake (handle IN)
8. Throttle up and start taxiing

6
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

7
101
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
9. Aircraft is steered using the nosewheel steering (NWS), controlled
F/A-18C

with rudder pedals.

• The default NWS LOW GAIN Mode allows +/- 16 deg and is
displayed as NWS on the HUD.
• The NWS HIGH GAIN Mode allows +/- 75 deg steering,
which is useful on aircraft carriers or small spaces. You can
activate it by pressing and holding the «Undesignate
/Nosewheel Steer Switch» (key binding: « S ») button on
your HOTAS. This steering mode is displayed as NWS HI on
the HUD.
• Note: If the Launch Bar is deployed, NWS is disengaged NWS (LOW GAIN): +/-16deg
NWS HI (HIGH GAIN): +/-75deg
Nosewheel Steering LOW GAIN Mode
(NWS)
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

Undesignate / Nosewheel Nosewheel Steering HIGH GAIN Mode

102
Steering Button (NWS HI)
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
10. Verify the way is clear to the catapult first. You wouldn’t want someone to
F/A-18C

accidentally land on you while you line up on Catapult 3, eh?

11. Taxi to approach the catapult from directly behind it. If an aircraft is occupying
the catapult, wait behind the JBD (Jet Blast Deflector).
Taxi Director
12. If the Taxi Director (yellow shirt) is not present on the catapult, you can use the
“Ground Crew” menu to request a launch.
a) Press “\” (Communication Menu) and “F8” to select ground crew
b) Select “Request Launch” by pressing “F8”
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

JBD (Jet Blast Deflector)

Deflects engine jet blast in order to not damage any aircraft
or injure carrier crew. They also act as heat shields since
many carrier-launched aircraft takeoff with afterburners on.

103
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
13. When ready, advance on the retracted JBD (Jet Blast Deflector) and
F/A-18C

follow the Taxi Director’s hand signals to align the aircraft on the
catapult track.
14. When the Taxi Director closes his fists, gently stop the aircraft with
the wheel brakes.

13b – Taxi Forward

13c – Taxi Forward
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

14 – Stop

13a – Turn Right

104
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
15. When the Taxi Director extends his arms, he directs you to unfold
F/A-18C

(spread) your wings.

16. To spread wings:
a) Right click on the WING FOLD lever and set it to SPREAD
b) Wait for the wings to deploy properly
c) On your HUD Repeater, you should see WING UNLK. This
means that wings are spread out but not locked.
d) Push the WING FOLD lever forward (scroll mousewheel) to
lock the wing actuators. Wings Folded
e) Verify that the WING UNLK caution has disappeared and you
should be good to go.

15

16c 16e
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

Wings Folded Wings Spread UNLOCKED Wings Spread LOCKED

WING FOLD Lever OUT WING FOLD Lever IN

Wings Spread

16a 105
16b
16d
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
17. Set Flaps switch to HALF (MIDDLE position)
F/A-18C

18. While all of this is going on, the flight crew raises the jet blast deflector (JBD) behind the aircraft.

JBD (Jet Blast Deflector)

17
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

106
 CARRIER TAKEOFF 20a
20b
HORNET
19. When the Taxi Director unfolds his arm, he directs you to
F/A-18C

extend your launch bar.

20. Set Launch Bar switch to EXTEND (DOWN) to extend the
launch bar. Once launch bar is deployed, Nosewheel
Steering will automatically disconnect.
21. The Catapult crew (Green Shirt) will install the holdback
bar, which is used to maintain the aircraft in place until
the steam catapult is fired.

19a – Extend Launch Bar

PART 5 – TAKEOFF

19b – Extend Launch Bar

20b
21 107
 CARRIER TAKEOFF
23
HORNET
22. When the Taxi Director moves his arms back and
F/A-18C

forth, he directs you to throttle up and move

forward to hook the launch bar into the catapult
shuttle. Significant power may be required.
• Note: If you do not own the Supercarrier,
press “U” (“Catapult Hook Up” binding) to
hook Launch Bar into the Catapult Shuttle.
23. The catapult crew (green shirt) will monitor the
catapult shuttle and tell the Taxi Director when you
are hooked up.
24. When the launch bar drops over the shuttle, the
aircraft will be stopped as the holdback engages the
catapult buffer. Reduce power to idle.

Holdback Bar
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

24

Launch Bar
(Hooked in catapult shuttle)

22 Catapult Shuttle

108
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
25. The Catapult crew will verify that the aircraft launch bar is hooked into the catapult shuttle and that the holdback bar is installed properly.
F/A-18C

26. When checks are complete, the crew located in the ICCS (Integrated Catapult Control Station), also called the “Bubble”, will apply tension to the catapult. You will see steam emanating from
the catapult rail.

25
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

26

Integrated Catapult Control Station

(ICCS), also called “The Bubble”.

109
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
27. When the Taxi Director folds his arm, he directs you to raise the launch bar to seat it in the catapult shuttle.
F/A-18C

28. Set Launch Bar switch to RETRACT (UP) to raise the launch bar. The hydraulic pressure sets the bar to stick the shuttle, and the shuttle holds it in place mechanically. A spring then allows the
bar to flip as soon as the aircraft has left the shuttle and off the end of the deck.
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

28b

28a 28c

27

110
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
29. The Final Checkers (White Shirts) will inspect your aircraft for any last-minute problems.
F/A-18C
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

111
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
30. When operating from a carrier, the takeoff trim button set previously in the start-up procedure will have
F/A-18C

adjusted the stabilators at around 12 degrees nose up, which is not optimal for catapult takeoffs. Adjust takeoff
trim with the stabilator trim on your HOTAS as per the table shown to the right. As an example, for a weight
of 47222 lbs, we would set our stabilator to 17 deg nose up.
• Note 1: You can consult your stabilator angle on the SUPT (Support) FCS (Flight Control System) page
• Note 2: You can consult your weight on the SUPT (Support) CHKLST (Checklist) page
• Note 3: The Max Takeoff Weight of the Hornet is 51,900 lbs

30
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

Stabilator Angle Aircraft Weight

17 deg

Stabilator Angle
17 deg

SUPT FCS Page SUPT CHKLST Page 112

HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
31. Verify Speed Brake is retracted (IN).
F/A-18C

32. Perform a control wipeout to check flight controls

• Stick Full Forward
• Stick Full Aft
• Stick Full Left
• Stick Full Right Speed Brake OUT
• Rudder Full Left
• Rudder Full Right
33. When the Shooter gives you the « Engine Run Up » hand signal, throttle up to MAX 31 31
Power and engage afterburners. Speed Brake IN

33
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

Speed Brake IN

113
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
34. Throttle up fully forward to engage afterburners and let go of the flight stick.
F/A-18C

Take note that if the arrestor hook or launch bar is down, an afterburner lockout system
helps guard against inadvertent afterburner selection. The way to engage afterburners in
that case is to either raise the finger lifts (press 0 & 9) and throttle up to MAX OR apply a
force of approximately 32 pounds (not simulated) before the throttles can be moved to MAX.
If finger lifts are not raised, the throttle will be stopped at MIL instead of MAX.

34b
34a

34d

Finger Lifts Down Finger Lifts Up

PART 5 – TAKEOFF

MIL Detent

MAX Detent

34d
34c
114
Afterburners not engaged, throttles stopped at MIL (Finger Lift Down) Afterburners engaged, throttles stopped at MAX (Finger Lift Up)
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
35. Check the engine instruments and monitor the caution
F/A-18C

and warning lights.

36. Press “LCTRL+LSHIFT+S” to salute the Shooter.
Alternatively, you can also do this through the ground
crew menu.
a) Press “\” (Communication Menu) and “F8” to
select ground crew 37
b) Select “Salute!” by pressing “F9”
37
37. All Final Checkers and crew will do a quick last check,
then give a thumbs up.

36
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

37
115
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
38. The Catapult Officer (Shooter) will make
F/A-18C

final checks, looking fore and aft, and

then touch the deck.
39. The Shooter will then extend his arm,
giving the signal to fire the catapult.
40. The aircraft will accelerate, reaching end
speed in about two seconds.
41. The FCS (Flight Control System) will
automatically set your flight control
surfaces to the best climb attitude.
42. Once you have a positive climb, take back
control of the flight stick.
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

116
HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF
43. Raise landing gear up before reaching 240 kts
F/A-18C

44. Set Flaps lever – AUTO

45. After take off, perform Clearing Turn, which is 20 degree left and heading BRC
(Basic Recovery Course). Maintain 500 ft and 300 kts.
46. After away from carrier about 7 nm, you are cleared to climb more than 500 ft.
47. Set ALTITUDE Switch to BARO once reaching an altitude of 3000 ft to use
Barometric Altitude as a reference for your HUD.

47
PART 5 – TAKEOFF

43

44

117
 F/A-18C
PART 5 – TAKEOFF HORNET
CARRIER TAKEOFF

118
HORNET
F/A-18C
CARRIER TAKEOFF

Case II Departure

Case I Departure

Case III Departure

PART 5 – TAKEOFF

119
 SHORE LANDING
VFR
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Set Anti-Skid Switch to ON (UP Position) & Landing Lights ON

2. Set ALTITUDE Switch to RDR to use your radar altimeter as a reference
for your HUD.
3. Enter upwind leg at approx. 350 kts at about 1000 ft altitude

1
PART 6 – LANDING

120
 F/A-18C
PART 6 – LANDING HORNET
VFR
SHORE LANDING

121
 SHORE LANDING
VFR
HORNET
F/A-18C

Altitude
4. When turning left from the upwind leg to the crosswind leg, try to pull a number of Gs that is 1 %
of your airspeed (i.e. 3.5 G turn if going at 350 kts) while maintaining your velocity vector on the
horizon line. This should line up your downwind leg to about 1.2 nm away from the runway.
Airspeed
5. Slow down to 250 kts and fly at 600 ft
6. Set Landing Gear Lever - DOWN
7. Flaps Lever – FULL (DOWN)
8. As you enter downwind leg, slow down to ON SPEED AOA by setting the velocity vector in the
middle of the “E” bracket on the HUD using elevator trim and throttle input. You should reach an
4
airspeed of about 140-150 kts for an AoA (Angle of Attack) to 8.1 deg approx. Make sure to
maintain your 600 ft altitude by keeping the velocity vector on the horizon line. The AoA Indexer Gs
will also give you a good reference if you have the correct Angle of Attack or not. Velocity Vector

AoA Indexer
Shows Good AoA

6
PART 6 – LANDING

Horizon Line

Velocity Vector
7

“E” Bracket

122
 SHORE LANDING
VFR
HORNET
F/A-18C

9. When turning to base leg, start a 30-degree bank while maintaining the Velocity Vector and the E bracket
just below the horizon line. Maintaining the 600 ft altitude will require you to adjust the throttle constantly.
10. When lined up with the runway, set velocity vector on the runway and keep it there. Keep your velocity
vector pointed on the runway with your flight stick, and control your glide slope and angle of attack with
your throttle. That’s called flying “pitch for speed, power for altitude”.
11. Don’t check your speed, if you have a good AoA and velocity vector, you’ll be on speed.
12. Once AoA Indexer shows that you are ON SPEED (orange donut) and that your velocity vector is on the
runway, just let yourself touchdown on the runway. It will feel like a controlled crash into the ground; that’s
normal.

9a 9b 12
PART 6 – LANDING

Horizon Line Runway

Velocity Vector
Velocity Vector
30 deg E Bracket
Bank Angle AoA Indexer E Bracket
Shows Good AoA
123
 F/A-18C
PART 6 – LANDING HORNET
VFR
SHORE LANDING

124
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

A “case 1 recovery” is simply a fancy term to qualify what kind of landing you perform.

CASE I: occurs when flights are anticipated to not encounter instrument conditions during daytime departure/recovery, and the ceiling and visibility around the carrier are
no lower than 3000 ft and 5 nm.

CASE II: occurs when flights may encounter instrument conditions during day time departure/recovery, and the ceiling and visibility in the carrier control zone are no lower
than 1000 ft and 5 nm.

CASE III: occurs when flights are expected to encounter instrument conditions during a departure/recovery because the ceiling or visibility around the carrier is lower than
1000 ft and 5 nm, or for night departures/recoveries.

The procedure to land on a carrier is in fact quite similar to the procedure shown in the SHORE
LANDING tutorial. The only things that change is that the runway is moving, may pitch up and
down and is much smaller. Here is a couple of videos I recommend you watch before
attempting a carrier landing:

• Carrier Landing Tutorial by Matt Wagner:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TuigBLhtAH8
• Carrier Landing Tutorial by Jabbers:
https://youtu.be/lm-M3VUy-_I
PART 6 – LANDING

• Carrier Landing Discussions by F/A-18 Pilot A.E.W.:

https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCNvV27UZkI8W-jvMA-iGqyQ
• Carrier Ops Instructional by F/A-18 Pilot Lex Talionis:
https://youtu.be/bLOZJ0tpzRs
• Carrier Operations by Redkite:
Aircraft Weight
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LMJ1Y57qtjI

Note: The maximum weight allowable for a carrier landing is 33,000 lbs. If you are too heavy,
you can either fly around to burn fuel, jettison fuel or jettison your ordnance. Your current
weight is accessible through your Support CHKLST page.
125
SUPT CHKLST Page
 1g
CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY 1h
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Contact Carrier to turn on the lights

a. Left click on the COMM1 knob to pull it and select COMM1 Radio 1c
b. Scroll mousewheel on COMM1 Radio Channel Selector to M (Manual) Mode
c. Press the OSB next to AM or FM to select the FM frequency (“:FM” will
appear when selected) 1h 1b
d. Press CLR on the UFC to clear current frequency
e. Type “127500” on the UFC to set carrier radio frequency 127.5 MHz 1a 1b
f. Press ENT on the UFC to enter this frequency
g. Press the COMM switch – COMM1 on your throttle to contact the carrier
(RALT+\)
h. Go in F5 – AT5 menu, then to the CVN-74 menu, then to the F1 – Inbound
menu. 1d
i. And that’s it, the carrier is now illuminated.

1h
1i

1d
PART 6 – LANDING

1e

1f

126
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

2. Set Anti-Skid Switch to OFF (Down Position), Hook Lever DOWN, Hook
Bypass Switch to CARRIER, and Landing Lights ON
3. Set ALTITUDE Switch to RDR to use your radar altimeter as a reference for
your HUD and set radar altimeter index to 370 ft or 320 (as you prefer). You
use 370 ft to remind you that you need to make the ball call or 320 ft to
make sure you have the proper altitude when 3/4 nm from the carrier.
4. Enter upwind leg at approx. 350 kts and 800 ft altitude

2
2

2
PART 6 – LANDING

3
3

127
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

Crosswind leg

Upwind leg
PART 6 – LANDING

128
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY Altitude
HORNET
F/A-18C

5. When turning left from the upwind leg to the crosswind leg, try to do pull a number of Gs that is 1 % Airspeed
of your airspeed (i.e. 3.5 G turn if going at 350 kts) while maintaining your velocity vector on the
horizon line. This should line up your downwind leg to about 1.2 nm away from the runway.
6. Slow down to 250 kts at fly at 600 ft
7. Set Landing Gear Lever - DOWN
8. Flaps Lever – FULL (DOWN)
9. As you enter downwind leg, slow down to ON SPEED AOA by setting the velocity vector in the middle
of the “E” bracket on the HUD using elevator trim (super important) and throttle input. I cannot
5
stress it enough: make sure you are properly trimmed. You should reach an airspeed of about 140-
150 kts for an AoA (Angle of Attack) to 8.1 deg approx. If you fail to trim to 8 degrees, your AoA will
be off and you will be fighting the fly-by-wire system all the way to landing. Make sure to maintain Gs
your 600 ft altitude by keeping the velocity vector on the horizon line. The AoA Indexer will also give Velocity Vector
you a good reference if you have the correct Angle of Attack or not.

AoA Indexer
Shows Good AoA
PART 6 – LANDING

Horizon Line
7

Velocity Vector

“E” Bracket 8
129
 Rounddown
CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

Once flying abeam the ship on the downwind leg, start your
approach turn when your wing meets the ship’s Rounddown.

Approach Turn
PART 6 – LANDING

130
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

10. When turning to base leg, start a 30-degree bank while maintaining the Velocity Vector and the E bracket just below the horizon line. Maintaining the 600 ft altitude will
require you to adjust the throttle constantly. Forget about your airspeed: just focus on maintaining altitude and bank angle.
11. When lined up with the ship, you will be entering the “groove” (short final).
12. Once wings are level, you would normally “call the ball”. Example: “403, Hornet Ball, 3.0”. (Side number of your Hornet, Aircraft Type, “Ball”, Fuel State/Remaining in thousands
of pounds). The LSO (Landing Signal Officer) would then respond with “Roger Ball” and then give you corrections to land properly.
Altitude
Airspeed
(FORGET
ABOUT IT!)

Horizon line.

10
PART 6 – LANDING

11
Velocity Vector
Velocity Vector

E Bracket

Bank Angle

Angle of Attack (ON SPEED) Angle of Attack (ON SPEED) 131

 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

13. When entering the groove (final), if you set up your turn correctly the velocity vector should be lined up
with the crotch of the ship. This is called “Spotting the Deck”, and you should NOT use this as a reference to
land. Use the meatball, E bracket and the AoA Indexer instead as a reference (see next page), and control
your glide slope and angle of attack with your throttle. That’s called flying “pitch for speed, power for
altitude”.
14. Don’t check your speed, if you have a good AoA, you’ll be on speed.
15. Once AoA Indexer shows that you are ON SPEED (orange donut) and that your velocity vector is on the
runway, just let yourself touchdown on the carrier. DO NOT FLARE. Ever. It will feel like a controlled crash
into the deck; that’s normal. Don’t use brakes either.

Meatball
PART 6 – LANDING

15

Meatball
Crotch of ship

Ship’s Crotch
Angle of Attack (ON SPEED) 132
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

But what is “the ball” (or “meatball”), exactly? In fact, it’s the
IFLOLS (Improved Fresnel Lens Optical Landing System), which
acts a bit like PAPI lights but for aircraft carriers. The color of
the lights you see will depend on what your angle with the
lights and will tell you your glide slope, or in other words “if
you need to add or reduce power”. The lights that will matter
the most are the vertical center lights.
• If you see the bottom red lights (“Atomic Sunrise”), you’re
about to hit the back of the ship. Throttle up and go
around!
Vertical scale: This is what you
• If you see a centered orange light, you’re on the ball and should monitor throughout the
should catch a wire. whole landing.
• If the ball is high, this means you should reduce power very
slightly.
• If the ball is low, you need to add power
• Avoid making large power corrections and stay lined up as
much as possible. IFLOLS (Improved Fresnel Lens Optical
• Overall, keep your eyes glued to your AoA Landing System)
Indexer and the “ball”. It will tell you what to do. Also called as “the ball” or “meatball”, the IFLOLS is used as
visual aid to land on the carrier.
PART 6 – LANDING

AoA Indexer: provides a similar

function to the IFLOS. That picture shows the AoA Indexer telling me that I am
too fast and the meatball telling me I am too low. It will 133
not tell me that I am too far left of lineup though.
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 6 – LANDING

134
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

13. You should aim for the third arrestor wire. First and second wires indicate a short landing, while the fourth wire indicates a long landing.
14. Once you touch the deck, throttle up to MIL power (just before afterburner detent). This will make sure that you have enough power to go around if your hook misses an
arrestor wire (this is what we call a “bolter”) or you catch a wire and it snaps.
15. Once the aircraft has come to a full stop, throttle down, raise arrestor hook, set flaps UP, fold wings and taxi to the nearest parking area. The WING FOLD lever needs to be
pulled first (scroll mousewheel), then rotated left to FOLD (left click).
PART 6 – LANDING

135
 CARRIER LANDING
CASE I RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

Third Wire
PART 6 – LANDING

15

15

136
 LSO
CARRIER LANDING Radio callsign: “Paddles”
LSO (LANDING SIGNAL OFFICER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

You can also roleplay in multiplayer as the “LSO”

(Landing Signal Officer), you can! You can select
the LSO camera by pressing “LALT+F9”. The
camera can be moved and zoomed in or out using
LCTRL+[Numpad *] or LCTRL+[Numpad /]

You can help the pilot line up properly for landing

by giving him corrective commands like “Come
right for lineup, Come Left, You’re high, (Add)
Power”. Once the pilot has landed, you can also
give him a “grading” based on how he landed.
There is a cool LSO mod by the VFA-113 Stingers that gives you a slick overlay:
LSO Mod Link: www.VFA-113.com
LSO Mod Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vDG1_v1CJVI
PART 6 – LANDING

Keep the aircraft within this box

VFA-113 Stingers Plat Cam Mod

137
Default LSO Camera View
 CARRIER LANDING The VFA-113 Stingers have a short course on LSO & Carrier Landing Grading
LSO COMMUNICATIONS & GRADING LSO Training Course Link: https://youtu.be/BbMw4PcvMyY
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 6 – LANDING

138
 GENERAL LANDING TIPS
Caging the Velocity Vector
HORNET
F/A-18C

In high crosswind conditions, the velocity vector on your Heads-Up Display will drift away from the visible region of
the HUD. The velocity vector represents the point toward which the aircraft is flying along the aircraft’s actual flight b
path. You can “cage” the velocity vector (its lateral component will remain in the center of the HUD), which allows you
Cage/Uncage Button
to still get accurate vertical vector component, which is great for maintaining altitude or visualizing the angle of attack.

To cage or uncage the HUD:

a) Make sure you are in NAV Master Velocity Vector Uncaged Velocity Vector Caged
Mode (A/A and A/G Master Mode (drifts with wind) (centered on HUD)
buttons are both OFF)
b) Press the Cage/Uncage button on
the Throttle (“C” binding) to toggle
between Uncaged and Caged
mode

a
PART 6 – LANDING

139
 GENERAL LANDING TIPS
HUD Declutter Function
HORNET
F/A-18C

The Heads-Up Display of the Hornet contains a lot of

information, and during certain landing phases the
amount of information may clutter up the HUD and make
things harder to read than necessary. Thankfully, the
HUD Symbology Reject Switch allows you to reject (de-
clutter) superfluous information and leave you with only
HUD Symbology Reject Switch
the stuff you really need. • REJ 1 removes aircraft Mach number, aircraft Gs, bank angle and pointer,
airspeed box, altitude box, peak positive G and required ground speed cue
Setting the HUD Symbology Reject switch to REJ 2 is very from the HUD.
useful in Case III operations where you need to carefully • REJ 2 removes all REJ 1 symbology plus heading scale, current heading
track localizer and glide slope bars on the HUD. indication, command heading marker, NAV/TACAN range, and ET/CD timer.

HUD Symbology – NORM HUD Symbology – REJ 1 HUD Symbology – REJ 2

PART 6 – LANDING

140
 F/A-18C
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT HORNET

141
HORNET
F/A-18C
GENERAL ELECTRIC F404-GE-402 ENGINE
The Legacy “Charlie” Hornet is powered by two General Electric F404-GE-402 afterburning turbofan engines, which are able to provide 11,000 lbf (49 kN) of thrust each dry,
17,750 lbf (79.0 kN) with afterburner.

GE developed the F404 for the F/A-18 Hornet, shortly after losing the competition for the F-15 Eagle's engine to Pratt & Whitney, and losing the Lightweight Fighter (LWF)
competition to the Pratt & Whitney F100 powered YF-16. For the F/A-18, GE based the F404 on the YJ101 engine they had developed for the Northrop YF-17, enlarging the
bypass ratio from .20 to .34 to enable higher fuel economy. The engine was designed with a higher priority on reliability than performance. Cost was the main goal in the
design of the engine.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

GE also analyzed "throttle profiles" and found that pilots were changing throttle settings far more often than engineers previously expected; putting undue stress on the
engines. GE also sought with the F404 a design that would avoid compressor stalls and other engine failures, and would respond quickly to control inputs; a common
complaint of pilots converting from propeller planes to jets were that early turbojets were not responsive to changes in thrust input. Due to a fan designed to smooth airflow
before it enters the compressor, the F404 has high resistance to compressor stalls, even at high angles of attack. It requires less than two shop visits per 1,000 flight hours and
averages 6,500 hours between in-flight events. It also demonstrates high responsiveness to control inputs, spooling from idle to full afterburner in 4 seconds. The engine
contains an in-flight engine condition monitoring system (IECMS) that monitors for critical malfunctions and keeps track of parts lifetimes.

142
RM12 Variant of the F404 by Volvo
HORNET
F/A-18C
GENERAL ELECTRIC F404-GE-402 ENGINE
Keep in mind that even if the engine response is qualified as “quick” by modern standards, the engine spool time has a non-negligible lag time. This becomes apparent when
landing on a carrier, where throttle input is critical in order to control your descent and glide slope.

Another peculiarity of the Hornet is that the reheaters (afterburners) can only be monitored with the nozzle angle and the afterburner sounds. The fuel flow indication does
not give you the added fuel flow injected to the jet pipe downstream of (i.e. after) the turbine to the afterburner section. You can monitor engine parameters on the DDI ENG
Support page and on the IFEI (Integrated Fuel/Engine Indicator) panel.

Additionally, the ATC (Automatic Throttle Control) system is a two-mode auto-throttle system that automatically maintains angle of attack (approach mode) or airspeed (cruise
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

mode) by modulating engine thrust in the range of FLIGHT IDLE through MILITARY power. We will come back to the ATC in the « Autopilot » section of this guide.

IFEI (Integrated Fuel/Engine Indicator)

ENG DDI Support Page 143
 ENGINE CONTROLS APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) Switch
OFF / ON
APU READY Light
HORNET
F/A-18C

Finger lifts act as a stopper that prevents throttles from

accidentally going from IDLE to OFF once engines are started.
In order to shut down an engine, finger lifts are raised by
pressing “0” for right throttle and “9” for left throttle.

Left Throttle
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Engine Crank Switch

LEFT / OFF / RIGHT

ATC (Automatic Throttle Control)

Engage/Disengage Switch

Finger Lifts

Right Throttle

144
HORNET
F/A-18C
ENGINE INDICATIONS

Engine RPM Indication (%RPM)

PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) (deg C)

Engine Fuel Flow (x100 lbs/hour)

Engine Nozzle Position (% open)

Engine Oil Pressure (psi)

IFEI (Integrated Fuel/Engine Indicator)

145
 ENGINE INDICATIONS
HORNET Right EPE (Enhanced Performance Engine)
F/A-18C

Left EPE (Enhanced Performance Engine)

Temperature at Engine Inlet (deg C)

Engine N1 (Fan) RPM Indication (%RPM)

PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Engine N2 (Compressor) RPM Indication (%RPM)

EGT (Exhaust Gas Temperature) (deg C)

Engine Fuel Flow (lbs/hour)

Engine Nozzle Position (% open)

Engine Vibration Indication
Engine Oil Pressure (psi)
Fuel Temperature (deg C)

EPR (Engine Pressure Ratio)

CDP (Compressor Discharge Pressure) (psi)

TDP (Turbine Discharge Pressure) (psi)

ENG DDI Support Page

146
HORNET
F/A-18C
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE
If one of your engines happens to flame out during flight, you can restart it using a cross-bleed start. Bleed air is compressed air used for (among other things) engine start,
and is normally provided for starting by the APU (Auxiliary Power Unit). Cross-bleed simply means air supplied across from one running engine to start the other.

1. Set flamed out engine throttle to IDLE or above.

2. Adjust aircraft airspeed to 350 kts or more. Maintaining a high airspeed will allow windmilling (air flow driving the engine compressor blades) to maintain an engine RPM
between 12 % and 45 %, facilitating engine start. Windmill restart attempts made after RPM has degraded to 0 % may require up to 450 kts to obtain 12 % RPM for
ignition.
3. Make sure that you are flying below 25000 ft.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

4. Set ENG CRANK Switch to start flamed out engine

5. In case of a failed engine cross-bleed start, an engine restart with the APU as the bleed air source can be use as the last alternative.

147
 Guard (Right Click to flip)
HORNET
F/A-18C
FIRE DETECTION & SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
The fire detection and suppression system of the Hornet is pretty straightforward:

• When fire is detected, the FIRE Warning lights for the affected engine (or APU) will illuminate.
• The FIRE Warning lights are also pushlights as well. When pressing a FIRE pushlight, the corresponding engine feed
shutoff valve at the feed tanks closes, the crossfeed valve closes and the system arms the corresponding engine
fire or APU extinguisher system.
• When fuel shutoff valves are closed, press the Fire Extinguisher Discharge pushbutton. This will discharge a
chemical agent to extinguish the fire.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Right Engine FIRE Warning/Extinguisher Light

Left Engine FIRE Warning/Extinguisher Light

Fire Extinguisher APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) FIRE Warning/Extinguisher Light

Discharge Pushbutton 148
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Fuel Quantity in lbs

SUPT FUEL Page

FUEL TANK DESCRIPTION

TK 1 Fuselage Fuel Tank (No. 1)
L/R FD Left/Right Fuselage Engine Feed Tanks (No. 2 & 3)
TK 4 Fuselage Fuel Tank (No. 4)
L/R WG Left/Right Wing (Wet) Fuel Tank
L/R EXT Left/Right External Fuel Tanks
CL Centerline External Fuel Tank 149
HORNET
F/A-18C
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Refueling Probe
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

External Wing Fuel Tank (330 gal)

External Wing Fuel Tank (330 gal)

External Center Fuel Tank (330 gal) 150

HORNET
F/A-18C
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Refueling Probe Control Switch Internal Wing Fuel Tank Control Switch
EXTEND / RETRACT / EMERGENCY EXTENDED
• NORM: Normal
• INHIBIT: Prevents refueling of the internal wing tanks, prevents
fuel transfer from the internal wing tanks except by gravity,
and diverts recirculated fuel to the engine feed tanks.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

External Wing Fuel Tanks Control Switch

• OVERRIDE: Provides pressurization of and fuel transfer
from all wing external tanks during refueling. The other
external tank fuel control switch must be in STOP if fuel
transfer from its tank(s) is not desired.
• NORM: Normal allows refueling of selected external
• STOP: Prevents refueling of selected external

External Center Fuel Tank Control Switch

• OVERRIDE: Provides pressurization of and fuel transfer
from all installed external tanks during refueling. The other
external tank fuel control switch must be in STOP if fuel
transfer from its tank(s) is not desired.
• NORM: Normal allows refueling of selected external
• STOP: Prevents refueling of selected external

Fuel Dump Switch

151
 IFEI (Integrated Fuel / Engine Indicator) Buttons
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW • MODE: Toggles IFEI modes
• QTY: Toggles five sub-level fuel quantity format displays. Normal fuel format shows T (Total Fuel) and I (Internal
Fuel).
HORNET
F/A-18C

• UP ARROW: Increases Bingo Fuel Level

• DOWN ARROW: Decreases Bingo Fuel Level
• ZONE: Displays Local or Zulu Time
• ET: Stopwatch Elapsed Time Function
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Fuel Quantity Indicators (lbs)

Fuel indicator will vary based on what QTY IFEI sub-level is selected.

Bingo Fuel Setting (lbs)

“Bingo Fuel” is the fuel quantity required to go back
to base safely. This is set by the pilot manually.

152
HORNET
FUEL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Pressing QTY button toggles five sub-level fuel
F/A-18C

quantity format displays (shown above). Normal fuel

format shows T (Total Fuel) and I (Internal Fuel).
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

153
HORNET
F/A-18C
BINGO FUEL
BINGO fuel is the amount of fuel that once reached triggers an immediate return to home plate (home base). It takes
into account the fuel needed to fly the return leg of the flight, the fuel required to fly the briefed approach, the fuel
to go to the alternate (if necessary) and the emergency fuel which is not supposed to be used except in an
emergency.

• Your “BINGO FUEL” can be set by using the Bingo Fuel Setting Increase/Decrease Buttons on the IFEI panel
• When fuel state falls below BINGO fuel limit, an aural cue “Bingo” will be audible and a BINGO indication on your
DDI pages will appear. MASTER CAUTION will illuminate as well.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

• When fuel quantity remaining is below 800 pounds in either of the two feed tanks, an aural cue “Fuel Low” will be
audible and a FUEL LO indication on your DDI pages will appear. MASTER CAUTION will illuminate as well.

Bingo Fuel Setting Increase/Decrease

Buttons

Bingo Fuel Setting (lbs)

“Bingo Fuel” is the fuel quantity required to go back
to base safely. This is set by the pilot manually.

A moving caret is shown on the right side

of each tank to indicate the ratio of fuel
available to tank fuel capacity.

SUPT FUEL Page

154
HORNET
F/A-18C
FUEL DUMPING Fuel Dumping

« Fuel Dumping » is used when the aircraft is too heavy for aircraft carrier landing
weight requiresments. Setting the Fuel Dump Switch on will electrically latch the
switch in this position and allow the aircraft to jettison fuel in order to reduce its
weight.

With the dump valve open, the ejector or pumps force fuel out through each
vertical fin dump outlet.
PART 7 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT

Fuel Dumping continues until:

• Fuel Dump Switch is set to OFF, or
• BINGO fuel caution display comes on (fuel dumping automatically terminates)
• Either engine feed tank fuel drops below the FUEL LO level regardless of total
internal fuel quantity
Fuel Dump Outlet

Fuel Dump Switch

Bingo Fuel Setting
Fuel Dump Outlet

155
HORNET
F/A-18C
FCS: Flight Control System G LIMITER

The primary flight controls are the ailerons, twin The F/A-18 has a “G Limiter”, which can override flight controls to prevent the exceedance of any load limit.
rudders, differential/collective leading edge flaps,
differential/collective trailing edge flaps and • The aircraft design load limit is +7.5 g at 32,357 lbs gross weight
differential/collective stabilators. position the • Below 44,000 lbs gross weight, the positive symmetrical command limit is calculated based on fuel state and stores
control surfaces. Stick and rudder feel are provided loading.
by spring cartridges. Although there is no • Above 44,000 lbs gross weight, the positive symmetrical command limit is fixed at +5.5 g.
aerodynamic feedback to the stick and rudder • Negative symmetrical command limit is fixed at -3.0 g at all gross weights and stores loading
pedals, the effect is simulated by flight control
computer scheduling of control surface deflection Note: the G Limiter can be overridden by momentarily pressing the paddle switch with the control stick near full aft.
versus pilot input as a function of flight conditions. Command limit G is then increased by 33 %. A G-LIM OVRD caution is displayed and the MASTER CAUTION light and
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

tone come on.

Normally, inputs to the hydraulic actuators are
provided by the two flight control computers (FCC
A and FCC B) through the full authority control
augmentation system (CAS). A direct electrical link
(DEL) automatically backs up the CAS. DEL is
normally a digital system but has an analog mode
for backup aileron and rudder control. If digital DEL
fails, a mechanical link (MECH) automatically
provides roll and pitch control through a direct
mechanical input from the stick to the stabilator
actuators. MECH bypasses both flight control
computers and the stabilator actuator servo valves.

Flight control deflections can be monitored on the

DDI FCS (Flight Control System) page. This page
monitors all four FCS channels and “X”s means a
sub-system channel failure, or when the control
surfaces droop after the aircraft has been on the
ground for a while. In that case, the FCS RESET Paddle Switch
button resets these faults. (Nosewheel steering disengage, Autopilot
disengage & G-limiter override switch) 156
 HYDRAULIC
FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEMS
FUNCTIONS
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

157
HORNET
SRM (SPIN RECOVERY MODE)
The spin recovery system, when engaged, puts the flight controls in a spin recovery mode (SRM), which gives the pilot full aileron, rudder and stabilator authority without any
F/A-18C

control surface interconnects. The leading edge flaps are driven to 33 deg down and the trailing edge flaps are driven to 0 deg. The SRM will also give you a stick direction to
recover from the spin.

If Spin Recovery Switch is in NORM, spin recovery mode is engaged when:

• Airspeed is at 120 +/- 15 kts
• Sustained, uncommanded yaw rate
• Stick is placed in the direction indicated on the DDI spin recovery display
Note: The flight controls revert to CAS (Control Augmentation System) any time the stick is placed in the wrong direction (i.e. prospin), the airspeed increases above 245 kts or the
yaw rate decreases to less than 15 deg / sec.
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

If Spin Recovery Switch is in RCVY, spin recovery mode is engaged when:

• Airspeed is at 120 +/- 15 kts
Note: The flight controls revert to CAS when airspeed increases above 245 knots, but full authority prospin controls can be applied with the switch in RCVY and spin mode
engaged.

Spin recovery mode status

Corrective stick action

to recover from spin

SPIN RECOVERY Light

158
SPIN RECOVERY Switch
HORNET
FPAS (Flight Performance Advisory System)
The FPAS advises the pilot of the altitude and airspeed corresponding to maximum inflight fuel efficiency based on current operating conditions. The range and airspeed data
F/A-18C

provided by FPAS appears on the FPAS DDI page from the SUPT menu. The page is divided into five data areas and two select options.

Data Areas:
• Current Range:
• First Line: Current range of the aircraft until only 2,000 lbs. of
fuel remains based on the current altitude and Mach.
• Second Line: Best Mach to fly to extend range at the current
altitude
• Third Line: Calculated range if the aircraft is flown at the
optimal Mach at the current altitude.
• Current Endurance:
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

• First Line: Time in hours:minutes the aircraft can fly at the

current Mach and altitude.
• Second Line: Optimal Mach to fly to maximize flight
endurance time at the current altitude.
• Third Line: Light endurance time if the aircraft is flown at best
Mach at the current altitude.
• Optimal Range:
• Altitude and Mach at which to fly to achieve maximum range
to 2,000 or 0 lbs. of fuel remaining.
• Optimal Endurance:
• Altitude and Mach to fly to achieve the maximum flight
endurance time in hours:minutes to 2,000 or 0 lbs. of fuel
remaining.
• TACAN and Waypoint Navigation To:
• Time to reach, fuel remaining in lbs, and fuel burn rate as lbs
per nautical mile of a selected TACAN station or waypoint.

159
 FPAS (Flight Performance Advisory System)
Note: To have data displayed in the NAV TO field, make sure you either have a valid
HORNET
F/A-18C

WYPT (Waypoint) or a TCN (TACAN) selected (boxed).

PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

160
HORNET
FPAS (Flight Performance Advisory System)

Options:
F/A-18C

• Optimal Climb Selection:

• When the CLIMB option is boxed by pressing the OSB (Option Select Button)
next to it, the optimal climb airspeed is displayed above the airspeed box on
the HUD.
• Home Fuel Selection:
• Using the up and down arrows on OSBs next to HOME arrows, you may
designate any waypoint as the HOME location. Generally, you would want to
set this as your landing waypoint. When it is calculated that 2,000 lbs. of fuel
would remain upon reaching the location, the Master Caution will activate, and
the HOME FUEL caution is displayed on the DDI.
PART 8 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS

Optimal Climb Speed (kts)

Optimal Climb OSB Selection

Home Fuel OSB Selection

161
 SECTION STRUCTURE
• •
HORNET
1 - Sensors 2 - AN/APG-73 Radar
F/A-18C

• 1.1 – Introduction to Sensors • 2.3 – Air-to-Sea Modes

• 1.2 – Master Modes • 2.3.1 – Sea Surface Search Mode
• 1.3 – Sensors Display Selection • 2.4 – Radar Lingo and Terminology
• 1.4 – HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)
• 1.5 – My Sensors Control Setup
• 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II Targeting Pod
• 2 - AN/APG-73 Radar • 3.1 – Introduction
• 2.1 – Air-to-Air Modes • 3.2 – Displays
• 2.1.1 – Radar Display • 3.3 – Controls
• 2.1.1.1 – RDR ATTK Format • 3.4 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure
• 2.1.1.2 – AZ/EL Format • 3.5 – Pointing Methods
• 2.1.2 – Main Modes • 3.5.1 – Overview
• 2.1.3 – RWS (Range While Search) Mode • 3.5.2 – VVSLV (Velocity Vector Slaved)
• 2.1.4 – TWS (Track While Scan) Mode • 3.5.3 – Snowplow
• 2.1.5 – LTWS (Latent Track While Scan) Mode • 3.5.4 – Waypoint Slave
• 2.1.6 – VS (Velocity Search) Mode • 3.5.5 – Point & Area Track
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

• 2.1.7 – ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) Modes • 3.5.6 – Targeting Pod Offset
• 2.1.7.1 – ACM Mode Overview • 3.6 – Laser Spot Tracker (LST) Mode
• 2.1.7.2 – BST (Boresight) • 3.7 – Laser Marking
• 2.1.7.3 – VACQ (Vertical Acquisition) • 3.8 – Air-to-Air Operation
• 2.1.7.4 – WACQ (Wide Acquisition) • 3.8.1 – Operation Modes
• 2.1.7.5 – GACQ (Gun Acquisition) • 3.8.2 – Point Track
• 2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition • 3.8.3 – Air-to-Air Radar Slaving
• 2.1.8.1 – STT (Single Target Track) • 3.9 – Targeting Pod Tips
• 2.1.8.2 – AACQ (Automatic Acquisition)
• 2.1.8.3 - JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) Lock
• 4 - AGM-65F/G Maverick Air-to-Ground Missile (IR-MAVF)
• 2.2 – Air-to-Ground Modes
• 4.1 – Displays
• 2.2.1 – Air-to-Ground Radar Operating Modes
• 4.2 – Controls
• 2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
• 2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
• 2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)
• 2.2.3.2 – EXP2 (Patch Map)
• 2.2.3.3 – EXP3 (Synthetic-Aperture Radar/SAR Map)
• 2.2.3.4 – Designation with EXP Mode
• 2.2.4 – GMT (Ground Moving Target) Mode
• 2.2.5 – TA (Terrain Avoidance) Mode 162
HORNET
1.1 - INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
The F/A-18C Hornet is by definition one of the most versatile aircraft when it
F/A-18C

comes to armament and sensors. Sensors will come gradually as Early Access goes
Radar
on, so this section will be fleshed out as updates from Eagle Dynamics come. Here
is an overview of how the Hornet can “see” the outside world.

• AN/APG-73 Radar: pulse-Doppler, look-down/shoot-down radar with both BVR

(Beyond Visual Range) and close in ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) modes of
operation.
• Modes currently implemented are RWS (Range While Search), STT
(Single Target Track) and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering).

• AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II Targeting Pod (TGP): Targeting system developed

to provide precision strike capability. Target designation is achieved by using a AGM-65F
laser designator/range finder or an infrared laser marker, which can be created
by the pod itself. It is also capable of displaying a FLIR (Forward-Looking
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Infrared) thermal imagery.

• AGM-65F/G Maverick Seeker Head feed: Maverick air-to-ground missiles have

seeker heads that have video capability and that can be used as supplemental LITENING II Targeting Pod
sensors.

163
 Throttle Designator Controller
1.1 - INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

Antenna Elevation
HORNET
This section will introduce you to various sensors. You will get the « what », but the « how »
F/A-18C

will be demonstrated later in the Weapons section since the use and application of sensors
will make more sense to you once you start using them for a specific purpose. Just keep in
mind that your sensors can be monitored from the HUD (Heads-Up Display) and various
displays, while they can be operated from the HOTAS stick and throttle.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Sensors Panel

DISPLAYS

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS 164
HORNET
F/A-18C
1.1 - INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS

Heads-Up Display (HUD) RDR ATTK (RADAR) TAC PAGE

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Left DDI (Digital Display Indicator)

AMPCD (Advanced Multi- Right DDI (Digital Display Indicator)

Purpose Color Display)

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

165
 1.2 - MASTER MODES
Controlled via two buttons left of the left DDI, the F/A-18's avionics system always operates in one of three master modes: Navigation (NAV), Air-to-Ground (A/G), or Air-to-Air (A/A). These master
HORNET
F/A-18C

modes configure the avionics for one of these three purposes.

The master mode is changed via the two mentioned A/A and A/G buttons, which command A/A and A/G master mode respectively. A/A is also entered when selecting an air-to-air weapon via
the Weapon Select Switch. NAV master mode is entered when neither A/A nor A/G are selected. Both buttons have a light indicating either A/A or A/G master mode. Accordingly, NAV is indicated by
both lights being off.

• Navigation (NAV): NAV does not allow for any weapon-related symbology on the HUD, but does allow for selection and programming of air-to-ground weapons. In NAV, weapon release is inhibited.
NAV is the only master mode that shows the vertical velocity and bank angle indications on the HUD and allows for the velocity vector to be either caged or uncaged.

• Air-to-Ground (A/G): A/G allows for the release of air-to-ground weaponry. It shows the appropriate symbology for the selected air-to-ground weapon on the HUD. The velocity vector is always
uncaged in A/G. When A/G is entered, the STORES format is automatically brought up on the left DDI and the RDR ATTK in air-to-ground radar mode is on the right.

• Air-to-Air (A/A): A/A allows for the selection and release of air-to-air weapons, and shows the relevant HUD symbology for the current air-to-air weapon. The velocity vector is always caged in A/A.
When A/A is entered, the STORES format is automatically brought up on the left DDI and the RDR ATTK in air-to-air radar mode is on the right.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
• RIGHT: Select Amraam
• LEFT: No Function

A/A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Button

A/G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode Button

166
HORNET
1.2 - MASTER MODES
A/A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

167
HORNET
1.2 - MASTER MODES
A/G (Air-to-Ground) Master mode
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

168
HORNET
1.2 - MASTER MODES
NAV (Navigation) Master mode
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

169
 A/A (Air-to-Air) Master Mode Button AMPCD Selected Diamond
HORNET
1.3 - SENSOR DISPLAYS SELECTION
For those familiar with the A-10C Warthog, the Sensor Control Switch is similar to setting a
F/A-18C

SOI (Sensor of Interest).

• In A/G (Air-to-Ground) mode the switch selects your primary sensor on the displays.
• In A/A (Air-to-Air) Mode it selects your acquisition type.
Selecting a particular display allows you to use the TDC cursor and you can tell that sensor
is active by the little diamond that displays in the upper right corner of the DDIs

A/G (Air-to-Ground) Master Mode Button

DDI Selected Diamond

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Sensor Control Switch (A/G Mode) HUD Selected Dot

• AFT: Sensor controlled on AMPCD Display
• FWD: Sensor controlled on HUD
• LEFT: Sensor controlled on Left DDI
• RIGHT: Sensor controlled on Right DDI

Sensor Control Switch (A/A Mode)

• AFT: VACQ Mode
• FWD: Bore Sight Mode
• LEFT: WACQ Mode
• RIGHT: AACQ Mode
170
 1.4 - HMD (HELMET-MOUNTED DISPLAY) Sensor Control Switch (A/A Mode)
• FWD (hold for more than 800 ms): Selects JHMCS LHACQ (Long Range
Helmet Acquisition) Mode, which locks targets within 10 nm of the
HORNET
The HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) can be used by turning the HMD
F/A-18C

helmet reticle
Brightness Control Switch to BRT. The JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted • FWD (hold for less than 800 ms): Selects JHMCS HACQ (Helmet
Cueing System) allows the pilot to project the Heads-Up Display in his field Acquisition) Mode, which locks targets within 5 nm of the helmet reticle
of vision at all times. It also allows the slaving of sensors and weapons to
the helmet’s line of sight.
HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)
In the Hornet, the JHMCS is very useful for using missiles like the AIM-9X, Brightness Control Switch
an upgraded version of the AIM-9 with TVC (Thrust Vectoring Control)
allowing 80 deg off-boresight shots. HUD
HUD Projection on Helmet
Note:
Night Vision Goggles and JHMCS are mutually exclusive
helmet-mounted devices; you can only equip one or the
other. You can select what to equip via Ground Crew request.

JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System)

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

DISPLAYS

Radar Acquisition Mode

(LHACQ/HACQ)

171
HORNET
F/A-18C
1.5 - MY SENSORS CONTROL SETUP

TRIMMER PUSH
TRIMMER RIGHT WING DOWN
TRIMMER PULL
TRIMMER LEFT WING DOWN

Weapon Release TDC - DEPRESS

CAGE/UNCAGE BUTTON
Gun Trigger: Second
Detent
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Sensor Control Sw. FWD HARM Target Sequence

Sensor Control Sw. RIGHT COMM Switch: COMM 1 /RAID / FLIR Button
Sensor Control Sw. AFT COMM Switch: COMM 2
Sensor Control Sw. LEFT RADAR ELEVATION
Sensor Control Sw. DEPRESS CONTROL AXIS

Undesignate / Nose Wheel Steer Switch SPEED BRAKE RETRACT

SPEED BRAKE EXTEND TDC FORWARD

TDC RIGHT
TDC AFT
Autopilot / Nosewheel TDC LEFT
Steering Disengage (Paddle)
ATC Engage/Disengage
Throttle Finger Lift (BOTH)

172
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) B-Scope (Top-Down)
2.1.1.1 – Radar Display: RDR ATTK Format Representation
HORNET
F/A-18C

The air-to-air radar uses a B-Scope representation,

which is a top-down view of what’s in front of you.

• You can slew your radar and lock a target using

the TDC, or Throttle Designator Controller.
• Radar Data can be shown on the RDR ATTK TAC

Forward
page and on the HUD (Heads-Up Display).
• The Sensor Control Switch is used to set up
which display is selected (left DDI, right DDI, TDC
lower AMPCD or HUD) or which radar mode you
will be using.
Contact
Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Throttle Designator Controller

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

Antenna Elevation

Radar Power

173
Undesignate / Nosewheel Steering Button
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.1.1 – Radar Display: RDR ATTK Format Range: 160 nm
HORNET
F/A-18C

Total Azimuth: 140 deg

The Hornet’s radar has a range of 160 nautical miles, a horizontal arc of
140 degrees and a variable vertical arc that is customizable. You can
control the radar scan pattern (bars), which will give you a narrower or
wider scanning area.

The numbers next to the TDC correspond to the altitudes (in thousands
of feet) of the top and bottom of the radar beam at the distance of the
target designator. As you move the target designator closer and further
you will see the numbers change. The practical application is that the
radar will not detect targets above or below these altitudes which is
why you need to slew the radar antenna up and down to do a complete
search.
Note: Ranges are not to scale
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Acquisition Cursor

Upper number: Upper altitude covered by radar (9000 ft)
Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (-6000 ft)

Range: 160 nm

174
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.1.1 – Radar Display: RDR ATTK Format
HORNET
F/A-18C

Selected Weapon
9M: AIM-9M Sidewinder

Range Scale Reference: 40 nm

(can be set to 5/10/20/40/80/160 nm)

B-Sweep (Instantaneous azimuth Range: Full Scale (40 nm)

position of radar antenna)
Increase Range Scale

Range: 3/4 Scale (30 nm)

Ownship Heading
Antenna Elevation Caret Decrease Range Scale
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Range: 1/2 Scale (20 nm)

TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Acquisition Cursor
Upper number: Upper altitude covered by radar (31000 ft)
Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (15000 ft)

Range: 1/4 Scale (10 nm)

Range: 0 ft
Ownship Airspeed
• Kts Ownship altitude (ft)
• Mach

Radar Contact
Radar Azimuth (Total Coverage from left to right) Based on Azimuth and Range Scale, we can deduce that
(can be set to 20/40/60/80/140 deg) the contact is 8 nm in front of us, 20 degrees to our left
175
 TDC Control Indication Diamond
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) When the RADAR display is selected for TDC control in a BVR (Beyond Visual
Range) Mode, this diamond symbol is displayed in the top right corner of
2.1.1.1 – Radar Display: RDR ATTK Format Erase: all target history on radar
the display. Selecting the RADAR for TDC control is done by moving the
HORNET
F/A-18C

display are removed.

Sensor Control Switch to the right. Note that the RADAR is normally placed
Silent (SIL) Mode: Radar ceases operation on the right DDI. If your radar is placed on the left DDI, you’d need to set
and placed in STANDBY mode. the Sensor Control Switch left to move TDC on the left DDI.

Elevation Bar Scan

Cycles between 1, 2, 4 and 6 bars of faster scanning. Radar RWS DATA sub-menu
Operational Mode (OPR/STBY)

Radar’s Radio Frequency Channel

Radar Mode Selected

(RWS/TWS/STT/ACM)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency)

Medium/High/Interleaved

Radar Sensitivity Indicator

(high numbers, high sensitivity) RESET: Radar settings are
returned to default settings.
Radar Mode Selector
RWS: Range While Search NCTR: Non-Cooperative Target Recognition
TWS: Track While Scan
Radar RWS DATA sub-menu
CHAN: radio frequency channel on which radar will transmit. 176
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.1.1 – Radar Display: RDR ATTK Format
HORNET
F/A-18C

Radar RWS DATA sub-menu

Color selects the RADAR display to be

presented in monochrome or limited
use of colors of three colors

ECCM enables or disables Electronic Counter-

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Counter Measures. When enabled, the jamming

effects of hostile aircraft are less pronounced, MSI removes information from
but the sensitivity of the RADAR is reduced MSI (Multi-Sensor Integration),
which is basically contact/target
information gathered from the
Link-16 Datalink

LTWS provides Latent Track While

Scan function while in RWS (Range
While Search) mode.

BRA removes Bearing Range Declutter removes horizon

Altitude information from your
line and velocity vector
location to the TDC cursor. 177
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.1.2 – Radar Display: AZ/EL Format
HORNET
F/A-18C

Not available yet.

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

178
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.2 – Main Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

The radar has the following main modes: BVR (Beyond Visual Range, used for long-distance engagements), and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering, used for close air
engagements), AACQ (Automatic Acquisition) and STT (Single Target Track).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BVR Search sub-modes include:

• RWS (Range While Search): RWS radar mode allows for detection of contacts in a large volume. It is the default search mode for air-to-air or when an air-to-air missile is
placed in priority. RWS mode provides all-aspect (nose-on, tail-on) and all altitude (look-up, look-down) target detection. The display shows range as the vertical axis and
azimuth angle on the horizontal. While in RWS mode, the RADAR can maintain up to 10 trackfiles.

• TWS (Track While Scan): TWS maintains an actual track on several aircraft while still searching for others. The radar allocates part of its power to tracking the target or
targets while part of its power is allocated to scanning, unlike the straight tracking mode, when the radar directs all its power to tracking the acquired targets. In the TWS
mode the radar has a possibility to acquire additional targets as well as providing an overall view of the airspace and helping maintain better situational awareness. Since
the radar is sharing it's computing time between targets, the accuracy is less precise than for a single target track (STT) mode of operation. TWS mode allows for trackfiles
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

to be kept at a high update rate. To accomplish this, TWS artificially limits the scan volume (bars/azimuth) and provides for automatic scan centering. It is also optimal for
providing post-launch datalink for the AIM-120 AMRAAM missile while remaining in search.

• LTWS (Latent Track While Scan): LTWS provides a Track While Scan (TWS) function while in RWS mode. With LTWS enabled, placing the TDC over a target symbol will
display Launch and Steer (L&S) track symbols. However, no “Shoot” cues are displayed. An LTWS target will have its airspeed in Mach displayed to the left and its altitude
in thousands of feet to the right. Additionally, its range and closure information are displayed along the right tactical border. Note that weapons cannot, however, be
launched and guided from LTWS.

• VS (Velocity Search): Not Yet Implemented. A high PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) Pulse Doppler waveform is used for long range detection primarily against nose
aspect targets, giving velocity and azimuth information, but no range information. Although velocity search can work against tail-on targets, the Doppler return is weaker,
consequently the maximum detection range is also much less. When the target is in the beam (flying perpendicular to the fighter), the closure (Doppler) is the same as
ground return and target return is almost zero.

179
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.2 – Main Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

The radar has the following main modes: BVR (Beyond Visual Range, used for long-distance engagements), and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering, used for close air
engagements), AACQ (Automatic Acquisition) and STT (Single Target Track).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ACM sub-modes include:

• GACQ (Gun Acquisition): automatically enabled with air-to-air guns are selected

• BST (Boresight): searches targets out to 10 nm

• VACQ (Vertical Acquisition): vertical auto-acquisition search pattern covers from -13 deg to +46 deg, searches targets out to 5 nm

• WACQ (Wide Acquisition): space-stabilized mode that can be slewed using the TDC controller when uncaged, searches targets out to 10 nm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

If the JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) is active: LHACQ example from
Tricker’s Youtube Tutorial
• HACQ (Helmet Acquisition): if Sensor Control Switch is held for
less than 800 ms (0.8 sec), this mode allows you to lock targets
within 5 nm of the helmet reticle

• LHACQ (Long Range Helmet Acquisition): if Sensor Control Switch

is held for more than 800 ms (0.8 sec), this mode allows you to
lock targets within 10 nm of the helmet reticle

180
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.2 – Main Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

The radar has the following main modes: BVR (Beyond Visual Range, used for long-distance engagements), and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering, used for close air
engagements), AACQ (Automatic Acquisition) and STT (Single Target Track).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AACQ:

AACQ (Automatic Acquisition): AACQ serves as a fast way of acquiring a track/contact into Single Target Track. It is entered by pressing the Sensor Control Switch right when
the TDC is assigned to the RDR ATTK format, the A/A master mode is engaged, and the radar is not in an ACM mode. "AACQ" will be indicated on the RDR ATTK page and the
HUD. If the TDC cursor is not over a contact/track, AACQ will place the closest presently detected contact/track in an STT. If the TDC cursor is over a contact/track, it will place
it in STT.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

STT

STT (Single Target Track): STT mode is a traditional radar "lock" where the radar continuously scans a single target, resulting in a very high update rate; this makes it the
primary method of providing guidance to air-to-air weapons. STT maintains a trackfile for its target and automatically designates it as the L&S if it is not already. The radar is
slaved to this trackfile; as such, manual antenna elevation control is inhibited and the B-sweep follows the trackfile. Only the trackfile that is placed in STT is visible and all
onboard trackfiles are dropped. In STT, the RDR ATTK format is presented in azimuth along the horizontal axis and range along the vertical axis.

Single Target Track is obtained by:

• depressing the TDC while the cursor is over the Launch & Steering trackfile or while over any raw contact when in a mode where trackfiles are not displayed (e.g. RWS
without LTWS)
• using Automatic Acquisition
• using an Air Combat Maneuvering mode

STT is exited by pressing the Undesignate button. The radar is returned to the last-entered search mode.

181
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) FOR LONG RANGE:
BVR Mode is also known as RWS (Range While Search). The antenna
2.1.3 – RWS Mode follows the designated search pattern and informs you of all the tracks
HORNET
F/A-18C

discovered in one sweep. You can then select a specific track and lock it.
RWS (Range While Search) is the default search mode for air-to-air or when an air-to-air missile is
placed in priority.
In BVR mode, the Sensor Control Switch has the following functions:
• FWD: Switch to ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) mode with Boresight
selected by default
• AFT: Assigns TDC to center AMPCD
• LEFT: Assigns TDC to left DDI
• RIGHT: Assigns TDC to right DDI
Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

BVR (RWS) Mode

182
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

INTRODUCTION
TWS (Track While Scan) mode combines the information unique to RWS and STT (Single Target
Track) modes. Generally, the TWS display is very similar to the RWS display. TWS mode allows for
trackfiles to be kept at a high update rate. To accomplish this, TWS artificially limits the scan
volume (bars/azimuth) and provides for automatic scan centering. It is also optimal for providing
post-launch datalink for the AIM-120 AMRAAM missile while remaining in search.

When combined with the AIM-120, TWS provides a powerful ability to engage multiple targets
quickly. Nevertheless, the target tracking reliability is less than STT. Unlike STT though, a TWS
launch with an AMRAAM will not provide the enemy aircraft with a radar lock and launch
indication. As such, the first warning the enemy pilot will likely get is when the active radar
seeker of the AIM-120 missile goes active near the target.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

TWS has several restrictions. The radar will attempt to build track files for each contact, but given
a large scan volume, there will be a sizable refresh time between scans. During each scan the
radar will try to predict the position of the contact for the next scan. If, however the target takes
evasive, high-G maneuvers and quickly changing its trajectory and speed, the radar can lose the
track by making an incorrect track file prediction. Using such a defensive tactic, the hunter can
quickly become the hunted.

Since TWS mode is one of the more complex (yet powerful!) radar modes, this section will be
divided in the following sub-sections:
• A: Information Display
• B: Symbology
• C: TWS Scanning
• D: TWS Designation TWS Tutorial by Eagle Dynamics Producer Matt Wagner
• E: Scan Centering Methods https://youtu.be/dQDH2gLYsGg
• F: TWS Sub-Modes (SCAN RAID & EXP) 183
 SCAN RAID TWS Sub-Mode
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) HITS option (enabled)
(not enabled)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

Scan Centering Mode

TWS Mode Selected Selector
A – INFORMATION DISPLAY (AUTO/MAN/BIAS)
In TWS, contacts are automatically displayed as HAFU (Hostile,
Ambiguous, Friendly, Unknown) trackfile symbols if they are in the
top 8 ranked or are the Launch & Steering (L&S) Primary Target and
Secondary Designated Target (DT2).

However, when there are more hits than the maximum amount of Radar Contact “Brick” (Hit)
onboard trackfiles (10), TWS will display raw hits in the form of
rectangular bricks. These bricks (“hits”) are only displayed if the HITS
option is enabled (boxed).
TDC
A Launch Acceptable Region (LAR) indication is displayed for the L&S
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

and DT2, and any trackfile under the cursor.

DT2 (Secondary Designated Target)

L&S (Launch & Steering,

Launch Acceptable Primary Target)
Region (LAR)
You

EXP TWS Sub-Mode

184
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) HITS option (enabled)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

TWS Mode Selected

B – SYMBOLOGY Trackfiles (1 to 8)

Trackfiles: Trackfiles are displayed as HAFU symbols. The altitude in thousands

of feet on the right and Mach number on the left is displayed when cursored
over or designated as L&S or DT2. HAFUs are displayed most of them time in
TWS, specifically whenever:
• It is one of the top 8 ranked trackfiles.
• It is an offboard-only trackfile. Radar Contact “Bricks” (Hits)
• It is designated as the L&S or DT2. An L&S always exists in TWS.

Raw Bricks/Hits: When there are more hits than the maximum amount of
onboard trackfiles (10), TWS will display raw hits in the form of rectangular TDC
bricks. These bricks (“hits”) are only displayed if the HITS option is enabled
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

(boxed).

Launch & Steering (L&S) Primary Target: primary trackfile which weapons will
be guided against

Secondary Designated Target (DT2): secondary trackfile which weapons will

be guided against

DT2 (Secondary Designated Target)

HAFU Symbol Flying at Mach 0.5, 6500 ft, Unknown

L&S (Launch & Steering, Primary Target)

Flying at Mach 0.5, 6500 ft, Unknown

185
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) Max Bar Max Azimuth (deg)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode 2 80
HORNET
F/A-18C

C – TWS SCANNING 4 40

The TWS search mode artificially limits the radar to a scan volume (i.e. bar/azimuth
6 20
setting) deemed adequate for AMRAAM guidance and in general to maintain relatively
up-to-date trackfiles. This limit is enforced whenever the bar setting or azimuth setting Elevation Bar Scan
is changed; when one is set to a higher setting, if necessary the other one will be
decreased automatically.

• For example, if an 60° azimuth is selected and the bar setting is 4B or 6B, it will be
reduced to 2B. Alternatively, if a 4B bar is selected while the azimuth is 60°, then
the azimuth will be reduced to 40°.

• If TWS is entered from another mode and the scan volume has to be automatically
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

decreased to comply with the limits, the bar setting will be kept (except if 1B, as
explained below) and the azimuth will be decreased as necessary.
• TWS does not ever allow for a 120° scan azimuth, nor a 1 bar setting. TWS will
automatically change to 80°/2B if entered from RWS/VS with 120°/1B.

B-Sweep (Instantaneous azimuth

position of radar antenna)

Azimuth 186
 Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

D – TWS DESIGNATION
• TWS mode can be selected with the OSB next to the radar mode selector.
• To designate a primary target (L&S, Launch & Steering), press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of
the radar screen (RIGHT) to slave the TDC (Throttle Designation Controller) to the current radar screen
(diamond should be visible). Then, slew the TDC on the desired trackfile using the TDC controls and
designate target by using the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »). Keep in mind that this is NOT a radar lock.
• You can set the L&S on any trackfile you want by repeatingly pressing the « Undesignate » button on the
stick. This will cycle between the 10 trackfiles available.
• To designate a secondary target, repeat the same steps for L&S once a primary target has been designated. Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button

TWS Mode Selected TDC is active on Right DDI

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

TDC

L&S (Launch & Steering, Primary Target) DT2 (Secondary Designated Target) 187
 Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.1.4 – TWS Mode TDC

HORNET

(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
F/A-18C

D – TWS DESIGNATION
• You can swap L&S and DT2 by pressing the “Undesignate” button on the stick.
• L&S will be visible on the HUD as a square. DT2 will be visible as a “X”.
• You can transition into a proper radar “STT” (Single Target Track) lock by pressing
the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER ») a second time when TDC is over the L&S
trackfile.
Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

L&S DT2
L&S
DT2
DT2 L&S
L&S DT2

Before pressing After pressing

“Undesignate” Button “Undesignate” Button 188
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

E – SCAN CENTERING METHODS

Multiple methods of scan centering are available to keep trackfiles in the scan volume, with respect to both elevation and azimuth. AUTO/MAN can be toggled with the option on
the Attack Radar format, while BIAS is entered by slewing the TDC and using TDC DEPRESS in an empty area of the tactical region .

• MAN: Manual scan centering allows for the scan center to be set manually. The azimuth will be centered on the TDC cursor's present position. The antenna elevation can also
be manually manipulated.

• AUTO: Automatic scan centering mode centers the azimuth scan on the Launch & Steering (L&S) trackfile. When the L&S is changed, or the current L&S moves, the azimuth
center moves to keep it in the center. The antenna elevation is centered on the altitude of the L&S. If the L&S is lost/undesignated, MAN is automatically entered.

• BIAS: The TDC can be depressed on an empty area of the tactical region to enter bias scan centering mode. This allows for manual antenna elevation control and will center the
azimuth on the point where the TDC was depressed. This allows for the TDC to be moved without the scan center following it.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Antenna scans this zone

TDC
TDC (Depressed)

AUTO Mode 189

MAN Mode BIAS Mode
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

F – TWS SUB-MODES: SCAN RAID

SCAN RAID is a raid assessment mode.
• When an L&S (Launch & Steering Primary Target) exists, selecting the RAID option or the RAID button on HARM Target Sequence
the throttle will enter/exit SCAN RAID on the L&S trackfile. /RAID / FLIR Button
• SCAN RAID is also exited if the RSET option or Undesignate button is pressed or the L&S is dropped.

In SCAN RAID, the radar commands a special 22° azimuth 3 bar scan centered on the L&S. Doing what is
called "raid assessment," the radar will attempt to detect multiple target out of what it "thought" was a single
target. This "Doppler grouping" effect can occur when targets are in extremely close proximity and have the
same closure rate. SCAN RAID is purposed to combats this.
The SCAN RAID display is 22° x 10 nm centered on the SCAN RAID OFF Return To SCAN RAID ON
L&S. A Return to Search (RTS) option is displayed, as Search Option
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

SCAN RAID entirely changes the radar operation and

is not considered TWS. "SCAN RAID" is indicated in
the center of the format. Additionally, the B-sweep is
frozen on the azimuth, relative to the regular 140°
scale, where the L&S is (not relative to the 22° SCAN
RAID scale).

Raw hits are always displayed in SCAN RAID when the

trackfile limit is exceeded. Trackfiles/hits outside the
display are shown relative to the L&S along the border
of the tactical region. The bar, azimuth, EXP, range
scale, scan centering, and HITS options on the format
are unavailable.

AIM-120 launches can be supported in SCAN RAID. As

with any non-STT launch, an AIM-7 shot will result in
automatic acquisition of the L&S into Single Target L&S (Launch & Steering, Primary Target) 190
Track.
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.4 – TWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

F – TWS SUB-MODES: EXP (EXPAND MODE)

The TWS Expand mode (EXP) provides a zoomed-in view of the tactical region centered around the L&S trackfile. No change to the scan is made.

• EXP is entered by selecting the EXP option as long as an L&S exists. If the L&S is changed while EXP is engaged, it will change to center on the new L&S.
• EXP is exited via selecting EXP again or via the RSET option, or if the L&S is dropped.

The EXP view is 10 nm x 20°, centered on the L&S. Manual range scale adjustment is not available and the maximum/minimum range scale values on the top and bottom right
of the format indicate the actual ranges shown while in EXP. The B-sweep remains "scaled" to the regular 140° view in EXP. Trackfiles outside the EXP view are shown relative to
the L&S along the border of the tactical region.
L&S (Launch & Steering, Primary Target)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

RSET (Reset) Option

EXP ON
B Sweep
EXP OFF
191
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.5 – LTWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

Latent Track While Scan (LTWS) is a RWS option (you need to go in the DATA sub-menu of the RDR ATTK
page) allowing for raw contacts to be displayed as trackfiles with HAFU (Hostile, Ambiguous, Friendly,
Unknown) symbology and other information; with the Multi-sensor Integration (MSI) function, offboard
trackfile information can also be shown in LTWS. It also allows for the designation of a Launch & Steering
(L&S) and Secondary Designated Target (DT2) trackfile. Using the TDC “Depress” and “Slew” commands,
you can designate up to three targets.

An onboard-only track is not displayed unless the TDC cursor is over the associated raw contact bricks
(aka "target under cursor" or "TUC") or it is designated as the L&S or DT2. In these cases, the brick(s) will
be replaced by a HAFU symbol representing the track. Note that since multiple raw radar contacts may be
correlated to be a single aircraft and therefore one trackfile, a HAFU may replace multiple bricks.

Offboard-only tracks and tracks that are both onboard and offboard are always displayed as HAFUs and
never show their corresponding raw contacts. Note that MSI must be enabled to display offboard
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

trackfile information. We will further explore the HAFU symbology in the Datalink section.

RWS Mode LTWS provides Latent Track While

Scan function while in RWS (Range
While Search) mode.

HAFU symbols in LTWS, whenever under the cursor or designated as the L&S or DT2, feature the track's Mach
number on the left side and its altitude in thousands of feet on the right. A line also stems out to indicate a
trackfile's horizontal velocity (this applies for all).

An IFF interrogation is automatically sent when a TUC is performed. Tracks in LTWS also have Launch Acceptable
Region information displayed. Note that weapons cannot, however, be launched and guided from RWS.
Radar RWS DATA sub-menu 192
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.5 – LTWS Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

As you hover your TDC over the radar contacts in LTWS, there are two designations: the Launch & Steering target (L&S),
and the Secondary Designated Target (DT2). These are essentially the "primary" and "secondary" targets, as assigned by
the pilot (there cannot be a DT2 without an L&S). The L&S is also pertinent to air-to-air weapons delivery; launch
information is displayed and, depending on the radar mode and weapon, weapons may be guided onto the L&S. The L&S
and DT2 have target designators (TDs) superimposed on the HUD so that their position can be better visualized. A star
(L&S) and diamond (DT2) is placed in the center of the trackfile's HAFU symbol.
Radar Contact “Brick”

TDC

RWS Mode
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

HAFU Symbol

L&S
Flying at Mach 0.4, 10100 ft, Hostile

DT2 (Secondary Designated Target)

DT2 (Secondary Designated Target)

Flying at Mach 0.7, 6900 ft, Unknown
L&S (Launch & Steering/Primary Target)

193
LTWS Mode
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.6 – VS (Velocity Search) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

Not available yet.

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

194
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) RTS Option
2.1.7 – ACM Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.7.1 – Overview
The radar's Air Combat Maneuvering (ACM) modes are search modes designed to place a target in Single Target Track (STT)
at close range by acquiring it visually.

ACM mode is entered by:

ACM Mode
• Pressing the Sensor Control Switch forward when the A/A master mode is engaged, or
• Selecting the air-to-air gun via Weapon Select Switch aft

ACM mode places the Sensor Control Switch in "ACM condition." A boxed "ACM" indication and an option to return to
search (RTS) is then displayed on the RDR ATTK page. The TDC (Throttle Designation Controller) is automatically assigned to
the RDR ATTK page. For the HACQ, LHAQ, and WACQ modes, said mode is indicated on the HUD.

ACM mode is exited by:

• Pressing the Undesignate button on the stick, or
• Via the RTS (Return to Search) option on the RDR ATTK format
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

The radar returns to the last-entered search mode, except if the A/A gun is selected which will instead make the radar Sensor Control Switch
return to the Gun Acquisition ACM mode. If the radar is in STT, entering ACM will exit STT and exiting STT will exit STT and AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
ACM mode; ACM mode remains engaged even when an STT is obtained.
A/A Master Mode
FOR CLOSE RANGE:
ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) Mode has four sub-modes, which are all used for close
combat: Weapon Select Switch
• FWD: Select Sparrow
• GACQ (Gun Acquisition): automatically enabled with air-to-air guns are selected • AFT: Select Gun
• BST (Boresight): searches targets out to 10 nm • PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
• VACQ (Vertical Acquisition): vertical auto-acquisition search pattern covers from -13 deg • RIGHT: Select Amraam
to +46 deg, searches targets out to 5 nm • LEFT: No Function
• WACQ (Wide Acquisition): space-stabilized mode that can be slewed using the TDC
controller when uncaged, searches targets out to 10 nm

In ACM mode, the Sensor Control Switch has the following functions:
• FWD: selects Boresight ACM mode
• AFT: selects Vertical Acquisition ACM mode Undesignate / Nosewheel
195
• LEFT: selects Wide Acquisition ACM mode Steering Button
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) Sensor Control Switch
2.1.7 – ACM Modes AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.7.2 – BST (Boresight)

Boresight (BST) is a very small, circular scan on the aircraft nose which can be used whenever the nose can be brought onto a target. It scans in
medium PRF, ±1.7° above and below the waterline, and 3.3° in azimuth, slaved to both pitch and roll. A small dashed circle on the HUD coincidental
with the aircraft boresight indicates the Boresight Acquisition scan. It has a range of 10nm.

BST is entered by:

1. Setting A/A Master Mode
2. Making sure HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) is OFF
3. Pressing the Sensor Control Switch forward (enters ACM mode and selects BST by default)
4. Radar will automatically attempt to lock on the nearest target
Undesignate / Nosewheel
To exit ACM mode, press Undesignate Button. Steering Button

ACM Mode (Boresight)

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

A/A Master Mode

HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) 196

Brightness Control Switch
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) Sensor Control Switch
2.1.7 – ACM Modes AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.7.3 – VACQ (Vertical Acquisition)

VACQ (Vertical Acquisition) mode is a very narrow and tall scan pattern, ideal for acquiring targets in a turn. Vertical Acquisition commands a scan of
approximately 6° azimuth, -13° and +46° in elevation, and medium PRF from the aircraft waterline, slaved to both pitch and roll. A dashed rectangle on the
HUD indicates the scan area. VACQ has a range of 5nm.

VACQ is entered by:

1. Setting A/A Master Mode
2. Making sure HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) is OFF
3. Pressing the Sensor Control Switch forward to enter ACM mode (selects BST by default)
4. Pressing the Sensor Control Switch aft to transfer ACM mode from BST to VACQ
5. Radar will automatically attempt to lock on the nearest target Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
To exit ACM mode, press Undesignate Button.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

ACM Mode (VACQ)

A/A Master Mode

HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) 197

Brightness Control Switch
 Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.1.7 – ACM Modes

HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.7.4 – WACQ (Wide Acquisition)

WACQ (Wide Acquisition) provides a wide, rectangular scan at 10 nm range. It has two modes, toggled via the
Cage/Uncage button on the throttle.
• Caged WACQ sub-mode: Caged WACQ commands a 60° azimuth scan, +6° and -9° relative to the waterline, with
medium PRF. Caged Wide Acquisition is slaved to the aircraft in pitch but is horizon-stabilized in roll. A representation
of the rectangular-shaped scan is placed in the bottom-right corner of the HUD, which provides a visualization of the
roll stabilization.
• Uncaged WACQ sub-mode: Not yet implemented.
Cage/Uncage Button
GACQ is entered by:
1. Setting A/A Master Mode Undesignate / Nosewheel
2. Making sure HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) is OFF Steering Button
3. Pressing the Sensor Control Switch forward to enter ACM mode (selects BST by default)
4. Pressing the Sensor Control Switch left to transfer ACM mode from BST to WACQ
5. If desired, toggle between WACQ sub-modes using the Cage/Uncage Button (not yet implemented)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

6. Radar will automatically attempt to lock on the nearest target

To exit ACM mode, press Undesignate Button.

A/A Master Mode

ACM Mode (WACQ)

HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)
198
Brightness Control Switch
 Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
A/A Master Mode
2.1.7 – ACM Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.7.5 – GACQ (Gun Acquisition)

GACQ (Gun Acquisition) is a special ACM mode intended to
Weapon Select Switch
• FWD: Select Sparrow
acquire a target roughly within the HUD field of view while • AFT: Select Gun
using the gun. GACQ commands a +6° and -14° scan from the • PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
aircraft waterline with medium PRF and 20° azimuth, slaved • RIGHT: Select Amraam
to pitch and roll. A dashed circle represents the scan shape • LEFT: No Function
on the HUD.

• Note 1: Unlike the other ACM modes, GACQ can only be

used for guns. HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)
• Note 2: GACQ searches for targets out to 5 miles. Brightness Control Switch Undesignate / Nosewheel
• Note 3: the radar is always in either ACM or STT when the Steering Button
gun is selected and so it cannot be commanded to return
to search from GACQ.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

GACQ is entered by:

1. Setting A/A Master Mode
2. Making sure HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) is OFF
3. Pressing the Weapon Control Switch aft to select Air-to-
Air Guns and enter GACQ ACM mode.
• Note: Make sure no other ACM mode or STT is
commanded.
4. Radar will automatically attempt to lock on the nearest
target

To exit GACQ mode:

• Use Weapon Select Switch to select another weapon, or
• Toggle the A/A Master Mode OFF and ON.

ACM Mode (GACQ)

199
 TDC Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition

HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.8.1 – STT (Single Target Track)

STT (Single Target Track) is a fancy way of calling a radar lock. The standard method of locking a target is:

1. Press A/A Master Mode

2. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT in our case) to slave the TDC (Throttle
Designation Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
3. Slew the TDC on the desired spot you want to designate using the TDC controls.
4. Designate target by using the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
a) If using RWS (Range While Search), a single TDC DEPRESS will lock the target into STT mode.
b) If LTWS (Latent Track While Scan) option is boxed/selected, the first TDC DEPRESS will designate a target as
the L&S (Launch & Steering) Primary Target trackfile (soft lock), but a second TDC DEPRESS is required to lock
the target into STT mode. Undesignate / Nosewheel
c) If using TWS (Track While Scan), the first TDC DEPRESS will designate a target as the L&S (Launch & Steering) Steering Button
Primary Target trackfile (soft lock), but a second TDC DEPRESS is required to lock the target into STT mode.
5. STT is exited by pressing the Undesignate button. The radar is returned to the last-entered search mode.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Focus Diamond
RWS LTWS (L&S Designated) STT (Radar Lock)
A/A Master Mode

TDC

L&S Primary Target 200

Radar Contact “Brick” Radar Lock
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.8.1 – STT (Single Target Track)

Target's HAFU (Hostile Ambiguous Friendly Unknown) symbol, with its Mach number
on the left and altitude in thousands of feet on the right. Additionally displayed is the Radar LOCK Cue
acceleration vector, perpendicular to the aspect stem, indicating observed
acceleration in a different direction than previous. This is only displayed for STT.
TWS (Track While
VC (Closure Speed in kts, negative
Steering Cue Dot Scan) Mode Selector
if target is moving away)
RTS (Return to
Target Aspect Line
Search) Selector Target Range (nm) (Target going away from us)
Steering Cue Dot

TD (Target Designator) Box

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Diamond = Hostile
Square = Friendly
Target Ground Track

Target Closing Speed

Target Range (nm)

Radar Antenna Elevation
(A number indicates an
altitude differential in
thousands of feet) ASE/NIRD
(Allowable Steering Error,
Normalized In-Range Display)
ASE (Allowable
Steering Error) Circle 201
 TDC Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition

HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.8.2 – AACQ (Automatic Acquisition)

AACQ (Automatic Acquisition) mode serves as a fast way of acquiring a track/contact into Single Target Track from a BVR
(Beyon Visual Range) mode.

AACQ is entered by pressing the Sensor Control Switch right when all the following conditions are met:
• The TDC (Throttle Designation Controller) is assigned to the RDR ATTK format
• The A/A master mode is engaged
• The radar is not in an ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) mode.

If the TDC if over a target symbol when AACQ is commanded, it will instruct the RADAR to lock on to that target. If AACQ is
pressed with no target symbol under the acquisition symbol, then the RADAR will attempt to lock on to the closest target
within the selected RADAR scan volume.

AACQ is exited by using Sensor Control Switch AFT or by toggling the A/A Master Mode OFF and ON.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

A/A Master Mode

AACQ

RWS Mode Selected

TDC
AACQ

202
 2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR)
2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.8.3 – JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Cueing System) Lock

You can use the JHMCS (Joint Helmet Cueing System) to perform a radar lock. It works similarly to the ACM
(Air Combat Maneuvering) close range radar mode, but it tracks wherever your head is looking instead
(within its azimuth and elevation limits) .

You can use either HACQ (Helmet Acquisition) mode or LHACQ (Long Range Helmet Acquisition) mode based
on how long you press the Sensor Control Switch forward.
• HACQ has a range of 5 nm.
• LHAQ functions identically to HACQ, except it has a range of 40 nm.

The standard method of locking a target is: JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing
System)
1. Press A/A Master Mode
2. Turn HMD Brightness Control Switch to BRT
3. The HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) overlay will appear over your helmet (except when looking at the
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Heads-Up Display).
• When the HMD is looking at the HUD, it scans identically to Boresight Acquisition.
• When the HMD is pointed elsewhere, it maintains the scan shape but is slaved to the HMD
center.
• When the radar scan limits are reached, the dashed circle will not move past the limits and will
flash if the HMD moves farther than it can.
A/A Master Mode

HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display)

Brightness Control Switch 203
 Sensor Control Switch
2.1 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-AIR) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.1.8 – Radar Lock Acquisition

HORNET
F/A-18C

2.1.8.3 – JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Cueing System) Lock

4. Press Sensor Control Switch Forward to enter desired acquisition mode
• Holding it for more than 0.8 sec selects LHACQ (Long Range Helmet Acquisition) mode, which locks targets automatically within 40 nm of the helmet reticle
• Holding it for less than 0.8 sec selects HACQ (Helmet Acquisition) mode, which locks targets automatically within 5 nm of the helmet reticle
5. A STT (Single Target Track) lock will be performed automatically when target comes on target reticle and is within acquisition range

To exit ACM mode, press Undesignate Button. Undesignate / Nosewheel

Steering Button

TD (Target Designator) Box

Helmet Reticle
Target Aspect Line
DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

(Target going away from us)

VC (Closure Speed in
kts, negative if target
is moving away)

ASE/NIRD
(Allowable Steering Error,
HACQ Selected Normalized In-Range Display)
LHACQ Selected

Target Range (nm)

STT (Single Target
204
Track) Lock Acquired
 RDR ATTK (RADAR) TAC PAGE
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.1 – Air-to-Ground Operating Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

The Air-to-Ground Radar features several operating modes, each designed for
specific tasks ranging from target detection and tracking to navigation and ranging.
These mods will never be as precise as a targeting pod, but it has a much longer
range and can see through cloud layers obscuring the view. Using these
functionalities will be entirely up to you and the type of mission you’re flying… and
the type of ordnance you have available (like JDAMs or JSOWs).

Here is an overview of the different modes available:

• Ground Mapping (MAP)

• DBS (Doppler-Beam-Sharpened) Expanded

Mapping Sub-Modes
• EXP1 (Sector Map)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

• EXP2 (Patch Map)

• EXP3 (Synthetic-Aperture Radar/SAR Map)

• Ground Moving Target (GMT)

• Terrain Avoidance (TA) Mode

• Sea Surface Search (SEA) Mode

205
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) A/G (Air-to-Ground)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode Master Mode Selected
HORNET
F/A-18C

DISPLAY
The radar Ground Mapping mode is quite useful when you need to navigate to a specific
waypoint or target. With Real beam ground mapping (RBGM), you have a visualization of the
terrain, raw ground and fixed target returns as seen by the radar. The display format is a range
versus azimuth Plan-Position-Indicator (PPI), a format similar to the weather radar display on
civilian aircraft. This mode has the lowest resolution since it has the largest coverage.

Keep in mind that the A/G Master Mode needs to be selected in order to have the air-to-
ground radar overlay on the RDR ATTK TAC page. PPI Display Format
Up: Range
Angle: Azimuth
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

206
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

DISPLAY
Regions that do not provide radar returns are black (such as water).The bright/white regions are generally man-made structures (buildings, power lines, roads, etc.) or mountains.

Range Scale (nm)

Sea of Galilee
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Your Position

207
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

DISPLAY
Some of the black areas on the MAP display are
part of the radar shadow, which are regions
behind hills or mountains that the radar cannot
see behind.

Radar Shadow (behind hill)

Radar Shadow (behind hill)

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

208
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

PEN (PENCIL) VS FAN RADAR BEAM

You can select either a « pen » (pencil) or a « fan » radar beam type.

• PEN (Pencil) beam mode scans a smaller area on the ground.

• FAN beam mode results in a broader/quicker scan but a less defined image. The beam is narrow in azimuth and broad in elevation.

Radar Beam Width/Type Toggle

Pen / Fan
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Pen

Fan

209
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

CONTROLS (MAP PAGE) Radar Beam Width/Type

Toggles the beam width between
Radar range and azimuth can be modified using the OSBs (Option Select Button). Keep in narrow (PENCIL) and wide (FAN). FAN
mind that the larger the region to scan, the slower the refresh rate and scanning cycle. will result in a broader/quicker scan
but less defined image.
EXP1, EXP2 and EXP3 sub-mode selectors
Range Scale Reference: 40 nm
(can be set to 5/10/20/40/80/160 nm)

TDC (Throttle Designator

Controller) Acquisition Cursor

Radar MAP DATA sub-menu

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Ground Mapping Mode Selected

Increase Range Scale
ECCM (Not Implemented)
Decrease Range Scale
AIR returns radar page
FREEZE: Radar image is “frozen”
to air-to-air mode

Radar Antenna Elevation RESET: Radar settings are

returned to default settings.
Angle-Off-Track Indication
Degrees between ownship ground track and the
Silent (SIL) Mode: Radar ceases operation
azimuth scan center
and FRZ option is selected.

Radar Azimuth (Total Coverage)

(can be set to 20/45/90/120 deg)
Radar MAP DATA sub-menu 210
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

CONTROLS (DATA PAGE)

You can access the MAP DATA sub-menu for more options. When accessing it, you can toggle the DCLTR (Declutter) option, which removes the horizon line and velocity vector (the option is ON
by default). The Gain Control buttons (1 is low gain, 9 is high gain) are also very useful to fine tune the radar returns displayed on your screen.

Velocity Vector

Gain at Level 5 Horizon Line

Gain at Level 9
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Gain Controls

Declutter removes horizon

line and velocity vector
211
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode 1
HORNET
F/A-18C

HOW TO SELECT MAP MODE Radar Power

Switch
1. Make sure the Radar Power Switch is set to OPR (Operate).
2. Pressing the A/G Master Mode button will set the right DDI (Digital Display Indicator) to the radar A-G MAP page.
3. Alternatively, you could also select the RDR ATTK (Radar) TAC page, and press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to SURF (Air-
to-Surface). The radar page will then switch from air-to-air to air-to-ground. This method works too, but it is longer than just
pressing the A/G Master Mode button.

TDC (yellow bars) 2b

3b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

3a
2a

212
 Sensor Control Switch 1a
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) 2 TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

HOW TO DESIGNATE/UNDESIGNATE FROM THE A/G MAP MODE

1. Once A-G MAP mode is selected, press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT) to
slave the TDC (Throttle Designation Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
2. Slew the TDC on the desired spot you want to designate using the TDC controls.
3. Designate target by using the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
4. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better view of the point you just
designated.
5. On the Radar page, a cross will mark the designated point. On the HUD, a diamond will mark the designated
point. This point can be used/slaved to by other sensors (like the targeting pod) if desired.
6. Note: you can zoom in using either the EXP1, EXP2 or EXP3 expanded modes. 7 Undesignate / Nosewheel
7. Pressing the « Undesignate » button on the stick will delete the designation point. Steering Button
5 Designation Cross
1b
5 HUD Designation Diamond
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

TDC (yellow bars)

2

Note: When a designated point is created with the air-to-ground radar, the
targeting pod (TGP) will automatically slave to this point on the ground if the FLIR
213
switch is ON and the TGP is unstowed prior to air-to-ground radar designation.
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)

INTRODUCTION TO EXP MODES
When air-to-ground mapping (MAP) mode is selected, you can select « expanded »
sub-modes, which can be seen as a « zoom » feature that can be used to designate
target points for weapons delivery. These modes are called « Doppler-Beam-
Sharpened » (DBS) modes since they are high resolution mapping modes used to
identify and target detail down to individual structures or vehicles.

From the A-G MAP page or any expanded mode currently selected, you can access
any of the three expanded sub-modes:

• EXP1: Sector Map Ground MAP Mode EXP1 Sub-Mode

• EXP1 is the lowest resolution expanded mode. The EXP1 format contains
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

most of the same options and symbology described for the MAP mode.
• Range: 40 nm
• It is not a ground stabilized mode unless a designation exists within the
tactical region of the format. Non-stabilized means that the area of
expansion is always a fixed distance from ownship and the coverage area
"snowplows" with the aircraft.
• EXP1 has a fixed azimuth of 45°.
• EXP2: Patch Map
• EXP2 is the next higher resolution mode up from EXP1.
• Range: 40 nm
• It is a ground stabilized mode regardless of whether a designated target
exists or not. The Radar will continue to focus on the same geographic area,
regardless of aircraft motion, unless or until the area being observed falls
outside the radar's gimbals limits of 70°.
• EXP3: Synthetic-Aperture Radar (SAR) Map
• EXP3 is the highest resolution expanded mode available.
• Range: 30 nm
• It is a ground stabilized mode regardless of whether a designated target
exists or not. It has a fixed range perimeter coverage of approximately 1.2 x
1.2 nm, resulting in a constant area and resolution regardless of range. 214
EXP2 Sub-Mode EXP3 Sub-Mode
 Sensor Control Switch 2a
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) 4 TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
5 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes 6
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP1 MODE
1. Make sure air-to-ground mapping (MAP) mode is selected (see section 2.2.2).
2. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT) to slave the TDC (Throttle Designation
Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
3. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP1.
4. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
5. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a sector map
(zoom) using the TDC controls.
6. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP1 mode.

3 1b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

5b

5a

Corral

215
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP1 MODE
7. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better view of the region you just expanded.
8. You can designate a target using the method described in section 2.2.3.4 (Designation with EXP mode).
9. Pressing the « Undesignate » button on the stick will exit EXP1 mode.
EXP1 Region

7
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Beirut Rafic Hariri

Airport

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button

FAST Option
Boxing the FAST scan option doubles the
radar's rate of scan for a reduction of 216
approximately half the scan quality.
 Doppler Effect
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)

THE “DOPPLER SHIFT” EFFECT
The Doppler Effect is probably that boring phenomenon you heard about in high school and didn’t care about at the
time. Basically, the Doppler Effect is the reason why airplane fly-bys in airshows are so awesome to listen to: a moving
object (like a plane) is emitting waves (like sound waves) that are received by an observer (you), and the frequency of
this wave (like the sound pitch) will change the closer or farther the aircraft comes to you.

The received frequency is higher (compared to the emitted frequency) during the approach, it is identical at the instant
of passing by, and it is lower during the recession. This variation of frequency also depends on the direction the wave
source is moving with respect to the observer; it is maximum when the source is moving directly toward or away from
the observer and diminishes with increasing angle between the direction of motion and the direction of the waves, until
when the source is moving at right angles to the observer, there is no shift.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Where am I going with this? Well, the radar is affected by the Doppler Effect since it emits and receives radar waves,
which will affect your doppler-beam-sharpened modes. How? Hang on, I’m getting there.

217
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.1 – EXP1 (Sector Map)

THE “DOPPLER SHIFT” EFFECT Angle-Off-Track Indication
Degrees between ownship ground track and the
Doppler beam sharpened (DBS) maps directly across the aircraft ground track become increasingly difficult azimuth scan center
to map because of the large shift in Doppler frequency within those regions. This means that certain regions
will not be computed properly, creating these black regions in certain areas relative to your aircraft. To get
the best coverage of an area, I would suggest that you fly at a 45 angle from it, not directly towards it.

This video showcases the frequency shift with sound pitch frequency: https://youtu.be/-P5J7XEwZIs
DBS Ineffective – 15 deg

DBS Ineffective + 15 deg

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

DBS Ineffective Region (Black)

DBS Ineffective
DBS Ineffective

218
 Sensor Control Switch 2a
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) 4 TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
5 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes 6
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.2 – EXP2 (Patch Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP2 MODE
1. Make sure air-to-ground mapping (MAP) mode or EXP1 mode is selected (see previous sections).
2. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT) to slave the TDC (Throttle Designation
Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
3. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP2.
4. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
5. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a patch map
(zoom) using the TDC controls.
6. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP2 mode.

1b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

5b
5a

Corral

219
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.2 – EXP2 (Patch Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP2 MODE
7
7. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give
you a better view of the region you just expanded.
8. You can designate a target using the method described in section
2.2.3.4 (Designation with EXP mode). Beirut Rafic Hariri
9. Pressing the « Undesignate » button on the stick will exit EXP2 Airport
mode.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button

220
 Sensor Control Switch 2a
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) 4 TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
5 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes 6
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.3 – EXP3 (SAR Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP3 MODE
1. Make sure air-to-ground mapping (MAP) mode or EXP1/2 mode is selected (see previous sections).
2. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT) to slave the TDC (Throttle Designation
Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
3. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP3.
4. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
5. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a Synthetic-
Aperture Radar (SAR) map (zoom) using the TDC controls.
6. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP3 mode.

1b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

5a 5b

Corral

221
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.3 – EXP3 (SAR Map)

HOW TO SELECT EXP3 MODE
7
7. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give
you a better view of the region you just expanded.
8. You can designate a target using the method described in section
2.2.3.4 (Designation with EXP mode).
9. Pressing the « Undesignate » button on the stick will exit EXP3
mode.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Beirut Rafic Hariri

Airport

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button

222
 Sensor Control Switch 1a
2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND) 3 TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
4 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes 5
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.4 – Designation with EXP Mode

HOW TO DESIGNATE/UNDESIGNATE FROM THE A/G EXP MODE
1. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the radar screen (RIGHT) to slave the TDC (Throttle Designation
Controller) to the current radar screen (diamond should be visible).
2. Make sure one of the EXP mode is selected (see previous sections). EXP3 mode is recommended for best precision,
but it can work with any other EXP mode.
3. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
4. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the TDC cursor on the desired spot you want to designate using the TDC controls.
5. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to designate target.
2
1b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

4
TDC Cursor 3

223
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.3 – EXP (Expanded) Modes
HORNET
F/A-18C

2.2.3.4 – Designation with EXP Mode

HOW TO DESIGNATE/UNDESIGNATE FROM THE A/G EXP MODE
6. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better view of the point you just
designated.
7. On the Radar page, a cross will mark the designated point. On the HUD, a diamond will mark the Designation Point
designated point. This point can be used/slaved to by other sensors (like the targeting pod) if desired.
8. Pressing the « Undesignate » button on the stick will delete the designation point.
8 Undesignate / Nosewheel
Note: When a designated point is created with the air-to-ground radar, the Steering Button
targeting pod (TGP) will automatically slave to this point on the ground if the FLIR
switch is ON and the TGP is unstowed prior to air-to-ground radar designation.
6
HUD Designation Diamond
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

7 Designation Cross

224
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.4 – GMT (Ground Moving Target) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

225
 2.2 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-GROUND)
2.2.5 – TA (Terrain Avoidance) Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

226
 2.3 - AN/APG-73 RADAR (AIR-TO-SEA)
2.3.1 – Sea Surface Search Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

227
HORNET
F/A-18C
2.4 - RADAR LINGO AND TERMINOLOGY
• BANDIT: Identified Enemy Aircraft
• BOGEY: Unidentified Aircraft
• SPIKE: Air-to-Air radar is locked on you
• BUDDY SPIKE: Friendly radar is locked on you
• NAILS: RWR contact, which emits radar waves but does not have a radar lock on you
• FOX 1: semi-active radar missile (27R/ER + AIM-7)
• FOX 2: heat-seeking infrared missile (27T/ET + AIM-9 + R-73/60)
• FOX 3: active radar missile, meaning the missile tracks to an aircraft’s radar up to a
certain distance, then its internal radar activates (pitbull) (AIM-120/R-77)
• RIFLE: AGM-65 Air-to-Ground missile
• RAYGUN: When locking a target with your radar, it is good practice to say “RAYGUN” so
your teammates are aware that you are locking someone. It is often used to identify a
contact as friend or foe. If a person yells “BUDDY SPIKE!”, it’s very likely that you are
locking a friendly contact.
• IFF: meaning “Is he friendly or bandit (enemy)?”
• PITBULL: Any FOX 3 (active radar) missile that starts using its onboard radar for tracking
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

228
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.1 – INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

The AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING system is a self-contained, multi-sensor targeting and surveillance system. The LITENING enables aircrews to detect, acquire, auto-track and identify targets at long
ranges for weapon delivery or non-traditional intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance missions. LITENING's FLIR, charged-coupled device (CCD), laser imaging sensors, advanced image
processing and digital video output provide useful imagery of targets on the ground, allowing aircrews to identify and engage targets under a wide range of battlefield conditions.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

229
 North Arrow / Ground Plane
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP • Regular line indicates ground plane relative to the FLIR TDC (Throttle Designator
orientation. Controller) Focus Diamond
3.2 – DISPLAYS Targeting Pod View Direction • Arrow points to the north and increases in length as a (TDC is active on this display)
HORNET
F/A-18C

function of how far the FLIR is below (or above) the horizon.
(degrees Left/Right off of
The targeting pod feed can be displayed on either DDI (Digital aircraft nose)
Display Indicator) or on the AMPCD (Advanced Multi-Purpose Color
Display). To display targeting pod feed, select TAC page, then click
on the OSB next « FLIR ». Take note that the FLIR page on the
AMPCD is displayed in white and black, while the FLIR page on the
DDIs are in shades of black and green.
Designation Point Data
• Coordinates (North/South)
• Coordinates (East/West)
• Mean Sea Level Altitude (ft)
Targeting Pod View
From the TAC page, you can Laser Mode Relative Direction
access the targeting pod • L ARM: Laser Armed Targeting Pod Reticle
feed by pressing the OSB • M ARM: Laser Marker Armed
next to “FLIR”. • LTD/R: Laser Target Designator/Ranger
• Blank: Safe/Off Range to Designated
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Target (nm)

Targeting Pod View

Elevation (deg)

Aircraft Airspeed
(kts/Mach)

Yardstick Indication (meters)

Distance of one of the reticle lines relative to the
ground is provided in meters. This provides a sense Aircraft Altitude (ft) 230
of scale for where the FLIR is currently looking.
 Field of View Day/Night Mode Control Knob
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP (Narrow/Wide) Setting
3.2 – DISPLAYS FRZ (Freeze) Function
HORNET
F/A-18C

Freezes the current FLIR image

Targeting Pod Mode

• OPR: Operate Laser Marker Mode Selector
• STBY: Standby (does not guide laser weapons)

Tracking Mode TRIG Option

• ATRK: Area Track When selected (boxed), pressing the
• PTRK: Point Track second stage trigger will fire the laser. Also
disables gun selection while enabled.
Increase Zoom Control
RTCL (Reticle) Option
Displays targeting pod reticle
Zoom Control and
Setting (1 through 9)
ALG (Automatic Level &
Gain) Control Option
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Targeting Pod Laser Code

Laser code used by your targeting
Decrease Zoom Control pod when designating a target.

AUTF Mode Selector UFC (Up-Front Controller) Button

(Automatic Focus) Allows you to change the laser code
from the UFC.
Laser Spot Search Code
(laser code searched by Grayscale Option
FLIR/CCD Camera Mode Selector targeting pod) Displays a grayscale color strip for
FLIR: Forward-Looking Infrared calibrating the level and gain.
CCD: Charged Coupled Device (TV)
DCLTR (Declutter) Button
Removes aircraft airspeed
FLIR WHT/BLK (White- and altitude information.
Hot/Black-Hot) Option Button
Contrast Control

Laser Spot Search (LSS) Mode Selector Button

Brightness Control 231of either a JTAC
Targeting pod searches for a laser code
or someone else’s targeting pod laser (buddy lasing).
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.2 – DISPLAYS
HORNET
F/A-18C

Bank & Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator

• Indicates current bank angle in the form of circular ticks with a half-circle indicating the current bank attitude.
• Angle of attack is indicated by the velocity vector in the center; when AOA exceeds 7° a triangle appears and
increases its angle as the AOA increases
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

232
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.2 – DISPLAYS
HORNET
F/A-18C

The Targeting Pod View Relative Direction symbol on the FLIR display can give you a good Targeting Pod is
idea of where the pod is pointing in relationship to your aircraft. This view direction is looking here
represented in a top-down view.

Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting

Pod View Relative Direction)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

233
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.2 – DISPLAYS
HORNET
F/A-18C

AMPCD CCD (TV) Mode AMPCD FLIR Mode – Black Hot AMPCD FLIR Mode – White Hot
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

DDI CCD (TV) Mode DDI FLIR Mode – Black Hot 234
DDI FLIR Mode – White Hot
 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
A/G Master Mode Button
3.3 – CONTROLS (required to use laser) Antenna Elevation
HORNET
F/A-18C

Some useful HOTAS functionalities when using the targeting pod:

• Sensor Control Switch Directions: Selects which display is

used to slew the targeting pod view with the TDC (Throttle HARM Target
Designator Controller). The Select Focus Diamond indicates
Sequence /RAID /
what display is selected.
Cage/Uncage Button FLIR Button
• Sensor Control Switch Held Towards Selected Display:
Toggles between Point Track (PTRK, tracks an object like a
high-contrast vehicle) and Area Track (ATRK).

• Radar Elevation Control: controls zoom (can also be

controlled directly from the DDI/AMPCD FLIR page) TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Focus
Sensor Control Switch Diamond (TDC is active on this display)
• RAID/FLIR Field-of-View Select Button Short Hold: Toggles AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
Wide/Narrow field-of-view
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

• RAID/FLIR Field-of-View Select Button Long Hold: Toggles TV

(CCD, Charged-coupled Device) and FLIR (Infrared) modes

• Throttle Designator Controller (TDC) Up/Down/Left/Right:

Slews targeting pod reticle

• Throttle Designator Controller (TDC) Depressed: Designates

the point under the targeting pod crosshairs as the target Gun Trigger (Second Detent)
(used by weapons)

• Nosewheel Steering Button: Undesignates target, can toggle

between VVSLV and Snowplow pointing modes Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
• Cage/Uncage Button: Toggles LST (Laser Spot Track)
operation

• Gun Trigger (Second Stage): Fires laser if TRIG mode is boxed

on the FLIR page.
235
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.3 – CONTROLS
HORNET
F/A-18C

LST/NFLR switch
Laser Spot Tracker/Navigation Forward-Looking
Infrared (LST/NFLR) sensor

LTD/R switch
• LTD/R stands for Laser Target Designator/Ranger
• Switch can be set to ARM, SAFE or AFT
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) Sensor Switch

ON / STBY / OFF

Targeting Pod Page

OSB (Option Select Buttons) can be used to select
various options or settings

236
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP 3b

3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE

HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press A/G Master Mode. This will allow you to arm the laser designator.
2. To power up the targeting pod, set FLIR Sensor Switch to STBY (Right Click).
3. From the TAC page on either DDI or the AMPCD, press the OSB (Option
Select Button) next to “FLIR” (Forward-Looking Infrared) to select the
Targeting Pod feed page.
4. Monitor the warm-up process. Targeting pod warm-up process will take 4
about 2 minutes.
5. When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod status will switch from
RDY – NOT TIMED OUT to STBY (Standby).
3a
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

1
5

237
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP 6b
Sensor Control Switch
3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
7a
HORNET
F/A-18C

6. Set FLIR Sensor Switch to ON (Right Click). Confirm that Targeting Pod
mode switches from STBY to OPR (Operate).
7. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI
(Right for the Right DDI as an example). The Select Focus Diamond
indicates what display is selected.

TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Focus

Diamond (TDC is active on this display) 7b

6b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

6a

238
 11a
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
HORNET
F/A-18C

8b 9a
8. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly to select VVSLV
(Velocity Vector Slaved) mode. This will un-stow the camera
and slave the targeting pod to the velocity vector.
• Alternatively, you can press the OSB next to VVSLV Pod Stowed Pod Un-Stowed
(boxed when selected).
9. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly again to select
Snowplow mode. When Snowplow mode is first entered, the
FLIR is set to 0° left/right and -8° down.
• Alternatively, you can press the OSB next to VVSLV to
de-select VVSLV and use Snowplow mode (un-boxed
when Snowplow is selected)
10. Adjust DDI (Digital Display Indicator) contrast and brightness as
required
11. Set LTD/R (Laser Target Designator/Ranger) switch to ARM. This 11b
will arm the laser. Confirm that L ARM indication is displayed on 0 deg left/right
Laser Armed
the FLIR page.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

-8 deg down

8c
VVSLV
8a

9b
Snowplow

10 10 239
 12 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE Antenna Elevation

HORNET
F/A-18C

12. Using the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls, slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired
target.
13. Use appropriate zoom level, field of view (NARROW/WIDE) and camera mode (CCD/TV or FLIR) to identify the target.
14. Press the Sensor Control Switch Towards Selected Display (Right if our right DDI is selected) to toggle between Point Track
(PTRK, tracks a moving object like a high-contrast vehicle) and Area Track (ATRK, used for a static target).
15. Press the OSB next to “UFC” to set the Targeting Pod laser code on the Up-Front Controller.
16. Press the button next to “LTDC” (Laser Target Designator Code). A “:” will indicate it is selected. Then, enter the desired laser
code on the keypad and press “ENT”. We will choose the default laser code 1688.

13

16a Sensor Control Switch

13 AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

14a

14b
Point Track

16b

16c 15
13

240
 18
Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE

HORNET
F/A-18C

17. Press the OSB next to “TRIG” if you want to use the laser manually. The indication will become boxed once selected, which means that a gun trigger
press will fire the laser. This step is required if you are “buddy lasing” (using your own laser for someone else to use).
• If TRIG remains unboxed, the laser is in Automatic mode. The laser will automatically fire a few seconds before the laser-guided ordnance
reaches the target.
18. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Depress button to designate the laser as the target point. This will slave selected air-to-ground weapons
to where the laser is firing.
19. You may now launch laser-guided weapons as per their release procedure.
20. If TRIG option is selected (boxed), press and hold the gun trigger to fire laser. Once laser is firing, the laser mode will switch from L ARM to LTD/R. If
TRIG option is not selected (unboxed, AUTO lasing), the laser will automatically fire a few seconds before the ordnance reaches the target.
21. When desired, press the Gun Trigger a second time to stop firing the laser. You can use the Undesignate/Nosewheel Steering button to undesignate
the target.

17
Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Laser Armed 20b Laser Firing

20a
21

Gun Trigger (Second Detent)

Target Target
Not Designated Designated Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
21

241
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Sensors are slaved to the Targeting
3.4 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE Pod (FLIR, Forward-Looking Infrared)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Designation Point
Coordinates (North/South)
Coordinates (East/West)
Mean Sea Level Altitude (ft) Targeting Pod
Designation Point

Designation Point Range to Target (nm)

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Range to Target (nm)

242
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.1 - Overview
There are a few methods to point a target with the targeting pod.

• Velocity Vector Slaved mode has the FLIR slaved to the line of sight to the velocity vector.

• Snowplow mode is the default mode when no Target designation exists.

• Stabilized Pointing Mode is entered when a Target is designated from Snowplow or is cycled from Auto
Track or Point Track

• Waypoint Slaving (TGP snaps to a selected navigation waypoint) is available using the Horizontal Situation
Indicator page (see relevant section).

• Area Track is used to keep track of a specific area. This is best used for buildings of fixed targets. Area Track
can be set from any other pointing method.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

• Point Track is used to keep track of a specific moving point. This is best used for moving targets. Point Track
can be set from any other pointing method.

Slaved to Waypoint Targeting Pod is VVSLV (Velocity

Powered Up Vector Slaved)
1. WYPT OSB (Option Select Button) selected VVSLV OSB selected from FLIR page
on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) or Undesignate Button pressed twice within 1 sec
No Existing Target Designation
2. Desired waypoint is selected or unselect VVSLV from FLIR page
3. WPDSG (Waypoint Designate) OSB selected
Snowplow Mode 243
 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.5 – POINTING METHODS Sensor Control Switch

HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.2 - VVSLV (Velocity Vector Slaved) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

Velocity Vector Slaved mode has the FLIR slaved to the line of sight to the velocity vector.
• To select Velocity Vector Slaved mode:
1. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
2. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
3. Select VVSLV by either:
a) Selecting the VVSLV pushbutton on the FLIR page, or;
b) Pressing the Undesignate button twice within one second. Undesignate / Nosewheel
4. Press OSB next to RTCL (boxed) to display the targeting pod’s reticle Steering Button
5. To designate a target, fly the aircraft to set the velocity vector on the target, then use the 3b
TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”). A diamond will appear over the designated point on the
FLIR page.
Select Focus Diamond
TGP slaved to
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Velocity Vector Velocity Vector

(Reticle Shown)

3a

Designated Target 244

Diamond (TDC DEPRESSED)
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.2 - VVSLV (Velocity Vector Slaved)

When a target is designated, the targeting pod will track the designated point instead of the velocity vector. A designation diamond will then be visible on the Heads-Up Display.

Designated
Target Diamond

Velocity Vector
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Designated
Target Diamond

245
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Throttle Designator Controller
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.3 - Snowplow
Snowplow mode is the default mode when no Target designation exists. However, when the targeting pod is first powered on, the VVSLV mode needs to
be selected first, and only then can you switch to Snwoplow. Snowplow mode is not stabilized to anything it is pointed at and slewing it changes the
absolute position of the FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared) relative to the pod.
• To slew the targeting pod:
1. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
2. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
3. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV mode.
4. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect VVSLV and switch to Snowplow mode.
5. When Snowplow is first entered, the FLIR is set to 0° left/right and -8° down.
6. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target
7. To designate a target from Snowplow mode, use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”). A diamond will appear over the designated point on
the FLIR page and on the Heads-Up Display as well.

Stabilized Pointing Mode is entered when a Target is designated from Snowplow (including from a source other than the FLIR itself) or is cycled from Auto
Sensor Control Switch
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
Track or Point Track via the Sensor Control Switch. In this mode, the FLIR can be slewed freely and the designated target is constantly updated to its
current location. When it is not being slewed, the FLIR stabilizes to whatever position on the ground it is pointed at.
Select Focus Diamond

VVSLV Not Selected Undesignate / Nosewheel

Steering Button

Reticle in Designated Target

Diamond (TDC DEPRESSED) 246
Snowplow Mode
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.4 - Waypoint Slaved Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

You can slave the targeting pod to an existing waypoint of your navigation database. Here’s how:

1. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
2. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
3. On HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) page, select desired waypoint using the OSBs (Option Select Button) next to UP or DOWN arrows.
4. Press OSB next to WYPT (boxed = selected)
5. Press on OSB next to WPSDG to designate waypoint as the target point (boxed = selected)
6. Targeting point will automatically slew to the selected waypoint.

Designated Target Diamond

(Slaved to Waypoint) Select Focus Diamond
6
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

4 6

247
 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.5 – POINTING METHODS

HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.4 - Waypoint Slaved

7. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target if
adjustments are required.

Designated Target Diamond

(Slaved to Waypoint)

Designated Target Diamond

(Slaved to Waypoint)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

248
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Throttle Designator Controller
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.5 - Point & Area Track Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
Area Track is entered by pressing the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format
page. The FLIR is slaved to the location of the Target. To select Area Track:

1. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
2. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
3. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV mode.
4. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect VVSLV and switch to Snowplow mode.
5. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page to toggle between
Area Track and Point Track. Undesignate / Nosewheel
6. In Area Track, the FLIR is slaved to the location of the Target and cannot be slewed. Steering Button
7. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to designate the target.
8. Pressing the Undesignate button once will revert back to Snowplow mode. Range to Designated
Target (nm)
Select Focus Diamond
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Area Track Selected

Area Track Reticle

Reticle in (Designated)
Snowplow Mode Area Track Reticle
(Designated) 249
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Throttle Designator Controller
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.5 - Point & Area Track Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
Point Track is entered by pressing the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page.
The FLIR tracks an object, including a moving one. To select Point Track:

1. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
2. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
3. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV mode.
4. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect VVSLV and switch to Snowplow mode.
5. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page to toggle between Area
Track and Point Track. Undesignate / Nosewheel
6. In Point Track, the FLIR is slaved to the moving Target and cannot be slewed. Steering Button
7. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to designate the target.
8. Pressing the Undesignate button once will revert back to Snowplow mode. Range to Designated
Target (nm)
Sensor Control Switch
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

Point Track Selected

Point Track Reticle

(Designated)

Point Track Reticle 250

 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Throttle Designator Controller
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.6 - Targeting Pod Offset Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
EXAMPLE 1

If the targeting pod is set in a Point Track or Area Track, the targeting pod cannot be slewed directly.
In cases where you need to make an adjustment, this isn’t very practical. Fortunately, the Targeting
Pod Offset function allows you to create an offset/adjustment, and then designate it while
maintaining the Area/Point Track you created initially.

1. In this first example, we will start from an Area Track (ATRK). The targeting pod will be tracking
a reference area.
2. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to activate OFFSET function. A “+” cross (Offset Cursor)
will appear at the center of the reticle. Offset Cursor
3. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the Offset
Cursor over the desired target. 3
4. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to designate the location of the Offset Cursor as the
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

new Target Designation point (TGT). This is quite useful for laser-guided bomb runs.

Area Track Reticle Offset Cursor

1 2

251
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Throttle Designator Controller
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
3.5 – POINTING METHODS
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.5.6 - Targeting Pod Offset Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
EXAMPLE 2

A useful offset function that comes with Point Track is that you can also “reset” the targeting pod to
the Offset Cursor location. This allows you to not have to revert back to Snowplow mode and re-
acquire the target, wasting precious time and situational awareness in the process.

1. In this second example, we will start from a Point Track (PTRK). The targeting pod will be
tracking a reference object.
2. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to activate OFFSET function. A “+” cross (Offset Cursor)
will appear at the center of the reticle.
3. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the Offset
Cursor over the desired target.
4. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) a second time to designate the location of the Offset
Cursor as the new Target Designation point (TGT).
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

5. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page to move the targeting
pod to the location of the Offset Cursor.
Offset Cursor
Point Track Reticle Offset Cursor 3
2
1

252
 LST/NFLR switch
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP Laser Spot Tracker/Navigation Forward-Looking
Infrared (LST/NFLR) sensor
3

3.6 – LASER SPOT TRACKER (LST) MODE

HORNET
F/A-18C

The targeting pod can also spot and track a laser from someone else (a friendly Hornet lasing his own target, or a JTAC, Joint Tactical Air
Controller, calling an air strike). To track another laser:
1. Find out what the laser code used by the friendly is (in our case, the friendly JTAC uses code 1688). Make sure the friendly asset is lasing the
target before attempting to track it.
2. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Master Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
3. Set the LST/NFLR (Laser Spot Tracker) switch to ON.
4. Press the OSB next to “UFC” to set the LSS (Laser Spot Search) code on the Up-Front Controller.
5. Press the button next to “LSTC” (Laser Spot Track Code). A “:” will indicate it is selected. Then, enter the desired laser code on the keypad
and press “ENT”. We will choose the default code used by the JTAC, which is 1688.

1
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

5b

5a

5d
5c

253
 Throttle Designator Controller
Sensor Control Switch
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.6 – LASER SPOT TRACKER (LST) MODE

HORNET
F/A-18C

6. Set the targeting pod in Snowplow mode, then slew the targeting pod
using the Sensor Control Switch (Sets Focus Diamond) and TDC controls
within the vicinity of the JTAC location. If the targeting pod is looking
too far from the laser, it will not be able to find the laser.
7a
7. Press the OSB next to “LST” (Laser Spot Track) on the FLIR Format.
Alternatively, you can use the Cage/Uncage Button. Once LST is Cage/Uncage Button
selected, the indication will be boxed.
8. While the targeting pod is searching for a laser, the FLIR image feed is
blank, "LST" flashes on the top of the FLIR format and on the HUD.

Searching Laser
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Select Focus Diamond

(LST Flashing)

Searching Laser

7b

7a

254
 10 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.6 – LASER SPOT TRACKER (LST) MODE

HORNET
F/A-18C

9. When targeting pod has found a friendly laser, the FLIR format will show
the video feed centered on that laser and the “LST” indication will be
solid. It will actively track the JTAC laser.
10. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Depress button to
designate the laser as the target point. This will slave selected air-to-
ground weapons to where the laser is firing. Cage/Uncage Button
11. You may now launch laser-guided weapons as per their release
procedure.
12. When desired, press the OSB next to LST to stop tracking the laser.
Alternatively, you can use the Cage/Uncage button as well. Undesignate / Nosewheel
13. Pressing the Undesignate/Nosewheel Steering button will undesignate Steering Button
the target. Target Designated 10
9 Tracking Laser
(LST Solid)
9 Tracking Laser
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

10

Range to Designated
Target (nm)
Range to Designated
10
Target (nm)

255
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP 2 3 Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
3.7 – LASER MARKING
HORNET
F/A-18C

The targeting pod can also use a laser marker (the laser
marker cannot be tracked by air-to-ground weapons),
which is an infrared laser that can only be seen with night
vision goggles (RSHIFT+H to toggle NVGs). This is used
mainly to provide a visual reference to other aircraft on
where a target is.
Gun Trigger (Second Detent) 10a
1. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Master Mode
as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
2. Set LTD/R (Laser Target Designator/Ranger) switch to 9
ARM. This will arm the laser. Confirm that L ARM
indication is displayed on the FLIR page. 3
3. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the
selected DDI (Right for the Right DDI as an example).
The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is
Undesignate / Nosewheel 4
Steering Button 5
selected.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

4. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV

mode.
5. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect 10a 8
VVSLV and switch to Snowplow mode.
6. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Throttle Designator Controller
Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the targeting pod AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
reticle over the desired target 6
7. Use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”) to designate 7
target
8. Press the OSB next to “TRIG”. The indication will
become boxed once selected, which means that a gun 7
trigger press will fire the laser.
9. Press the OSB next to “MARK” to set the laser in “M
Arm” (Marker Arm) mode. When selected, “Mark”
indication will be boxed.
10. Press and hold the gun trigger to fire laser. Once laser
is firing, the laser mode will switch from M ARM to
MARK.
256
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.7 – LASER MARKING
HORNET
F/A-18C

11. An infrared laser will be visible with your night vision goggles.

10b
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Infrared Marking Laser

Marking Laser Firing

257
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.8 – AIR-TO-AIR OPERATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.8.1 - Operation Modes

The targeting pod can also be used in air-to-air modes in conjunction with the radar. This is quite
useful to perform visual identifications of air targets. To use Air-to-Air mode, the LITENING TGP
requires the A/A Master Mode to be active. Here are the four main A-A operation modes of the pod:

• Snowplow: The FLIR is slewed freely and stabilized to the aircraft itself.

• Velocity Vector Slaved: The FLIR is slaved to the line of sight to the velocity vector. This is accessed
via the VVSLV option on the A/A FLIR format when not in the Radar Slaved or Point Track modes.
Radar Targeting Pod
• Radar Slaved: The FLIR is slaved to the extrapolated line of sight to the radar's L&S trackfile. This is
accessed via the RRSLV option on the A/A FLIR format.

• Point Track: The FLIR itself is tracking a target. Point Track is accessed by "bumping" the Sensor
Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format with the TDC already assigned, and will attempt
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

to acquire a recognized target within the reticle. Point Track is only entered when a successful
track is acquired.

Targeting Pod Feed

A/A (Air-to-Air) RDR ATTK Page Feed
Master Mode

258
 1
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP 3 Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
8
3.8 – AIR-TO-AIR OPERATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.8.2 - Point Track 11

In order to track a target with the targeting pod:

1. Make sure the targeting pod is powered

2. Press the A/A Master Mode button. The RDR ATTK (radar) page will appear on the right DDI and the FLIR page will appear on the left DDI.
3. Select FLIR by pressing the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the DDI with the FLIR page (left).
4. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
5. Select VVSLV by selecting the VVSLV pushbutton on the FLIR page. The FLIR will be slaved to the line of sight to the velocity vector.
6. Press OSB next to RTCL (boxed) to display the targeting pod’s reticle
7. Fly the aircraft to put the velocity vector in the vicinity of the aircraft.
8. You can zoom and choose desired FLIR/CCD (TV) setting using the appropriate Option Select Buttons on the FLIR page.
9. Press/bump the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page (left) to attempt to Point Track the target.
10. When Point Track is obtained, a designation box will appear on the HUD and the targeting pod will track the target.
11. If you want to “dump” the target, press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the DDI with the FLIR page (left).
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

4 8
9 Point Track

7
Velocity Vector
Reticle
2
9

6 Designation Box

“F”: designation is done

by the FLIR/TGP only 259
9
 15 Sensor Control Switch
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

3.8 – AIR-TO-AIR OPERATION

HORNET
F/A-18C

3.8.2 - Point Track

You can also slave the radar to the target designated by the FLIR pod.

12. Make sure the radar is powered Designation Box

13. Make sure Point Track is obtained
14. On FLIR page, press OSB next to SLAVE to slave the radar to the
targeting pod’s point track.
15. Both the radar and the TGP will now track the target.
12

15

“C”: designation is correlated between

the FLIR/TGP and radar (RDR)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

14a

14b
Radar Slaved to TGP Point Track
13

260
 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
5
3.8 – AIR-TO-AIR OPERATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.8.3 - Air-to-Air Radar Slaving 5

TGP in Snowplow mode
While you can slave the radar to the targeting pod, you can also do this the other
way around. Here is how to slave the targeting pod to a radar locked target in order
to visually identify it.

1. Make sure the targeting pod and radar are powered

2. Press the A/A Master Mode button. The RDR ATTK (radar) page will appear on
the right DDI and the FLIR page will appear on the left DDI. 6a
3. Select RDR ATTK page by pressing the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of
the DDI with the radar page (right).
4. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
5. Acquire a radar lock using the TDC Slew and TDC DEPRESS controls.
6. Press the OSB next to RRSLV (radar slave) to slave the slave the targeting pod to
the radar lock (L&S trackfile).
4
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

4 Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

2 6a
TGP slaved to radar

261
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP 10b Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
3.8 – AIR-TO-AIR OPERATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

3.8.3 - Air-to-Air Radar Slaving

7. Select FLIR by pressing the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the DDI with the FLIR page (left).
8. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
9. You can zoom and choose desired FLIR/CCD (TV) setting using the appropriate Option Select Buttons on the FLIR page.
10. Press/bump the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page (left) to attempt to Point Track the target.

9
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

10c
Point Track Reticle

9 10a

9 262
 Throttle Designator Controller
3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3.9 – TARGETING POD TIPS

HORNET
F/A-18C

To get a visual reference of where the targeting pod is looking, consult the SA (Situational Awareness) page. A small square represents
the TGP reticle position in a top-down view. You can also use the TDC Depress button to designate the targeting pod reticle, which will
appear as a diamond on the Heads-Up Display.

Designated Point
(TDC depressed to designate TGP
ground position)
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Waypoint 1

Your Position

Targeting Pod Reticle Ground Position on SA Page

263
 3 - AN/AAQ-28(V) LITENING II TGP
3.9 – TARGETING POD TIPS
HORNET
F/A-18C

When in bombing CCIP mode, the targeting pod will be slaved to the pipper of the CCIP bombing reticle.

CCIP Pipper
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Targeting Pod

264
 4 - AGM-65F/G MAVERICK (IR-MAVF)
4.1 – DISPLAYS
HORNET
F/A-18C

Maverick Caged/Uncaged Status

Maverick Selected (Boxed)
Sensor Selected Diamond Maverick Locked

Fuzing Options
Instantaneous
Delay 1 / Delay 2

Maverick Seeker Center

PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Maverick Aiming Reticle

Weapon Step Function

Switches selected missile

Seeker Indication
Relative to Boresight

Maverick Field of View

Selector
Maverick Ship Mode
Enlarges seeker center and Track Mode
optimizes it for locking onto and WHT: White Track, seeker will attempt to lock onto a hot target 265
hitting a target on water BLK: Black Track, seeker will attempt to lock onto a cold target
 Throttle Designator Controller
4 - AGM-65F/G MAVERICK (IR-MAVF) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

4.2 – CONTROLS
HORNET
F/A-18C

To operate the IR-Seeker Maverick, you need to first allow it to cooldown (will be shown in
Weapons Section) by selecting it in the SMS (Stores Management System) page, setting Master
Arm On and pressing the A/G Master Mode. Then, you can select the Maverick seeker head
feed by going back to the TAC page and selecting IMAV DSPLY. Then, use the Sensor Control HARM Target
Switch to the Maverick Feed DDI, Uncage the Maverick, hold the TDC Depress button while Sequence /RAID /
slewing the Maverick to the target. When you release the TDC Depress button, the missile will Cage/Uncage Button FLIR Button
attempt to lock its target.
PART 9 – RADAR & SENSORS

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

266
 SECTION STRUCTURE
•
HORNET
1 - Introduction
F/A-18C

• 1.1 – Introduction to Weapons

• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
• 2.12 – AGM-62 Walleye II TV-Guided Glide Bomb
• 1.2 – Armament Matrix
• 2.12.1 – AGM-62 Walleye II (No Datalink Pod)
• 1.3 – My Weapons Control Setup
• 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II (With Datalink Pod)
• 1.4 – SMS (Stores Management System) Page
• 1.5 – Bomb Delivery Modes
• 3 – Air-to-Air Weapons
• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons • 3.1 – M61A2 Guns
• 3.1.1 – M61A2 Guns (Funnel / No Radar Tracking)
•
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

2.1 – Unguided Bombs

• 3.1.2 – M61A2 Guns (Radar Tracking)
• 2.1.1 – MK-82 (CCIP)
• 3.2 – AIM-9M Sidewinder
• 2.1.2 – MK-82 (CCRP/AUTO)
• 3.2.1 – AIM-9M (No Radar)
• 2.2 – MK-20 Rockeye Cluster Bombs (CCIP)
• 3.2.2 – AIM-9M (Radar)
• 2.3 – Rockets
• 3.3 – AIM-9X Sidewinder (JHMCS)
• 2.4 – M61A2 Guns (Air-to-Ground)
• 3.4 – AIM-7M Sparrow (Radar)
• 2.5 – GPS-Guided Ordnance
• 3.5 – AIM-120B AMRAAM (Radar)
• 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM (Pre-Planned)
• 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM (TOO + Targeting Pod)
• 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW (TOO + Waypoint Designate) • 4 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
• 2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II (Laser-Guided)
• 2.7 – AGM-65F/G Maverick (IR-MAVF)
• 2.7.1 – AGM-65F Missile IR Seeker Only • 5 – Video Tutorials
• 2.7.2 – AGM-65F Missile Slaving (Targeting Pod)
• 2.8 – AGM-65E Maverick (Laser-Guided MAV)
• 2.9 – AGM-88C HARM Anti-Radiation Missile
• 2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM (TOO)
• 2.9.2 – AGM-88C HARM (SP)
• 2.10 – AGM-84D Harpoon Anti-Ship Missile
• 2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon (BOL)
• 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon (R/BL)
• 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM Cruise Missile
• 2.11.1 – AGM-84E SLAM Introduction
• 2.11.2 –Weapon Setup
• 2.11.3 – Target Designation
• 2.11.3.1 – TOO / Waypoint
• 2.11.3.2 – TOO / Targeting Pod
• 2.11.3.3 – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar
• 2.11.3.4 – Pre-Planned
• 2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
267
HORNET
F/A-18C
1.1 - INTRODUCTION

BOMBS
WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE
MK-82 500 lbs low-drag unguided bomb CBU-99 500 lbs anti-tank cluster bomb
Fuze Needed: MFUZ NOSE Fuze Needed: MFUZ VT
EFUZ INST HT Function: Sets HOB (Height of Burst) - 1500
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

MK-82SE 500 lbs unguided low-drag retarded MK-20 Rockeye Unguided cluster bomb
(Snake Eye) bomb Fuze Needed: MFUZ VT
Fuze Needed: MFUZ NOSE HT Function: Sets HOB (Height of Burst) - 1500
EFUZ INST
MK-83 1000 lbs low-drag unguided bomb BDU-33 25 lbs unguided training bomb
Fuze Needed: MFUZ NOSE Fuze Needed: MFUZ NOSE
EFUZ INST EFUZ INST
MK-84 2000 lbs low-drag unguided bomb AGM-154A/C Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Standoff
Fuze Needed: MFUZ NOSE JSOW Weapon (JSOW) glide bombs
EFUZ INST Fuze Needed: EFUZ INST
HT Function (AGM-154A): Sets HOB (Height of Burst)
GBU-10/12/16 2000/500/1000 lbs laser-guided bomb GBU-38 (J-82) Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Direct
PAVEWAY II Fuze Needed: MFUZ OFF JDAM Attack Munition (JDAM) bombs
EFUZ INST or DLY1
AGM-62 ER/DL 2000 lbs TV-Guided bomb. ER/DL
Walleye II stands for “Extended Range/Datalink”.

268
HORNET
F/A-18C
1.1 - INTRODUCTION

GUN POD AIR-TO-AIR MISSILES ROCKETS

WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE
M61A2 Six-barrel 20 mm Gatling- AIM-9L/M/P Sidewinder Infrared guided air-to-air missile ZUNI MK-71 130 mm (5 inches) unguided rockets
Vulcan type rotary cannon (578
rounds) AIM-7F/M Sparrow Semi-active radar-guided air-to-air 2.75 in 2.75 inches rocket, used for general
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

missile purpose
AIM-120 AMRAAM Advanced Medium Range Air-to-
Air Missile (AMRAAM), active
radar homing air-to-air missile

269
HORNET
F/A-18C
1.1 - INTRODUCTION

AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILES
WEAPON TYPE
AGM-65F/G Maverick – IR Seeker Air-to-Ground missile guided by imaging infrared system (MAVF) and used at night and during bad weather.
(MAVF)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

AGM-65E Maverick – Laser Guided Air-to-Ground missile guided by laser designator guidance system (MAV) optimized for fortified installations and heavier
(MAV) penetrating blast-fragmentation warhead

AGM-88C HARM Air-to-Surface High-Speed Anti-Radiation Missile (HARM) missile. Anti-radiation guidance homes in on radiowave emissions from
a radar, allowing it to attack surface-to-air missile (SAM) sites.
AGM-84D Harpoon All-weather, over-the-horizon, Anti-Ship missile system.

AGM-84E SLAM Stand off precision-guided, air-launched cruise missile. Standoff Land Attack Missile

AGM-84H/K SLAM-ER Stand off precision-guided, air-launched cruise missile. Standoff Land Attack Missile-Expanded Response

270
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
1.2 - ARMAMENT MATRIX BY TWISTED-BISCUIT

271
 Note: this is the setup as per aircraft. Feel free to customize your

HORNET
F/A-18C
1.3 - MY WEAPONS CONTROLS SETUP own control mapping for the Weapon Select functions.

TRIMMER PUSH
TRIMMER RIGHT WING DOWN
TRIMMER PULL
TRIMMER LEFT WING DOWN Select Sidewinder
Select Amraam
Select Sparrow
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Select Guns
Weapon Release TDC - DEPRESS

CAGE/UNCAGE BUTTON
Gun Trigger: Second
Detent

Sensor Control Sw. FWD HARM Target Sequence

Sensor Control Sw. RIGHT COMM Switch: COMM 1 /RAID / FLIR Button
Sensor Control Sw. AFT COMM Switch: COMM 2
Sensor Control Sw. LEFT RADAR ELEVATION
Sensor Control Sw. DEPRESS CONTROL AXIS

Undesignate / Nose Wheel Steer Switch SPEED BRAKE RETRACT

SPEED BRAKE EXTEND TDC FORWARD

TDC RIGHT
TDC AFT
Autopilot / Nosewheel TDC LEFT
Steering Disengage (Paddle)
ATC Engage/Disengage
Throttle Finger Lift (BOTH)

272
 STORES
1.4 - SMS PAGE sub-menu
(STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM)
HORNET
F/A-18C

The SMS (Stores Management System) page can be accessed by clicking on the MENU OSB , then selecting the
STORES sub-menu in the TAC (Tactical) menu.

This page acts like the A-10C’s DSMS (Digital Stores Management Systems) page and allows you to select armament
and program useful options like gun firing speed, bomb delivery mode or advanced air-to-air missile modes.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

The wingform display provides the number, type, and status of all stores loaded on the aircraft’s weapon stations. A
weapons rack is indicated as a diamond symbol, and the number below indicates the number of weapons loaded on
the rack or station. Various indications can be displayed below the number of weapons numeric to indicate weapon
TAC Menu
status such as RDY (ready, STBY (standby), SEL (selected), LKD (locked) and ULK (unlocked). The gun rounds
remaining is indicated at the top of the wingform (578 being a full load and XXX when empty).

AIM-9M AIM-9L
MK-82 Snake Eye (82X)

MK-20 Rockeye (RET)

AIM-9M

AIM-7F
AIM-9L 273
External Fuel Tank AIM-7M
 1.5 - BOMB DELIVERY MODES
CCIP & CCRP (AUTO)
HORNET
F/A-18C

There are 2 ways to deliver a bomb: CCRP or CCIP modes.

CCIP mode is the traditional dive bombing approach: you

dive on target and the reticle will tell you where the bomb
will impact.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

However, dive bombing is a risky business, especially if anti-

air defences are surrounding your target. The lower you go,
the more vulnerable you are. This is why CCRP release mode CCIP: Continuously Computed Impact Point
was invented.

CCRP mode allows you to fly straight and level without

having to dive down. The HUD will tell you when to release
your bomb for the target you have designated with your
radar. It is a much safer way to release a bomb, but as you
may have guessed already, it is less precise. CCRP mode is
also referred to the AUTO mode.

CCRP: Continuously Computed Release Point

274
 2.1.1 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCIP RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

3
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Click on the desired bomb to select it (82B)
5. We will create a weapon delivery program by selecting a
preset program. Toggle programs with the OSB next to
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

PROG. We will use PROG 1.

2 5

STEP is used to change

selected station
1

275
 2.1.1 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCIP RELEASE MODE 7b
HORNET
F/A-18C

6. Click on OSB next to MODE, then click on OSB to

select CCIP Mode 6b
7. Click on OSB next to MFUZ (Mechanical Fuze), then
press on OSB next to NOSE.
8. Click on OSB next to EFUZ (Electronic Fuze), then
press on OSB next to DLY1 for a delay if desired,
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

otherwise set to INST.

9. Click on OSB next to DRAG, then press on OSB next
to either FF (Free-Falling low-drag bomb) or RET
(retarded fuze) based on your bomb type.

9b
6a

7a

8a
8b

8a

276
 2.1.1 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCIP RELEASE MODE 13
12
HORNET
F/A-18C

11

10. Click on OSB next to « UFC » to activate

the UFC keypad for the STORES page
11. Click on the OSB next to QTY (« : » means
option is selected), type « 2 » on the UFC
keypad, then press « ENT » (« : » means
option is selected) to set 2 bombs per
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

release.
12. Click on the OSB next to MULT (« : »
means option is selected), type « 1 » on
the UFC keypad, then press « ENT » to set
1 bomb to be released simultaneously
from weapon stations
13. Click on the OSB next to INT (« : » means
option is selected), type « 500 » on the
UFC keypad, then press « ENT » to set a
500 ft bomb impact spacing. 10

13

277
 14c
2.1.1 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCIP RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Velocity Vector
14. Start a 30-45 degree dive on your
target
15. Align target vertically with DIL
(Displayed Impact Line), also known
as Bomb Fall Line.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CCIP Mode DIL (Displayed

Selected Impact Line)

14a Aircraft Dive Angle

14b

278
 2.1.1 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82) Weapon Release Button
CCIP RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

18

16. The CCIP cross will appear once a bombing

solution is computed.
17. Steer aircraft to keep the DIL vertical and the CCIP
cross on the target.
18. Press and hold the Weapon Release button Velocity Vector
(« RALT+SPACE ») once CCIP cross is on target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Hold button until all programmed bombs are

released.
19. Pull up before velocity vector reaches the PULL
UP cue.
Pull Up Cue

DIL (Displayed
Impact Line)

CCIP Cross
(On Target)
16

279
 2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

3
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Click on the desired bomb to select it (82B)
5. We will create a weapon delivery program by selecting a
preset program. Toggle programs with the OSB next to
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

PROG. We will use PROG 2.

5
2

STEP is used to change

1 selected station

280
 6b
2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE
HORNET
7b
F/A-18C

6. Click on OSB next to MODE, then click on OSB to

select AUTO Mode
7. Click on OSB next to MFUZ (Mechanical Fuze), then
press on OSB next to NOSE.
8. Click on OSB next to EFUZ (Electronic Fuze), then
press on OSB next to DLY1 for a delay if desired,
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

otherwise set to INST.

9. Click on OSB next to DRAG, then press on OSB next
to either FF (Free-Falling low-drag bomb) or RET
(retarded fuze) based on your bomb type.

6a
9b

7a

8a 8b

8a

281
 2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82) 12
11
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

10. Click on OSB next to « UFC » to activate

the UFC keypad for the STORES page
11. Click on the OSB next to QTY (« : » means
option is selected), type « 2 » on the UFC
keypad, then press « ENT » (« : » means
option is selected) to set 2 bombs per
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

release.
12. Click on the OSB next to MULT (« : »
means option is selected), type « 1 » on
the UFC keypad, then press « ENT » to set
13
1 bomb to be released simultaneously
from weapon stations
13. Click on the OSB next to INT (« : » means
option is selected), type « 500 » on the
UFC keypad, then press « ENT » to set a
500 ft bomb impact spacing. 10

13

282
 2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82) 14 Sensor Control Switch
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. To slave your TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)

to your HUD, press the Sensor Control Switch
FWD.
15. You will see the « ball and chain » appear. In
order to create a reference point for the CCRP, we
will have to designate a specific point in space
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

with the TDC. 14

TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)
16. Enter a 25 deg dive to the target and set your 17 (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
velocity vector on the target.
17. Once velocity vector is on the target, press the
TDC Depress (« Enter ») to designate your CCRP
17
reference point. Target Designator (TD)
Weapon Release Button
14

Velocity Vector Time to Target (sec)

Distance to Target
CCRP AUTO (nm)
Mode Selected ASL (Azimuth
15 Set velocity vector Steering Line)
on target

16 283
 2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82) 14 Sensor Control Switch
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
HORNET
F/A-18C

18. Slew your TD (Target Designator) with the TDC

controls to adjust your CCRP reference point properly.
19. Fly level and keep your velocity vector aligned with
the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line) and above the Pull-
Up cue.
20. When release cue appears, hold the Weapon Release
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Button (« RALT+SPACE ») until all bombs in the pass 14 TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)
have been released. (Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
21. Pull up before velocity vector reaches the PULL UP
cue.
20a CCRP REL Release Cue
20c
14 sec to release
7.2 nm TGT (Target Range) CCRP Release Cue
Weapon Release Button

Direction of CCRP
DROP BOMBS!

Release Cue
Direction of CCRP
20b
CCRP Release Cue

Release Cue
Pull-Up Cue Velocity Vector

ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line) Target Designator (TD) Pull-Up Cue
Velocity Vector

CCRP REL Release Cue

0 sec to release = Releasing!
4.5 nm TGT (Target Range)
CCRP REL Release Cue
3 sec to release 284
5.1 nm TGT (Target Range)
 2.1.2 - UNGUIDED BOMB (MK-82)
CCRP (AUTO) RELEASE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

20d
While bombs are falling, we
can still monitor the TTI

TTI: Time To Impact (sec)

PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

285
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

3
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Click on the desired MK-20 Rockeye station to select it (RE)
5. We will create a weapon delivery program by selecting a preset program.
Toggle programs with the OSB next to PROG. We will use PROG 1.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

STEP is used to change

selected station
1

286
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

6. Click on OSB next to MODE, then click on OSB to select 6b

CCIP Mode
7. Click on OSB next to MFUZ (Mechanical Fuze), then
press on OSB next to VT (Variable Time or Proximity).
This will allow us to set the HOB (Height of Burst)
setting.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

8. The « HT » (Height of Burst) option will now become

available.
7b
9. Press on the OSB next to HT repeatedly to toggle
between available Height of Burst settings. I
recommend using 1500 ft.

6a

7a

8
1500 ft Height of
Burst Setting (HOB)

287
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

13 12 11

10. Click on OSB next to « UFC » to activate the

UFC keypad for the STORES page
11. Click on the OSB next to QTY (« : » means
option is selected), type « 2 » on the UFC
keypad, then press « ENT » (« : » means option
is selected) to set 2 cluster bombs per release.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

12. Click on the OSB next to MULT (« : » means

option is selected), type « 1 » on the UFC
keypad, then press « ENT » to set 1 cluster
bomb to be released simultaneously from
weapon stations
13. Click on the OSB next to INT (« : » means
option is selected), type « 500 » on the UFC
keypad, then press « ENT » to set a 500 ft
bomb impact spacing.

10

13

288
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. Start a 30-45 degree dive on your target

15. Align target vertically with DIL (Displayed Impact
Line), also known as Bomb Fall Line. CCIP Mode
Velocity Vector
Selected
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

14c

14a

14b DIL (Displayed

Impact Line)

Aircraft Dive Angle

289
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
Weapon Release Button
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C

18

16. The CCIP cross will appear once a bombing solution is

computed. Velocity Vector
17. Steer aircraft to keep the DIL vertical and the CCIP cross
on the target.
18. Press and hold the Weapon Release button
(« RALT+SPACE ») once CCIP cross is on target. Hold
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

button until all programmed cluster bombs are

released.
19. Pull up before velocity vector reaches the PULL UP cue.
Pull Up Cue

DIL (Displayed
Impact Line)

CCIP Cross
(On Target)

16

290
 2.2 – MK-20 “Rockeye” Cluster Bombs
CCIP Release Mode
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

291
HORNET
F/A-18C
2.3 - ROCKETS
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Select desired rocket pods; « 68R » stands for LAU-68 rocket
launcher pod. In our case, text should be boxed when selected.
5. Select desired Firing mode Option (SGL for Single, SAL for Salvo)
6. Set desired Rocket Motor (MTR) Type (M4 or M66) CCIP Mode
Selected
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7. Set Rocket Mode to CCIP (text should be boxed)

Pipper
4

Rockets Selected & Armed

2
Rocket Reticle
Rockets Remaining

1
1
292
5
HORNET
F/A-18C
2.3 - ROCKETS
8. Set center of gun reticle on target and wait for the « IN RNG » (In
Range) cue to appear.
9. Press the Weapon Release button (« RALT+ SPACE ») to fire rockets
10. Once you have done your run and the Breakaway X appears, break
off the attack and wave off from target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

In Range Cue

Breakaway X

293
HORNET
F/A-18C
2.4 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-GROUND)
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Select GUN (text should be boxed)
5. Select Gun Rounds Options (MK-50 or PGU-28
rounds)
6. Set Gun Firing Rate Option (HI = 6000 rounds per
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

minute, LO = 4000 rounds per minute)

Pipper
7. Set Gun Mode to CCIP (text should be boxed)

CCIP Mode
Selected

Gun Reticle
Gun Selected & Armed

2
4 Gun Rounds Remaining

1
5
6
294
HORNET
F/A-18C
2.4 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-GROUND)
8. Set center of gun reticle on target and wait for the « IN RNG » (In
Range) cue to appear.
9. Squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar »)
10. Once you have done your run and the Breakaway X appears, break
off the attack and wave off from target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

In Range Cue

Breakaway X

295
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
2.5 – GPS-GUIDED ORDNANCE

296
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

The F/A-18C is able to employ the Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Direct
Attack Munition (JDAM) bombs and the Joint Standoff Weapon (JSOW) glide bombs.
JDAMs are modified general purpose bombs, equipped with a GPS and inertial navigation Coordinate Format:
system (INS) for guidance as well as flight controls. The JSOW has the same guidance and DD MM SS.SS
is a bomb with wings to provide lift and maneuvering flight controls. As such, it has a Degrees Minutes Seconds.Decimal-Seconds
significantly longer range than JDAMs. The JDAMs/JSOWs have (at optimal INS alignment)
a margin of error of approximately 16 ft (5m). Independent programming of each Use LALT+Y to toggle between coordinate units
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

individual bomb allows for simultaneous multi-target attacks.

Basically, the way to employ JDAMs is to first get your target coordinates from either the
mission briefing or using the F10 map, input them to the weapons in either Pre-Planned
Mode (coordinates need to be entered manually) or in TOO Mode (Target of Opportunity,
weapons use the existing A/G (Air-to-Ground) designation, which is the Hornet (or
Harrier) equivalent of the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) in the A-10C. You can make an
A/G designation with WPDSG (Waypoint Designate) button or via the HUD, but it is also
possible to designate with the targeting pod or A/G radar.

For the JDAM tutorial, we will use the Pre-Planned Mode while for the JSOW tutorial we
will use TOO Mode. Once the setup is done and the weapon alignment has been
performed, we will then be able to release them in Manual Mode.

Set Up Weapon
(Pre-Planned coordinates)

OR

Find Target Coordinates Set Up Weapon

(F10 Map, Mission Editor Manual Release Mode
(TOO, Waypoint Designate)
Waypoints, JTAC, etc.)
OR
Mission Briefing Target Points
(Pre-Planned Setup, already set up in
Set Up Weapon Mission Editor) 297
(TOO, Targeting Pod Designate)
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM TGT4 Coordinates (Target 4) TGT3 Coordinates (Target 3)
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Find Coordinates
1. Find coordinates of targets in Degrees Minutes Seconds:Decimal-
Seconds. Do not forget target elevation.

Note: Each JDAM station can have five individual Pre-Planned points per
station (PP1 to PP5). This means 20 possible targets for four JDAMs. For
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

simplicity’s sake, we will use:

• PP1 for Station 2

• PP1 for Station 3
• PP1 for Station 8
• PP1 for Station 7.

Pre-Planned Points (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)

TGT1 30 17 15.33 N 56 57 49.29 E 5745

STA2 / PP1

TGT2 30 17 15.83 N 56 57 45.54 E 5745

STA3 / PP1
TGT2 Coordinates (Target 2) TGT1 Coordinates (Target 1)
TGT3 30 17 18.49 N 56 57 47.61 E 5745
STA8 / PP1

TGT4 30 17 18.71 N 56 57 43.93 E 5745

STA7 / PP1 298
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

3
Set Up Weapons
2. While on the ground, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
3. Click on the desired JDAM bomb to select it (J-82) 4a
4. Once selected, JDAMs need about 3 minutes for alignment. It will
go from 10 UNSTABLE, to 06 MARGINAL and finally 01 GOOD.
When alignment is complete, the TIMING indicator will disappear
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

from the JDAM page.

4b

4c

4d 299
 9b 7b
2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons 8b
5. Select PP (Pre-Planned) Release Mode Selected Station (Station 2)
6. Select Electronic Fuze to INST (Instantaneous).
7. Go in the JDAM Display page by pressing the Selected Pre-Planned Point (PP1)
JDAM DSPLY OSB
8. Select Manual Release Type Selected Weapon (J-82)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9. Select desired JDAM quantity to be used for this

mission.
a) Press the OSB next to QTY
b) Select desired stations to be used for the
mission (I suggest you select all of them).
Selected stations will become boxed.
c) Press the OSB next to RTN (Return).
Mission Page
Release Parameters Summary

5 7a
9c 8a Release Type

Quantity

6a
9a
6b

300
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE 11
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons 13
10. Enter MSN (Mission) page. Crossed-out PP Points mean no valid
coordinates are entered yet.
11. Make sure PP1 is selected to input Target 1 coordinates
12. Select TGT UFC 12
13. On the UFC, select ELEV (Elevation) 15
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

14. Select FEET (« : » will appear when selected), then enter Target
1 altitude on the scratchpad (5745), then press the ENT (Enter)
button.
15. Return to main UFC menu by pressing the TGT UFC button
twice.

10 14b
Pre-Planned Points (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
14a
Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)

TGT1 30 17 15.33 N 56 57 49.29 E 5745

STA2 / PP1

TGT2 30 17 15.83 N 56 57 45.54 E 5745

STA3 / PP1

TGT3 30 17 18.49 N 56 57 47.61 E 5745

STA8 / PP1
14c
TGT4 30 17 18.71 N 56 57 43.93 E 5745
STA7 / PP1
301
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons 16
16. On the UFC, select POSN (Position) « : » will appear once selected.
24
17. We will add the coordinates of Target 1 (PP1)
30 °17’15.33’’ North 56 °57’49.29’’ East
18. On the UFC, select LAT (Latitude). « : » will appear once selected.
19. Press « 2 » (N) to select North coordinates, type « 301715 », then « ENT » to enter
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Degrees Minutes Seconds.

20. Wait for the UFC screen to reset, then type « 33 », then « ENT » to enter
remaining Decimal-Seconds.
21. On the UFC, select LON (Longitude). « : » will appear once selected. 19a 20a
22. On the UFC, press « 6 » (E) to select East coordinates, type « 565749 », then
« ENT » to enter Degrees Minutes Seconds.
23. Wait for the UFC screen to reset, then type « 29 », then « ENT » to enter 18
remaining Decimal-Seconds.
24. Return to main UFC menu by pressing the TGT UFC button twice.

19b 20b
Pre-Planned Points (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft) 23a
22a

TGT1 30 17 15.33 N 56 57 49.29 E 5745

STA2 / PP1

TGT2 30 17 15.83 N 56 57 45.54 E 5745

STA3 / PP1

TGT3 30 17 18.49 N 56 57 47.61 E 5745 21

STA8 / PP1

TGT4 30 17 18.71 N 56 57 43.93 E 5745

STA7 / PP1 302
22b 23b
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons
• Take note that terminal parameters are not functional yet for the JDAM. Terminal parameters allow you to
program the JDAM’s attack heading (HDG), impact angle (ANG) and terminal velocity (VEL).
• Terminal parameters can be programmed by pressing the TGT UFC OSB, then selecting TERM on the UFC.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

303
 25
2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE 26
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons
25. Once Longitude, Latitude and Elevation coordinates are
Station 2 Station 3
entered for PP1, the PP1 icon will be boxed and no longer
crossed out.
26. Press on STEP to select the next station (STATION 3).
27. Repeat process (Steps 11 through 24) for Station 3 PP1, Target 1 Target 2
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Station 8 PP1, and Station 7 PP1.

Pre-Planned Points (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)

TGT1 30 17 15.33 N 56 57 49.29 E 5745 Station 8 Station 7

STA2 / PP1

TGT2 30 17 15.83 N 56 57 45.54 E 5745

Target 3 Target 4
STA3 / PP1

TGT3 30 17 18.49 N 56 57 47.61 E 5745

STA8 / PP1

TGT4 30 17 18.71 N 56 57 43.93 E 5745

STA7 / PP1
304
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM 30
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE 29
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
28. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 28
29. Master Mode – A/G
30. On the SMS (Stores Management System) page, verify that J-82 is selected
31. Set HSI on the right DDI and the JDAM Display page on the left DDI (from SMS page, press the JDAM
DSPLY OSB, then select MSN (Mission) page)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

32. Verify that Manual Release PP Release Mode is selected and that the desired station and PP is
selected.
33. Steer aircraft to the target (indicated by a diamond on the HUD)

33a
Steering Cues
31 31

JDAM Manual
Release Mode

Target Diamond
33b
Distance to Target (nm)

Time to Acceptable
Release Zone

305
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons Minimum JDAM

Launch Range
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

Maximum JDAM
Launch Range

Aircraft IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region)

306
 In Range
2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
34. When you are within the acceptable release zone (between the minimum and
maximum release limits identified on the HSI), the HUD will switch from
displaying “TMR” (Time to reach launch acceptable region) to “IN RNG” (In
Range).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TMR: Time to Launch

Acceptable Region (sec)

J-82 PP
JDAM Selected, Pre-Planned Mode

In Range

Range to Target (nm)

Target Designation Diamond

TMR: Time to Launch
Acceptable Region (sec)

307
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
35. Once you are within the IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region), the Minimum and
Maximum Range circles will disappear and only the IZLAR will remain. IN ZONE cue will
appear on the HUD and on the JDAM Display page. Expected JDAM flight time will also
be displayed on the JDAM Display page.
36. You may now launch your JDAMs.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region) In Zone Cue

In Zone Cue

Range to Target (nm)

Expected JDAM Time of
Flight to the Target

Target Designation Diamond

308
 2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
37. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») until all selected JDAMs are launched. All selected JDAMs will
automatically guide themselves via GPS to the pre-planned designated points.
Weapon Release Button
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Launched JDAM’s Remaining

Time of Flight to the Target

309
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM
PRE-PLANNED + MANUAL MODE

310
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

A neat feature of the targeting pod is that you can designate targets with
it even without a laser. The laser is used for laser-guided weapons, so the
GPS-guided units only need valid coordinates. These coordinates can be
obtained by designating a target with the targeting pod while the
JDAM/JSOW is in TOO (Target of Opportunity) Mode. The coordinates are
then memorized and automatically transferred to the selected
JDAM/JSOW.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TGT1 (Target 1)

Find Target with Targeting Pod From Targeting Pod Designated Set Up Weapon - TOO Manual Release Mode
and Designate with TDC Point, Obtain Coordinates (TOO, uses Designated Point from Targeting Pod)
311
 4a 2 1 6a
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO 4b
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. While on the ground, go in SMS (Stores

Management System) page
5a
2. Click on the desired JDAM or JSOW to select it (we
will use the J-82 JDAM)
3. Once selected, JDAMs need about 3 minutes for
alignment. It will go from 10 UNSTABLE, to 06 5b 3b
MARGINAL and finally 01 GOOD. When alignment is 3a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

complete, the TIMING indicator will disappear from

the JDAM page. 5c
4. Select TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) Release Mode
5. Select Electronic Fuze to INST (Instantaneous).
6. Go in the JDAM Display page by pressing the JDAM
DSPLY OSB
7. Select Manual Release Type
8. Select desired JDAM quantity to be used for this
mission.
a) Press the OSB next to QTY 8b 6b 9b
10
b) Select desired station(s) to be used for the
mission (I suggest you select just one).
Selected station(s) will become boxed.
c) Press the OSB next to RTN (Return).
d) If quantity is set to more than 1, the STEP 9a
No coordinates since no
function will be available to select desired
target is designated yet
weapon station.
e) You may need to re-select TOO mode.
9. Enter MSN (Mission) page.
10. Select TOO1 to set Target 1 parameters. We will
now have to designate Target 1 with the Targeting
Pod to obtain the coordinates of this target. 7 8d

STEP function appears here if more 8a

than one station is selected 312
8c
 18 Throttle Designator Controller
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM 21
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

12
TARGETING POD + TOO 14
HORNET
F/A-18C

11. Set A/G Master Mode.

11
12. To power up the targeting pod, set FLIR Sensor Switch to STBY
(Right Click).
13. From the TAC page on either DDI or the AMPCD, press the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to “FLIR” (Forward-Looking Infrared) to
select the Targeting Pod feed page. Monitor the warm-up process.
• Targeting pod warm-up process will take about 2 minutes.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod status will 19

switch from RDY – NOT TIMED OUT to STBY (Standby). 15
14. Set FLIR Sensor Switch to ON (Right Click). Confirm that Targeting 20 Sensor Control Switch
Pod mode switches from STBY to OPR (Operate). AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
15. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI
(Right for the Right DDI as an example). The Select Focus Diamond 19 15 20
indicates what display is selected.
16. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly to select VVSLV
(Velocity Vector Slaved) mode. This will un-stow the camera and
slave the targeting pod to the velocity vector.
17. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly again to select Target
Snowplow mode. When Snowplow mode is first entered, the FLIR is Coordinates
set to 0° left/right and -8° down.
18. Using the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right
Range to target
controls, slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target.
19. Use appropriate zoom level, field of view (NARROW/WIDE) and
camera mode (CCD/TV or FLIR) to identify the target.
20. Press the Sensor Control Switch Towards Selected Display (Right if 21 16
our right DDI is selected) to toggle between Point Track (PTRK, Target 17
tracks a moving object like a high-contrast vehicle) and Area Track
(ATRK, used for a static target).
21. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Depress button to
designate the target point. This will slave selected air-to-ground
weapons to the target point and display range to target and its
coordinates.
19

313
 22 Throttle Designator Controller
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

TARGETING POD + TOO

HORNET
F/A-18C

22. Once the target has been designated with the TDC DEPRESS control, the target coordinates will automatically since the JDAM is in TOO mode.
23. Confirm on JDAM MSN (Mission) page that coordinates have updated properly once the TDC Depress button has been pressed.

23
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Target Coordinates

Station 2 Selected

Coordinates have been updated

Target 1

314
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: Keep in mind that TOO mode only allows you to save coordinates for one JDAM or JSOW at a time. You cannot transfer coordinates from TOO to PP mode, which makes the use of TOO a bit
cumbersome if you want to strike multiple targets at once.

If you wanted to attack several targets at once, you would need to either set all your coordinates in advance in PP mode (in real life missions of this type are already pre-planned)… or you would need to
designate a target with the targeting pod in TOO, release the JDAM, then acquire another target with the targeting pod in TOO, then launch another JDAM, and so on and so forth.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

315
 Steering Cue
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

TMR: Time to Launch

24. Once your JDAM selected has its target coordinates and
Acceptable Region (sec)
are in TOO mode, we can now start the attack run.
25. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
26. Verify that Master Mode is in A/G (Air-to-Ground) J-82 TOO
27. On the SMS (Stores Management System) page, verify JDAM Selected, Manual Release
that J-82 is selected and RDY (Ready) Target-of-Opportunity Mode
28. Set HSI on the lower AMPCD (I suggest you remove the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

moving map), the targeting pod feed on the right DDI, and
the JDAM Display page on the left DDI (from SMS page,
press the JDAM DSPLY OSB
29. Verify that Manual Release TOO Release Mode is selected
and that the desired station and TOO is selected. Distance to Target (nm)
30. Steer aircraft to the target (indicated by a diamond on the 27 Target Diamond
HUD)

26

28

28

28
25

316
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Minimum JDAM
Launch Range
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

Maximum JDAM
Launch Range

Aircraft IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region)

317
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

In Range
31. When you are within the acceptable release zone (between the minimum and
maximum release limits identified on the HSI), the HUD will switch from
displaying “TMR” (Time to reach launch acceptable region) to “IN RNG” (In
Range).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TMR: Time to Launch

Acceptable Region (sec)

J-82 TOO
JDAM Selected, TOO Mode

In Range

Range to Target (nm)

Target Designation Diamond

TMR: Time to Launch
Acceptable Region (sec)

318
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

32. Once you are within the IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region), the Minimum and
Maximum Range circles will disappear and only the IZLAR will remain. IN ZONE cue will
appear on the HUD and on the JDAM Display page. Expected JDAM flight time will also
be displayed on the JDAM Display page.
33. You may now launch your JDAM.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

IZLAR (In Zone Launch Acceptable Region) In Zone Cue

In Zone Cue

Range to Target (nm)

Expected JDAM Time of
Flight to the Target

Target Designation Diamond

319
 2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

34. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to release your JDAM. Selected JDAM will automatically guide
itself via GPS to the designated target.

Weapon Release Button

PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Launched JDAM’s Remaining

Time of Flight to the Target

320
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM
TARGETING POD + TOO

321
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

The F/A-18C is able to employ the Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM)
bombs and the Joint Standoff Weapon (JSOW) glide bombs. JDAMs are modified general purpose bombs,
equipped with a GPS and inertial navigation system (INS) for guidance as well as flight controls. The JSOW has
the same guidance and is a bomb with wings to provide lift and maneuvering flight controls. As such, it has a
significantly longer range than JDAMs. The JDAMs/JSOWs have (at optimal INS alignment) a margin of error of
approximately 16ft (5m). Independent programming of each individual bomb allows for simultaneous multi-
target attacks.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Basically, the way to employ JSOWs is to first get your target coordinates from either the mission briefing or
using the F10 map, input them to the weapons in either Pre-Planned Mode (coordinates need to be entered
manually) or in TOO Mode (Target of Opportunity, weapons use the existing A/G (Air-to-Ground) designation,
which is the Hornet (or Harrier) equivalent of the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) in the A-10C. You can make an
A/G designation with WPDSG (Waypoint Designate) button or via the HUD, but it is also possible to designate
with the targeting pod or A/G radar.

For the JSOW tutorial, we will use TOO Mode, while for the JDAM tutorial we will use the Pre-Planned Mode.
Once the setup is done and the weapon alignment has been performed, we will then be able to release them
in Manual Mode.

The warhead of the AGM-154A consists of 145 BLU-97/B Combined Effects Bomb (CEB) submunitions. These
bomblets have a shaped charge for armor defeating capability, a fragmenting case for material destruction,
and a zirconium ring for incendiary effects.

The AGM-154C, on the other hand, uses an Imaging Infrared (IIR) terminal seeker with autonomous guidance.
The AGM-154C carries the BROACH warhead, which is designed to attack hardened targets.

Set Up Weapon
(Pre-Planned coordinates)
Find Target Coordinates OR
(F10 Map, Mission Editor Manual Release Mode
Waypoints, JTAC, etc.) Set Up Weapon
(TOO, Waypoint Designate)
OR
Set Up Weapon 322
(TOO, Targeting Pod Designate)
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO 1b
HORNET
F/A-18C

Verify Waypoint Coordinates

1. Normally, JSOW strikes using TOO (Target of Opportunity)
use waypoint already defined in the mission editor.
However, you should always cross-check with the F10 map
if the coordinates make sense in terms of Longitude,
Latitude and Elevation and modify them if required.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

a) Open the SUPT HSI page, then press open the

“DATA” sub-menu.
b) Cycle through existing waypoints and verify their
coordinates and elevation.
c) You can convert each waypoint to PRECISE
coordinates by clicking on the OSB next to PRECISE.
It will add two digits to existing coordinates.

1a

TGT1 Waypoint
(Target 1)
1c
323
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO 2
HORNET
F/A-18C

Set Up Weapons
2. Set A/G Master Mode.
3. While on the ground, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page 5a
4. Click on the desired JSOW to select it (JSA for AGM-154A and JSC
for AGM-154C)
5. Once selected, JSOWs need about 3 minutes for alignment. It will
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

go from 10 UNSTABLE, to 06 MARGINAL and finally 01 GOOD. 4

When alignment is complete, the TIMING indicator will disappear
from the JSOW page.

5b

5c

5d
324
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

8b
Set Up Weapons
6. Select TOO (Target of Opportunity) Release Mode
7. Select Electronic Fuze to INST (Instantaneous).
8. Go in the JSOW Display page by pressing the JSOW DSPLY OSB
10b
9. Select Manual Release Type
10. Select desired JSOW quantity to be used for this mission. In our case, we Selected Station (Station 8)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

want to drop two JSOWs on Target 1.

a) Press the OSB next to QTY Selected Target of Opportunity TOO1
b) Select desired stations to be used for the mission. Selected
stations will become boxed. Selected Weapon (JSA)
c) Press the OSB next to RTN (Return).

6
10c Mission Page

8a
Release Parameters Summary
9 Release Type

7a Quantity

7b

10a

325
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW 14b
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

12 14a

Set Up Weapons
11. Enter MSN (Mission) page.
12. Select TOO1 to set Target 1 parameters
13. Select TOO UFC
14. On the UFC, Select HT (Height). « : » will appear when 13
selected. Then, enter the Height above target in feet at which
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

the JSOW cluster bomb will detonate. As an example, enter 15

100 on the scratchpad, then press the ENT (Enter) button.
The greater the HT, the bigger radius the blast will have.
Note: This step is only required for AGM-154A (cluster 14c
bombs). For the AGM154C, there is no HT setting.
15. Return to main UFC menu by pressing the TOO UFC button
twice.

11

Waypoint Used for TOO

Target Point Waypoint Used

TGT1 Waypoint WP1

Note:
To access the burst height (HT) in pre-planned mode on MSN, you will need to press TGT
UFC then press TERM (Terminal Attack Stage) , and select HT; one extra step vs TOO mode. 326
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW Station 8 Station 2

WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO

HORNET
F/A-18C

16

Set Up Weapons
16. Our current configuration is 2 stations with 2 JSOW-As each.
Therefore, the second JSOW on the rack has the same release
parameters and we only need to set up release parameters for
Station 2, where the other two JSOW-As are installed.
17. Press on STEP to select the next station (STATION 2).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

18. Repeat process (Steps 12 through 15) for Station 2 TOO1.

17b
17a
18
Station 8 Station 2

Parameters for Station 8

(Used for Targets 1 & 3) Parameters for Station 2
(Used for Targets 2 & 4) 327
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
21
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO 20
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
19. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 19
20. Verify Master Mode is set to A/G
21. On the SMS (Stores Management System) page, verify that JSA is selected
22. Set HSI on the right DDI and the JSOW Display page on the left DDI (from SMS page, press the JSOW
DSPLY OSB, then select MSN (Mission) page)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

23. Verify that Manual Release TOO Release Mode is selected and that the desired station and TOO is
selected.
24. On the HSI, select Waypoint 1 using the OSBs next to the arrows.
25. Once the Waypoint 1 is selected, press the OSB next to WPSDG (Waypoint Designate) to designate
Waypoint 1 as your TGT1 (Target Point 1). On the HSI, « WYPT » will switch to « TGT ».

25b
23

24

25a

328
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons

Minimum JSOW
Launch Range
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

Aircraft
Maximum JSOW
Launch Range

329
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
26. Steer aircraft to the target (indicated by a diamond on the HUD)

Steering Cue
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TMR: Time to Launch

TMR: Time to Launch Acceptable Region (sec)
Acceptable Region (sec)

JSA TOO
JSOW-A Selected, TOO Mode

Minimum JSOW
Launch Range

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

Distance to Target (nm)

Aircraft Maximum JSOW
Target Designation Launch Range
Diamond

330
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons In Range Cue

27. When you are within the acceptable release zone (between the
minimum and maximum release limits identified on the HSI), the HUD
will switch from displaying “TMR” (Time to reach acceptable release
zone) to “IN RNG” (In Range). You may now release your weapons.
28. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to drop your first
Weapon Release Button
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

JSOW.
28

Minimum JSOW
Launch Range
In Range Cue

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

JSA TOO
JSOW-A Selected, TOO Mode

Aircraft Maximum JSOW

Launch Range
Distance to Target (nm)

Target Designation
Diamond
331
 2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO
HORNET
F/A-18C

Launch Weapons
29. Once the JSOW is released, the system will step to the next available JSOW. However, keep in mind
that your next JSOW will still be slaved to Waypoint 1. You need to designate Waypoint 2 as your
Target Point.
30. On the HSI, select Waypoint 2 using the OSBs next to the arrows.
31. Once the Waypoint 2 is selected, press the OSB next to WPSDG (Waypoint Designate) to designate
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Waypoint 2 as your TGT2 (Target Point 2). On the HSI, « WYPT » will switch to « TGT ».
32. Verify that TOO and station match as per our plan, then release weapon when ready.
33. Repeat for remaining bombs.

31b
29

30

31a

332
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW
WAYPOINT DESIGNATE + TOO

333
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
(Laser-Guided Mode)
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II

334
 2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II
(Laser-Guided Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

The GBU-12 Paveway II is the laser-guided version of the Mk-82 unguided, general purpose bomb. The GBU-12 guides using the same principles as the GBU-10, the only difference being the bomb the
LGB is based on. The seeker head on each laser guided bomb is set to track only a specific laser pulse rate frequency (PRF) code. These codes can be manually set through the UFC (Up-Front Controller)
panel while selecting the SMS page for the bomb code and the FLIR page for the Targeting Pod laser code.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

335
 2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II
(Laser-Guided Mode) 3
HORNET
F/A-18C

4
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Click on the desired bomb to select it (82LG, Laser-Guided)
5. We will create a weapon delivery program by selecting a 6a
preset program and modifying it. Toggle programs with the
OSB next to PROG. We will use PROG 1 for simplicity.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

6. The Release Mode can be set to either CCIP or CCRP

(AUTO). In our case, we will choose CCRP (AUTO).
7. Leave MFUZ (Mechanical Fuze) to OFF.
8. Click on OSB next to EFUZ (Electronic Fuze), then press on
OSB next to DLY1 for a delay if desired, otherwise set to
INST (Instantaneous).
8a

6b

8b

2 5

336
 15 16 Throttle Designator Controller
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II 19
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

9
(Laser-Guided Mode) 11
HORNET
F/A-18C

9. To power up the targeting pod, set FLIR Sensor Switch to STBY

14
(Right Click).
10. From the TAC page on either DDI or the AMPCD, press the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to “FLIR” (Forward-Looking Infrared) to
select the Targeting Pod feed page. Monitor the warm-up process.
• Targeting pod warm-up process will take about 2 minutes.
• When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod status will
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

switch from RDY – NOT TIMED OUT to STBY (Standby). 17

11. Set FLIR Sensor Switch to ON (Right Click). Confirm that Targeting
Pod mode switches from STBY to OPR (Operate). 12
Sensor Control Switch
12. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI 18
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
(Right for the Right DDI as an example). The Select Focus Diamond
indicates what display is selected. 17 12 18
13. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly to select VVSLV (Velocity
Vector Slaved) mode. This will un-stow the camera and slave the
targeting pod to the velocity vector.
14. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly again to select 15
Snowplow mode. When Snowplow mode is first entered, the FLIR is
set to 0° left/right and -8° down. Target Time to Release (sec)
15. Set LTD/R (Laser Target Designator/Ranger) switch to ARM. This will Coordinates
arm the laser. Confirm that L ARM indication is displayed on the FLIR
page. Verify A/G Master Mode is set since it will allow you to arm
Range to target
the laser designator.
16. Using the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right
controls, slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target. 13
17. Use appropriate zoom level, field of view (NARROW/WIDE) and 16
14
camera mode (CCD/TV or FLIR) to identify the target.
Target
18. Press the Sensor Control Switch Towards Selected Display (Right if
our right DDI is selected) to toggle between Point Track (PTRK,
tracks a moving object like a high-contrast vehicle) and Area Track
(ATRK, used for a static target).
19. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Depress button to
designate the laser as the target point. This will slave selected air-to-
ground weapons to where the laser is firing and display range to 17
target and its coordinates.
337
 27
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II
(Laser-Guided Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

20. Press the OSB next to “UFC” to set the Targeting Pod 21b 21a
laser code on the Up-Front Controller. 28b
21. Press the button next to “LTDC” (Laser Target
Designator Code). A “:” will indicate it is selected. Then,
enter the desired laser code on the keypad and press 21c
“ENT”. We will choose the default laser code 1688.
22. Now that the targeting pod has its laser code, we need
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

to tell the GBU which laser code to track.

21d
23. In SMS (Stores Management System) page, select GBUs
(82LG, boxed when selected).
24. Press the OSB next to “CODE”. 20
25. Press the button next to “CODE” (Guided Bomb Laser
25a
Code). A “:” will indicate it is selected. Then, enter the 25b
desired laser code on the keypad and press “ENT”. We
will choose targeting pod’s laser code 1688 (which we
already set in step 21).
25c
26. The 82LG indication will then display “RDY” since it now
has all the information it needs to launch, track a laser
with a specific code, then home on the target.
27. Press the OSB next to “TRIG” if you want to use the 23
laser manually. The indication will become boxed once
selected, which means that a gun trigger press will fire 26
the laser. This step is required if you are “buddy lasing”
(using your own laser for someone else to use). In our
case, we will let the TRIG option off/unboxed.
• If TRIG remains unboxed, the laser is in
Automatic mode. The laser will automatically
fire a few seconds before the laser-guided
ordnance reaches the target. 25d
24

338
 29
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II
(Laser-Guided Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

28. Fly level and keep your velocity vector aligned with the ASL (Azimuth Steering Line) and above
the Pull-Up cue.
29. When release cue appears, hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») until bomb has
been released.
30. If you want to drop other GBUs, you will have to re-enter a laser code for each bomb every time. Weapon Release Button
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

FLIR (Targeting Pod) is the sensor of interest (SOI)

AUTO release mode selected
44 sec to release CCRP Release Cue

CCRP Release Cue

Drop bombs when lined up
with velocity vector!

Direction of CCRP
Release Cue
Laser Armed Velocity Vector

Pull-Up Cue
ASL (Azimuth
Steering Line)

Laser Countdown
Target Designator (TD) Time until laser is automatically fired
11 nm to TGT (Target Range) to guide the bomb you just dropped

29 29 29 339
 FLIR (Targeting Pod) is the sensor of interest (SOI)
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II Laser Armed Bomb has been dropped
14 seconds until auto-lasing occurs
(Laser-Guided Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Laser Firing
31. When bombs are falling and auto-lasing is selected
(TRIG option unboxed/off), the laser will
automatically fire when the GBU is close enough to
the target.
32. Once laser is firing, the laser mode will switch from
L ARM to LTD/R. The TTI (Time-to-Impact) will
become visible.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

33. The bomb will track the laser for as long as it is

fired until it reaches the target.
34. Once the target is destroyed, the LTD/R (Laser Bomb Falling
Target Designator/Ranger) will automatically go TTI (Time-to-Impact): 9 sec
CODE flashing cue means
back to SAFE. You will need to set it back to ARM if
the next GBU-12 laser
you want to lase more targets.
code has not been set
35. If you want to undesignated the target, use the
Undesignate/Nosewheel Steering button on the
stick.
Laser Armed

TRIG OFF
Auto-Lasing ON

Laser Firing

23

Laser Countdown
TTI (Time-to-Impact) 340
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
(Laser-Guided Mode)
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II

341
 2.7.1 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK 4

(IR-MAVF, IR Missile Seeker Only)

HORNET
F/A-18C

3
1. The AGM-65F requires its seeker to be cooled by
releasing a fluid stored inside onto it for it to be able
to see properly and cannot be operated until it is 5 Alignment Time
cooled. Upon first selection of it on the STORES Remaining
7
format, cooling will be initiated. A timer counting
down to operating status can be seen on the IMAV
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

DSPLY format, which takes approximately 3 minutes.

Note: The cooldown should be started while you
are in the air and the missile is selected since the
Weight On Wheels (WoW) signal inhibits missile
cooldown initiation.
2. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
3. Master Mode – A/G
4. Select MAVF (text should be boxed)
5. Maverick cooldown process will start and take about 2
6
3 minutes. Monitor cooldown progress by pressing
the OSB next to the crossed-out « MAVF », which 3
will show you the Maverick seeker head feed.
6. Once Maverick cooldown is complete, the timer will
disappear and the MAVF Feed will go live.
7. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

342
 Sensor Control Switch
2.7.1 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT 8

(IR-MAVF, IR Missile Seeker Only)

HORNET
F/A-18C

8. You can select the Maverick seeker head feed by going back 10
to the TAC page and selecting IMAV DSPLY or by going in the
STORES page and selecting MAVF twice as shown previously. Maverick Selected (Boxed)
9. Set Fuzing to either INST (Instantaneous), DLY1 (Delayed Fuze) 11 Maverick Caged/Uncaged Status
or DLY2.
10. Set Sensor Control Switch to the Maverick Feed DDI (Sensor
Sensor Selected Diamond
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

10
Control Switch LEFT since we showed up the MAV feed on the
left DDI). A diamond will appear to show the left DDI is
selected.
11. Adjust FOV (Field of View) as required.
12. By default, the Maverick is Caged. When the seeker is caged,
it will always point forward at its boresight. Maverick Seeker Center
Fuzing Options 9
Instantaneous
Delay 1 / Delay 2 Weapon Step Function
Switches selected missile

Maverick Not Locked

Maverick Field of
11 View Selector

Maverick Ship Mode

Enlarges seeker center and
Maverick Aiming Reticle optimizes it for locking onto and
Track Mode
hitting a target on water WHT: White Track, seeker will attempt to lock onto a hot target
BLK: Black Track, seeker will attempt to lock onto a cold target 343
 14 Throttle Designator Controller
2.7.1 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

(IR-MAVF, IR Missile Seeker Only) 15

HORNET
F/A-18C

13. Press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the Maverick. When

uncaged, the missile will attempt to lock onto a contrasting target
within the seeker center.
14. Hold the TDC Depress button while slewing the Maverick to the
target. When you release the TDC Depress button, the missile will Cage/Uncage Button
attempt to lock its target. The Maverick is most likely going to
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

acquire a good lock from a distance of 7.5 miles. 13

15. When lock is acquired by Maverick, the MAVF crossed-out
indication will disappear. Hold the Weapon Release Button Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE ») to fire missile.

14a Maverick Not Locked 14b Maverick Locked

Maverick Aiming Reticle

Target

Maverick Aiming Reticle

(Locked)
Seeker Indication Maverick Locked
Relative to Boresight

Maverick Aiming Reticle

(Slewing / Not Locked) 344
 Note: IR Mavericks have a Gimbal Limit warning. If the gimbal limits are reached, the missile's seeker will cage itself. You will have to
2.7.1 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK uncage the missile again. If you attempt to uncage while the seeker is at gimbal limits, the warning will appear and the missile will cage
(IR-MAVF, IR Missile Seeker Only) itself again.
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

345
 4 11
2.7.2 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK 2
Sensor Control Switch
(IR-MAVF, Missile Slaving to Targeting Pod) AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press A/G Master Mode.

2. Set FLIR Sensor Switch to ON (Right Click). Confirm that Targeting Pod mode switches from STBY to
OPR (Operate).
3. Select FLIR page.
4. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected FLIR DDI page (RIGHT).
5. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
6. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV mode.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

7. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect VVSLV and switch to Snowplow mode.
8. When Snowplow is first entered, the FLIR is set to 0° left/right and -8° down.
9. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the targeting pod 9 Throttle Designator Controller
reticle over the desired target 10 AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
10. To designate a target from Snowplow mode, use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”). A diamond
will appear over the designated point on the FLIR page and on the Heads-Up Display as well. 6 Undesignate / Nosewheel
11. (Optional) If desired, press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the FLIR format page to 7 Steering Button
toggle between Area Track and Point Track.
Sensors are slaved to
5 the FLIR (Targeting Pod)
3 10

10 Distance to Target
11 (nm)
TGT (Target) Designated
Point Track
Target Designation Diamond 346
 15
2.7.2 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK
(IR-MAVF, Missile Slaving to Targeting Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

12. The AGM-65F requires its seeker to be cooled by releasing a fluid stored
inside onto it for it to be able to see properly and cannot be operated until Alignment Time
it is cooled. Upon first selection of it on the STORES format, cooling will be Remaining
initiated. A timer counting down to operating status can be seen on the
IMAV DSPLY format, which takes approximately 3 minutes. Note: The 17
cooldown should be started while you are in the air and the missile is 14b
selected since the Weight On Wheels (WoW) signal inhibits missile
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

cooldown initiation.
13. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
14. Select MAVF (text should be boxed)
15. Maverick cooldown process will start and take about 3 minutes. Monitor
cooldown progress by pressing the OSB next to the crossed-out « MAVF »,
which will show you the Maverick seeker head feed.
16. Once Maverick cooldown is complete, the timer will disappear and the
MAVF Feed will go live.
17. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

16
14a

13

347
 2.7.2 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK 18
(IR-MAVF, Missile Slaving to Targeting Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

18. Set Sensor Control Switch to the Maverick Feed DDI (Sensor Control 19
Switch LEFT since we showed up the MAV feed on the left DDI). A 21
diamond will appear to show the left DDI is selected.
19. Set Fuzing to either INST (Instantaneous), DLY1 (Delayed Fuze) or DLY2.
20. Adjust FOV (Field of View) as required.
21. By default, the Maverick is Caged. When the seeker is caged, it will
always point forward at its boresight.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

18

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

20

348
 Maverick IN RNG
2.7.2 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK Sensors slaved to FLIR (TGP)
MAVF Locked
(IR-MAVF, Missile Slaving to Targeting Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

22. Press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the Maverick.

23. When the Maverick is uncaged and a A/G TGT (air-to-
ground target) is designated by the targeting pod, the Missile Caged
missile will attempt to lock onto a contrasting target
within the designated TGT area. This procedure is much
easier to do than trying to slew the missile itself.
24. The Maverick is within range (distance of 7.5 miles) to Maverick Aiming Reticle
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

the target when IN RNG cue is visible on the HUD and

MAVF feed page.
25. When lock is acquired by Maverick, the MAVF crossed- Maverick Aiming Reticle
out indication will disappear.

Target Designation Diamond Missile Caged

Maverick Locked
Maverick IN RNG
Sensors slaved to
FLIR (TGP)
MAVF Locked

Missile Uncaged &

IN RNG

Target Range (nm) Maverick Aiming Reticle

(Locked)
Cage/Uncage Button
22
Maverick Locked on Missile Uncaged and
targeting pod 349
slaved to targeting pod
 2.7.2 – AGM-65F/G MAVERICK
(IR-MAVF, Missile Slaving to Targeting Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

26. Hold the Weapon Release Button 26

(« RALT+SPACE ») to fire missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Weapon Release Button

350
 2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV)
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Master Mode – A/G (switch can only be activated when wheels are off the ground)
2. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Select MAV (text should be boxed) by pressing the OSB next to MAV. Press it a second time to enter the MAV DSPLY (Maverick Display) page.
5. Laser Maverick will start a self-test that takes about 30 seconds. You can monitor cooldown progress in the MAV DSPLY page by pressing the OSB next to the crossed-out
« MAV » from the SMS (Stores Management System) page.
• Note: Once Maverick cooldown is complete, the timer will disappear.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

6. Select INST (Instantaneous) Fuzing.

5 Alignment Time
Remaining (sec)
4
Press two times

3
6

351
 2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV) 8b
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. In the MAV DSPLY page, press the OSB next to

UFC (Up-Front Controller). This will select all
Laser-Maverick stations (boxed when selected)
and allow us to edit their laser codes all at once. If
you want to edit a specific Maverick’s laser code,
press UFC again to switch between stations.
8. Press the button next to “CODE” (Laser-Guided 8c 8a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Maverick Laser Code). A “:” will indicate it is

selected. Then, enter the desired laser code on
the keypad and press “ENT”. In our case, we will
choose a laser code 1456, which we will set up for
our targeting pod as well in later steps.

Note: Keep in mind that if we were tracking

someone else’s laser, we would need to set the
laser code to the one used by their own targeting
pod. 7

8d

8d

352
 15 16 Throttle Designator Controller
2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK 19
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

9
(Laser-Guided MAV) 11
HORNET
F/A-18C

9. To power up the targeting pod, set FLIR Sensor Switch to STBY

14
(Right Click).
10. From the TAC page on either DDI or the AMPCD, press the OSB
(Option Select Button) next to “FLIR” (Forward-Looking Infrared) to
select the Targeting Pod feed page. Monitor the warm-up process.
• Targeting pod warm-up process will take about 2 minutes.
• When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod status
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

will switch from RDY – NOT TIMED OUT to STBY (Standby). 17

11. Set FLIR Sensor Switch to ON (Right Click). Confirm that Targeting
12
Pod mode switches from STBY to OPR (Operate). Sensor Control Switch
18
12. Press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
(Right for the Right DDI as an example). The Select Focus Diamond
indicates what display is selected. 17 12 18
13. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly to select VVSLV
(Velocity Vector Slaved) mode. This will un-stow the camera and
slave the targeting pod to the velocity vector.
14. Press the Undesignate button twice rapidly again to select 15
Snowplow mode. When Snowplow mode is first entered, the FLIR
is set to 0° left/right and -8° down. Target
15. Set LTD/R (Laser Target Designator/Ranger) switch to ARM. This Coordinates
will arm the laser. Confirm that L ARM indication is displayed on
the FLIR page. Verify A/G Master Mode is set since it will allow you Range to target
to arm the laser designator.
16. Using the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right
controls, slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target. 13
17. Use appropriate zoom level, field of view (NARROW/WIDE) and 16
14
camera mode (CCD/TV or FLIR) to identify the target.
Target
18. Press the Sensor Control Switch Towards Selected Display (Right if
our right DDI is selected) to toggle between Point Track (PTRK,
tracks a moving object like a high-contrast vehicle) and Area Track
(ATRK, used for a static target).
19. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Depress button to
designate the laser as the target point. This will slave selected air-
17
to-ground weapons to where the laser is firing and display range to
target and its coordinates.
353
 2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV)
HORNET
F/A-18C

20. Press the OSB next to “UFC” to set the Targeting Pod laser code on the Up-Front Controller.
21. Press the button next to “LTDC” (Laser Target Designator Code). A “:” will indicate it is selected. Then, enter the desired laser code on the keypad and press “ENT”. We will choose laser code 1456,
which we set previously in step 8 for the laser Mavericks themselves.
22. Now that the targeting pod has its laser code and it matches the laser code tracked by the Laser-Guided Maverick, we can now uncage the missile to make it track the laser.
23. On the FLIR page, make sure the OSB next to “TRIG” in unboxed (not selected). This means that the targeting pod will automatically lase (auto-lasing) once the AGM-65E Maverick is fired.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

21a 23

Laser Armed

21b

20

21c 21d

354
 2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV)
HORNET
F/A-18C

24. While the sensor of interest is the targeting pod (Sensor Focus diamond is on the FLIR page), the Maverick remains Maverick Caged
caged and boresighted.
25. The crossed-out MAV indicates that the Maverick is not tracking any laser yet, which is normal since the targeting
pod has not started firing its laser yet.
26. The TTMR indicates the time in seconds until the aircraft becomes within range to be able to fire the maverick.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TTMR: 12 seconds until

Maverick is in range to target

X (Maverick) Seeker
(Boresighted)

Laser Armed

Laser Armed

Maverick Seeker View Point

(Boresighted)

Targeting Pod Designated Target

Designation Diamond
Aircraft Range to Target (nm)

355
 Maverick Uncaged 28
2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV)
HORNET
F/A-18C

27. Select desired Maverick station using the OSB next to STEP. We will select Station 8.
28. Set Sensor Control Switch to the Maverick Display page’s DDI (Sensor Control Switch LEFT since we showed up the MAV
DSPLY feed on the left DDI). A focus diamond will appear to show the left DDI is selected and the Maverick will automatically 27
become uncaged.
29. When uncaged, the missile will scan ahead in a pattern to search for the nearest laser with the code we entered earlier
(1456), then slave itself to the target designated by the targeting pod if available.
30. If for some reason the missile is caged back, press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the Maverick once more.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

X (Maverick) will move

Sensor Control Switch and search for laser
28 AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

Laser Armed

Laser Armed

29
30
Maverick Seeker View Point
Cage/Uncage Button (Slaved to Targeting Pod Designation Diamond)

Aircraft Range to Target (nm) 356

 31b
2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
IN RNG (In Range) Cue
(Laser-Guided MAV) Laser Firing
HORNET
F/A-18C

31. Once you are within firing range (IN RNG cue will 32
become visible on the HUD), hold the Weapon
Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch
missile.
32. Once missile is fired, the targeting pod will Weapon Release Button
automatically fire its laser on the designation
point in order to guide the Maverick.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

33. Once laser is firing, the laser mode will switch

from L ARM to LTD/R.
34. The missile will follow the laser until impact.
35. Once the target is destroyed, the LTD/R (Laser
Target Designator/Ranger) will automatically go
back to SAFE. You will need to set it back to ARM 31a IN RNG (In Range) Cue
if you want to lase more targets.
36. If you want to undesignated the target, use the
Undesignate/Nosewheel Steering button on the 32
stick.

Laser Firing

35 TRIG OFF
Auto-Lasing ON

Maverick Seeker View Point

(Slaved to Targeting Pod Designation Diamond)

Aircraft Range to Target (nm) 357

 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
(Laser-Guided MAV)
2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK

358
 2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK
(Laser-Guided MAV)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note for lasers designated by others

• If you are tracking a target laser by another aircraft or a JTAC, uncaging the missile will search for any laser in the vicinity.
• If a laser is detected, the MAV crossed-out indication will disappear and be replaced by the RDY indication. The HUD will also display MAV LKD (Maverick Locked on Laser).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

MAV LKD Indication

MAV RDY

Laser Found!

Maverick homing on lased target

359
 2.9 – AGM-88C HARM
INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD, also known in the United States as "Wild Weasel" and
(initially) "Iron Hand" operations, are military actions to suppress enemy surface-based air defenses,
including not only surface-to-air missiles (SAMs) and anti-aircraft artillery (AAA) but also interrelated
systems such as early-warning radar and command, control and communication (C3) functions, while
also marking other targets to be destroyed by an air strike. Suppression can be accomplished both by
physically destroying the systems or by disrupting and deceiving them through electronic warfare.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

The AGM-88 HARM (High-speed Anti-radiation Missile) is a tactical, air-to-surface anti-radiation HARM
missile designed to home in on electronic transmissions coming from surface-to-air radar systems. The
AGM-88 can detect, attack and destroy a radar antenna or transmitter with minimal aircrew input. The There are three main HARM modes: SP (Self-Protection), TOO (Target-of-
proportional guidance system that homes in on enemy radar emissions has a fixed antenna and seeker Opportunity) and PB (Pre-Briefed).
head in the missile's nose. • SP mode uses the radar warning receiver (RWR) to view and select emitters for
the HARM to search for and then engage
TLDR version? The HARM mainly homes on radar emitters. The best way to use the HARMs is to use
the HARM Display page, the HUD and the EW (Early Warning) page with the RWR (Radar Warning
• TOO uses the HARM seeker itself to view and engage emitters. Up to 15
Receiver) together to detect which radar emitters are actively tracking, which ones are locking you, emitters can be displayed.
what level of threat each emitter poses, and which one to target. • PB allows you to fire from maximum range to a preset waypoint without having
to acquire a lock before firing.
Here is an interesting DCS-centric SEAD Reference Guide by the 16th AGR Flight Training School:
https://drive.google.com/file/d/1jUbi9-2YJiKO3E2ZuHijFf231_cnsIw8/view SA6 SAM Site

360
HARM Display Page Heads-Up Display EW Page
 2.9 – AGM-88C HARM
INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

Flying at high altitudes greatly enhances the HARM’s range. However, the higher you are,
the easier you are to find by enemy radars. Keep in mind that doing SEAD operations
means that you will be locked by multiple radar stations and SAM sites can fire missiles on
you or on your own HARM missiles. This means that your countermeasures programs must
be ready at all times and you must often break away from the target once you have fired
your weapon. A great way to do SEAD is to use terrain to mask your approach and fire your
weapons at the last second before breaking off back your egress route.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

HARM Range Table (Ref: RedKite Tutorial)

Range (nm) Altitude (ft) Airspeed (kts IAS)
70 40000 380
50 30000 400
35 20000 400
25 10000 400
15 1000 550

361
 2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity Mode) 6a Sensor Control Switch
2
HORNET
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
F/A-18C

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Set the TAC EW (Early Warning) page on 1
the right DDI and the SMS (Stores
Management System) page on the left
DDI.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

4. In SMS (Stores Management System) page,

click on the OSB next to HARM to select it 4b 3
5. Select TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) Mode
6. Set Sensor Control Switch to the HARM
page DDI (Sensor Control Switch LEFT 6b
since we showed up the HARM page on
the left DDI). A diamond will appear to
show the left DDI is selected.

4a

362
 HARM DISPLAY Notes
2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM Friendly emitters have their code prefixed with an "F". The Upper Line on an emitter means the emitter is locking you. The Lower
Line is used to denote a sea-based emitter.
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

HARM limits CLASS HARM TOO Sub-Page

SP (Self-Protection) Mode

Class Page
This page allows for only a specific
class/category of emitters to be displayed.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

HARM Station Selected

TOO (Target-of-
Opportunity) Mode Center of HARM Seeker

PB (Pre-Briefed) Mode
STEP changes HARM
Emitter Selected (Boxed) Emitter Locking (Upper Bar) Station selected

Reset
Limits Option Scan Option Selects the highest priority emitter
Limits display to the 5 Displays the emitter categories presently detected. A circle indicates
highest priority emitters. an emitter of that category is in view. An up/left/right/down arrow 363
indicates an emitter of that category is detected in said direction
 2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Select which emitter you want to track by pressing the HARM Target Sequence / RAID / FLIR 7
Button (“I” binding). There is no range information available.
8. Fly to align the target icon with the center cross of the seeker head. HARM Target
Note: The HARM Display page is not a Top-Down view; it’s a POV (Point-of-View) of the Sequence /RAID /
Cage/Uncage Button FLIR Button
HARM seeker head with no ground stabilization. HARM DSPLY format provides a boresight
view of the HARM seeker. 9
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9. Press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the HARM and set it to HANDOFF (H-OFF) Mode.
When uncaged, the missile will attempt to lock onto the selected target within the seeker
center. The HARM has a range of up to 80 nm.
10. When lock is acquired by the HARM, the HARM crossed-out indication will disappear. Hold
the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to fire missile.
Center of HARM Seeker SA-6 Emitter
7

Emitters

HARM Selected
7

Target Designator Box (Selected

7 Emitter Line-of-Sight)
SA-6 Emitter (Boxed = Selected)
SA-15 Emitter Locking (Upper Bar) 364
 2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

HARM Locked
(Handoff Mode)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9 Emitters

HARM Selected

Target Designator Box (Selected Emitter Line-of-Sight) 9

in HANDOFF (H-OFF) Mode
365
 2.9.2 – AGM-88C HARM
(SP, Self-Protection Mode) 2
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 6

2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Set the TAC EW (Early Warning) page on the right DDI and the 1
HARM Target
SMS (Stores Management System) page on the left DDI. Sequence /RAID /
4. In SMS (Stores Management System) page, click on the OSB FLIR Button
next to HARM to select it
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Select SP (Self-Protection) Mode

6. Consult the HUD, RWR or EW page ands select which emitter
you want to track by pressing the HARM Target Sequence /
RAID / FLIR Button (“I” binding). There is no range information
available.

4b 3

3
HARM Station Selected
4a

6 SA-15 Emitter (Boxed = Selected)

STEP changes HARM

Station selected 366
 2.9.2 – AGM-88C HARM 6

(SP, Self-Protection Mode) Emitters

HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to fire missile.

Note: SP Mode allows for 360° engagement; however, more kinetic energy is sacrificed to turn
as the angle increases. Self-Protect is named as such because it is primarily designed for quick
reaction to a threat. On these three RWR displays, whenever the HARM and SP mode is
selected, a square is placed around the selected emitter; the highest priority emitter is
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

selected automatically. Note that a maximum of 6 emitters are displayed on the HUD, but the
HARM will always cycle all emitters. Once fired, the HARM will either have already acquired
the selected emitter or, if it is outside the HARM seeker field of view, it will acquire it post-
launch.
6

SA-15 Emitter (Boxed = Selected)

HARM Selected

SA-15 Emitter (Boxed = Selected)

367
 F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT HORNET
2.9.2 – AGM-88C HARM
(SP, Self-Protection Mode)

368
 Waypoint 1
2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon (HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint)

(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)

HORNET
F/A-18C

The Harpoon is a programmable anti-ship missile. In this Waypoint 2

tutorial, we will use the BOL (Bearing-Only Launch)
mode, which requires us to enter the following
Harpoon Self-Destruct Point
parameters: (50 nm after Weapon Launch)

• Search Point Distance: distance from launch to when

PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

the Harpoon will begin searching for a target. Valid

value is between 0–105 nm.
• Self-Destruct Distance: distance the Harpoon will
travel after launch before self-destructing if it does not
find a target.
• Bearing to Target: bearing (in degrees) the Harpoon Ship
will travel, if no Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) exists, at (20 nm from HPTP)
launch from the aircraft, or if a HPTP does exist, the
bearing it will travel from the HPTP.
• Fly-Out (FLT) Altitude Option: toggle between HIGH,
MED, and LOW. This is the altitude the missile will fly Search Point
(5 nm from weapon launch)
at during the ingress/searching phase of flight. LOW is FXP: Fixpoint
5,000 ft, MED is 15,000 ft, and HIGH is 35,000 ft. Imaginary point located halfway in
• Terminal (TERM) Altitude Option: toggle between distance between the Search Point and
SKIM and POP. This is the altitude the missile will fly at Self-Destruct Point, based on the bearing
value at that time. If HPTP is selected, the
in the terminal phase of flight to ultimately impact the FXP is automatically disabled.
target. SKIM performs a very low-level approach all the
way to impact. POP performs a high-G "pop-up"
maneuver to impact the target from above. Waypoint 1
(HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint) Your Position
(Weapon Launch)

Note: Distances are not in

scale in this picture.
Deal. With. It. 369
Thanks.
 3
2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

4
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. On the SMS (Stores) page, press OSB next to HPD (AGM-84D Harpoon)
4. Harpoon will start an inertial alignment that takes about 25 seconds. You can 2
monitor gyro alignment process on the SMS (Stores Management System) page.
• Note: Once Harpoon alignment is complete, the timer will disappear.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Press the OSB next to « UFC » (Up-Front Controller) to program Harpoon release
parameters
6. On the UFC, press the button next to “SRCH” (Search Point). A “:” will indicate it
is selected. Then, enter on the keypad the desired distance from launch to when
the Harpoon will begin searching for a target. Press “ENT” afterwards. In our
case, we will choose a Search Point distance of 5 nm.
7. On the UFC, press the button next to “DSTR” (Self-Destruct Distance). A “:” will 5a
indicate it is selected. Then, enter on the keypad the desired missile self-
destruction distance, and press “ENT”. In our case, we will choose a self-
destruction distance of 50 nm. 1
8. On the UFC, press the button next to “BRG” (Bearing). A “:” will indicate it is
selected. Then, enter on the keypad the desired bearing (in degrees) the Harpoon
will travel, and press “ENT”. In our case, we will choose a bearing of 305.

5b

6b
6a 8b
7b
7a

8a

6c
8c
7c 370
 2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

9. Verify “BOL” release mode is selected (can be toggled to R/BL with the OSB next to “MODE” if a target is designated, which we will see in the R/BL
tutorial).
10. Press OSB next to “FLT” (Fly-Out Altitude) to toggle between LOW, MED and HIGH. We will choose LOW.
11. Press OSB next to “TERM” (Terminal Altitude) to toggle between SKIM and POP attack profiles. SKIM performs a very low-level approach all the way
to impact, while POP performs a high-G "pop-up" maneuver to impact the target from above. In our case, we will choose SKIM.
12. Set HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) on the other DDI from the SUPT menu. This will display the Harpoon profile without the use of a FXP
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

(Fixpoint) or a HPTP (Harpoon Turnpoint). This basic profile will launch the missile and make it turn immediately to the bearing programmed earlier.
Note: Each Harpoon missile must be programmed individually since these programs are not shared between missiles.

Harpoon Self-Destruct Point

12 (50 nm after Weapon Launch)

9a

Search Point
10a (5 nm from weapon launch)

11a

9b
Your Position
10b (Weapon Launch)

11b

371
 Waypoint 1
2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon 14ia
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

13. When launched in BOL mode, the Harpoon travels either directly in the direction of the set bearing from the
aircraft, directly to a Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) and then to the set bearing, or directly to the Fixpoint (FXP).
14. Use Fixpoint or HPTP as required.
i. If you want to use a Fixpoint, press the OSB next to FXP. This will create a Fixpoint, which is located
halfway in distance between the search point and destruct point, based on the bearing value at that time.
The course between the FXP and the aircraft then pivots around said FXP.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

ii. If you want to use a Harpoon Turnpoint, select a desired waypoint with the HSI, then press the OSB next
to HPTP. This profile makes the missile travel directly to the Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) and then to the set 14ib
bearing.

14id Harpoon Self-Destruct Point

Harpoon Self-Destruct Point (50 nm after Weapon Launch)
(50 nm after Weapon Launch)

14ia

14ib Search Point

(5 nm from HPTP
FXP (not visible on HSI)
weapon launch) (Waypoint 1)
Search Point
(5 nm from
weapon launch)

Your Position
Your Position (Weapon Launch)
(Weapon Launch)

14ic
372
 2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

15. Check the IN ZONE/IN RNG/TTMR/out of zone cue and confirm that “IN ZONE” 15
is displayed. If you are not, steer the aircraft in the correct direction.
16. Make sure you are above the minimum launch altitude of 2500 ft and flying
level. Launching the Harpoon during negative Gs can make the aircraft collide
with the missile.
17. Press and hold the Weapon Release button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Harpoon.
Weapon Release Button
18. Once launched, there can be a momentary radar altimeter warning; that is
normal due to the free-falling missile being momentarily detected by the radar 17
altimeter system.

15

373
 2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

19. The Harpoon, at an altitude corresponding to the FLT option (LOW, 5000 ft),
travels either directly in the direction of the set bearing from the aircraft,
directly to a Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) and then to the set bearing (305), or
directly to the Fixpoint (FXP). At the defined search distance (5 nm after
reaching the HPTP), the Harpoon will then initiate its search for a target. If it
locates one, it will engage it based on the SKIM or POP terminal options (SKIM
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

in our case). If it does not find a target before reaching the self-destruct point,
it self-destructs (50 nm after launch).

374
 2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(BOL, Bearing-Only Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note 1: if the aircraft is not lined up properly to launch the

Harpoon, the IN ZONE/IN RNG/TTMR/out of zone cue will let
you know.
• IN ZONE: displayed in BOL when no out of zone condition
exists.
• IN RNG: displayed in RB/L mode when the aircraft is in
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

range and no out of zone condition exists.

• TTMR: predicted time in seconds (to a maximum of 99)
until the aircraft will reach maximum range in RB/L.
• Out of zone: one of various cues displayed in either BOL or
RB/L if the aircraft meets one of these out of zone
conditions:
• SRCH/DSTR: distance between BOL search point
and destruct point is too small.
• DSTR RNG: BOL destruct range is greater than
maximum range.
• INV TGT: R/BL TGT distance from aircraft is
considered invalid (>172nm).
• ALT: aircraft altitude less than absolute minimum
(generally 2,500ft above the ground).
• OFF AXIS: bearing to R/BL TGT, BOL search area, or
HPTP is >90°.
• HPTP ANG: total angle at the HPTP is too large.
• A/C HPTP: aircraft is too close to the HPTP.
• TGT/HPTP: HPTP is too close to the R/BL TGT or BOL
search area.

Note 2: A dashed line on the HSI will indicate that you are off
axis as well.

375
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon Missile searches for ship

(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode) Waypoint 1

HORNET
F/A-18C

(HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint)

The Harpoon is a programmable anti-ship missile. In this tutorial,
Ship
we will use the R/BL (Range & Bearing Launch) mode. Range and
Bearing Launch (R/BL) uses an Air-to-Ground Target (TGT) Waypoint 2
designation to provide both range and bearing information to the (TGT, Designated Target Point)
Harpoon. This mode does not command the Harpoon to
detonate on the TGT, but rather to begin searching for a suitable
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

target near the TGT designation and then engage it.

R/BL requires us to enter the following parameters:

• Fly-Out (FLT) Altitude Option: toggle between HIGH, MED, and

LOW. This is the altitude the missile will fly at during the
ingress/searching phase of flight. LOW is 5,000 ft, MED is
15,000 ft, and HIGH is 35,000 ft.
• Terminal (TERM) Altitude Option: toggle between SKIM and
POP. This is the altitude the missile will fly at in the terminal
phase of flight to ultimately impact the target. SKIM performs
a very low-level approach all the way to impact. POP performs
a high-G "pop-up" maneuver to impact the target from above.
• Search Area (SEEK) Option: toggle between SML (5.4 nm),
MED (10.8 nm) and LRG (16.2 nm) search area distance. This is
the distance before the TGT point the missile will begin
searching.

Your Position
(Weapon Launch)

376
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

2. Master Mode – A/G
3
3. On the SMS (Stores) page, press OSB next to HPD
(AGM-84D Harpoon)
4. Harpoon will start an inertial alignment that takes
about 25 seconds. You can monitor gyro alignment
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

process on the SMS (Stores Management System) page. 4

• Note: Once Harpoon alignment is complete, the
timer will disappear.

377
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon 5a
(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Waypoint 1
5. If you want to use a Harpoon Turnpoint, select a desired waypoint with the HSI, then press the OSB next to HPTP.

This profile makes the missile travel directly to the Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) and then to the Designated TGT
point (we will see how to set it up in the next steps).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Waypoint 1
(HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint)

Ship

5c

Waypoint 2
(TGT, Designated Target Point)
5b
HPTP
(Waypoint 1)

Your Position
(Weapon Launch)

Your Position
(Weapon Launch) 378
 Waypoint 1
2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon (HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint)

(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)

HORNET
F/A-18C

6. You will only be able to select the R/BL mode is a target is

Ship
designated. This can be done by either performing a
Waypoint Designate (WPDSG) action via the HSI or by using
the Targeting Pod and designating the ship’s location with
the TDC (Throttle Designation Control) Depress button. Waypoint 2
(TGT, Designated Target Point)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

As an example, we will set Waypoint 2 as the TGT point by

selecting Waypoint 2 with the OSB selectors, then pressing
the OSB next to WPDSG (Waypoint Designate). Waypoint 2
will then become the designated target point. Your Position
(Weapon Launch)

Waypoint 2
(TGT, Designated Target Point)
Targeting Pod (use at your own risk… some ship missiles have a
longer range than your targeting pod’s effective visibility)
6a

5 Throttle Designator Controller

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

6c

6b

379
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Once the TGT (Air-to-Ground Target Point) has been designated, the R/BL Mode will become available for
selection. 7
8. Select “R/BL” release mode by pressing the OSB next to “MODE” if a target is designated properly, the mode will
switch from BOL to R/BL.
9. Press OSB next to “FLT” (Fly-Out Altitude) to toggle between LOW, MED and HIGH. We will choose LOW.
10. Press OSB next to “TERM” (Terminal Altitude) to toggle between SKIM and POP attack profiles. SKIM performs a
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

very low-level approach all the way to impact, while POP performs a high-G "pop-up" maneuver to impact the
target from above. In our case, we will choose POP.
11. Press OSB next to “SEEK” (Search Area) to between SML (5.4 nm), MED (10.8 nm) and LRG (16.2 nm) search area
distance. In our case, we will choose MED.

8a

8c

Waypoint 2
9a (TGT, Designated Target Point)

10a 8b
Waypoint 1
(HPTP, Harpoon Turnpoint)

11a

9b

10b Your Position

(Weapon Launch)
11b 380
 Direction of TGT Point
2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon (Diamond)

(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)

HORNET
F/A-18C

12. Check the IN ZONE/IN RNG/TTMR/out of zone cue and confirm that “IN RNG” 12
is displayed. If you are not, steer the aircraft in the correct direction and .
13. Make sure you are above the minimum launch altitude of 2500 ft and flying
level. Launching the Harpoon during negative Gs can make the aircraft collide
with the missile.
14. Press and hold the Weapon Release button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Harpoon.
Weapon Release Button
15. Once launched, there can be a momentary radar altimeter warning; that is
normal due to the free-falling missile being momentarily detected by the radar 14
altimeter system.

12

381
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

16. The Harpoon, at an altitude corresponding to the FLT option (LOW, 5000 ft),
travels either directly in the direction of the set bearing from the aircraft,
directly to a Harpoon Turnpoint (HPTP) and then directly to the designated TGT
point (Waypoint 2). The missile then begins searching a set programmed
distance before the TGT. If it locates a target, it will engage it based on the
SKIM or POP terminal modes.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

382
 2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon
(R/BL, Range & Bearing Launch Mode)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note 1: if the aircraft is not lined up properly to launch the

Harpoon, the IN ZONE/IN RNG/TTMR/out of zone cue will let
you know.
• IN ZONE: displayed in BOL when no out of zone condition
exists.
• IN RNG: displayed in RB/L mode when the aircraft is in
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

range and no out of zone condition exists.

• TTMR: predicted time in seconds (to a maximum of 99)
until the aircraft will reach maximum range in RB/L.
• Out of zone: one of various cues displayed in either BOL or
RB/L if the aircraft meets one of these out of zone
conditions:
• SRCH/DSTR: distance between BOL search point
and destruct point is too small.
• DSTR RNG: BOL destruct range is greater than
maximum range.
• INV TGT: R/BL TGT distance from aircraft is
considered invalid (>172nm).
• ALT: aircraft altitude less than absolute minimum
(generally 2,500ft above the ground).
• OFF AXIS: bearing to R/BL TGT, BOL search area, or
HPTP is >90°.
• HPTP ANG: total angle at the HPTP is too large.
• A/C HPTP: aircraft is too close to the HPTP.
• TGT/HPTP: HPTP is too close to the R/BL TGT or BOL
search area.

Note 2: A dashed line on the HSI will indicate that you are off
axis as well.

383
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.1 – Introduction
HORNET
F/A-18C

The AGM-84E SLAM (Standoff Land Attack Missile) is a sub-sonic over-the-horizon

air-launched cruise missile. It was designed to provide all-weather, day and night,
precision attack capabilities against stationary high-value targets. Except for new
technologies in the guidance and seeker sections, which included a Global
Positioning System (GPS) receiver, a Walleye optical guidance system, and a newly
developed missile datalink, all of the missile hardware came directly from the
Harpoon missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

The SLAM offers two basic operating modes: Preplanned for land strike, and Target-
of-Opportunity for maritime strike. Used in the latter mode, SLAM allows a selective
attack on the most vulnerable part of the target vessel, particularly useful when
hitting tankers.

Basically, the way to employ SLAMs is to first get your target coordinates from
either the mission briefing or using the F10 map, input them to the weapons in
either Pre-Planned Mode (coordinates need to be entered manually) or in TOO
Mode (Target of Opportunity, weapons use the existing A/G (Air-to-Ground)
designation, which is the Hornet (or Harrier) equivalent of the SPI (Sensor Point of
Interest) in the A-10C.
Set Up Weapon
(Pre-Planned coordinates)

OR
Set Up Weapon
Find Target Coordinates (TOO, Waypoint Designate)
(F10 Map, Mission Editor OR Launch Missile Missile reaches DIST parameter, or distance Missile Feed is Visible and missile
Waypoints, JTAC, etc.) (Manual Release) from target when seeker head goes active can be remote-controlled by the
Set Up Weapon pilot via Datalink pod
(TOO, Targeting Pod Designate)
TTS (Time to Seeker) = 0
OR
Set Up Weapon
(TOO, Air-to-Ground Radar Designate)

384
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.1 – Introduction
HORNET
F/A-18C

The profile of the SLAM cruise missile launched from the Hornet is:

1. The missile launches from the aircraft

2. The missile reaches Cruise Altitude (set through the FLT, Fly-Out Profile property)
3. The missile eventually enters a dive and goes into the Low Altitude Penetration Stage
4. When the missile is close enough to the target, it will steer directly to the target’s
area and enter Terminal Attack Stage
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. When missile reaches the distance parameter (DIST), the missile’s seeker head
becomes active. The pilot can then manually steer the missile using the TDC (Throttle
Designation Control). Communication with the missile is done through the datalink
pod.

AGM-84E SLAM Missile Flight Profile 15 nm (typical)

TTS (Time-to-Seeker) = 0
Missile Reaches DIST parameter
Cruise Altitude (distance from target when
(FLT parameter) seeker head goes active)

SLAM Launch (In Air)

Missile Reaches Low
Altitude Penetration Stage

Note: the AGM-84E SLAM has no

terrain following capabilities. Terminal Attack Stage

Target

385
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.1 – Introduction
HORNET
F/A-18C

In order to control the missile, an AWW-13 Datalink Pod needs to be equipped to maintain communication between the aircraft (the pilot commands issues through the TDC (Throttle
Designation Control)) and the missile.

Targeting Pod
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

AGM-84E SLAM Missile

AWW-13 Datalink Pod 386

 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM 2
2.11.2 – Weapon Setup
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

2. Master Mode – A/G 1
3. On the SMS (Stores) page, press OSB next to SLAM to power up the
AGM-84E missile. 7a
4. On the SMS (Stores) page, click on the OSB next to DL13 to turn on the
Datalink Pod.
5. Use STEP function to select desired SLAM missile station.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

6. Once selected, the SLAM needs about 3 minutes for alignment.

7. Alignment It will go from 10 UNSTABLE, to 06 MARGINAL and finally
01 GOOD. When alignment is complete, the TIMING indicator will
7e
disappear from the SMS page.

3 4 7b

7c

387
7d
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.2 – Weapon Setup
HORNET
F/A-18C

8. Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to WEP. This will allow you to
choose what SLAM missile is communicating with the Datalink pod.
9. Select corresponding SLAM station using the OSBs on the left side. In
our case, the lower SLAM (yellow) OSB needs to be slaved to Station 8
(boxed).
10. Once communication between SLAM station and datalink pod has
Station 3 Station 7
been established, a SLAM indication will be displayed under the boxed
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

DL13 indication. Station 8

Station 2

9 SLAM correspondence
(color coded)

10

9
8

388
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.2 – Weapon Setup
HORNET
F/A-18C

11. Press OSB next to FLT (Fly-Out Altitude) parameter to toggle between HIGH
(35,000 ft), MED (15,000 ft) and LOW (5,000 ft). We will set it to MED.
12. Press OSB next to EFUZ (Electronic Fuze) to toggle parameter to INST
(Instantaneous).
13. Press OSB next to SLAM DSPLY to enter the SLAM DISPLAY page.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

11a

13
12a

11b

12b

389
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.2 – Weapon Setup
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. Once you are in the SLAM DISPLAY page, press OSB next to REL TYPE (Release Type), then press OSB next to MAN to select a Manual Release.
15. Press OSB next to UFC (Up-Front Control). Once UFC is boxed, the DIST parameter (distance from target when seeker head goes active) can be modified from the UFC panel.
16. Press OSB next to DIST to select this field. “:” indicates the field is selected. Then, enter “15” on the UFC keypad, then press “ENT” button to set a DIST parameter of 15 nm.
17. Press OSB next to UFC to unselect (unbox) the function.
16a 15b
16b
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

14b

14c
14a 16c

15a

17

Release Types
• Manual
• Auto Loft 390
• Flight Director (FD)
 5
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.1 – Target Designation – TOO / Waypoint
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press OSB next to MODE to toggle between TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) and PP (Pre-Planned) target designation modes. In this
case, we will choose TOO.
2. Press OSB next to MSN to enter the Mission Parameters page.
3. We can define up to two Targets of Opportunity per missile station: TOO1 and TOO2. We will designate the target on TOO1. Press
OSB next to TOO1 to select it.
4. The ORP (Offset Release Point) is the designated target point (A/G TGT). For now, the field is empty since no target is defined yet.
5. (Optional) If you want to set TERM (Terminal Attack) parameters such as heading (HDG), attack angle (ANG) and velocity (VEL),
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

press OSB next to TOO UFC. You will be able to enter them via the UFC. However, since we will control the missile remotely
during the terminal attack stage, these parameters are not required and we will leave them blank,
6. (Optional) We do not need O/S (Offset) parameters to the ORP since we will control the missile remotely during the terminal
attack stage. Therefore, we will not need to use O/S UFC function.

2b
5
Parameters for Station 8

4 6
2a
5

391
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.1 – Target Designation – TOO / Waypoint
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. In this example, Waypoint 2 is set directly on our target. It is good practice to cross-check the waypoint elevation with the F10 map.
8. On the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), press OSB to select WYPT (boxed when selected). After, select Waypoint 2 using the OSBs next to the arrows.
9. Once the Waypoint 2 is selected, press the OSB next to WPSDG (Waypoint Designate) to designate Waypoint 2 as your TGT1 (Target Point 1). On the HSI, « WYPT » will switch to « TGT ».
Minimum and Maximum Launch Range circles will appear on the HSI.

Designated Target
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9b
8a
SLAM Min Launch
Range Circle

Waypoint 2 SLAM Max Launch

Range Circle

8b

You

9a LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

392
 Steering Cue
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
Target Designation Diamond SLAM Selected
2.11.3.1 – Target Designation – TOO / Waypoint
HORNET
F/A-18C

Designation Mode Selected

10. The coordinates and elevation of the designated waypoint (TGT1) will then directly transfer to the • TOO: Target-of-Opportunity
ORP (Offset Release Point) in the MSN page. • PP: Pre-Planned
11. The target designation diamond, steering cues, range to target, SLAM indication, TMR indication
(time required to be within range of a valid SLAM launch) and TOO indication will appear on the
HUD.
12. Press the OSB next to RETURN to return back to the SMS (Stores) page. We are now almost ready to
begin our strike and launch the missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

13. Please proceed to section 2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control.

TMR Indication

11
TGT: Aircraft Distance to Target (nm)

10
Designated Target coordinates and elevation

12b
12a

393
 5
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.2 – Target Designation – TOO / Targeting Pod
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press OSB next to MODE to toggle between TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) and PP (Pre-Planned) target designation modes. In this
case, we will choose TOO.
2. Press OSB next to MSN to enter the Mission Parameters page.
3. We can define up to two Targets of Opportunity per missile station: TOO1 and TOO2. We will designate the target on TOO1. Press
OSB next to TOO1 to select it.
4. The ORP (Offset Release Point) is the designated target point (A/G TGT). For now, the field is empty since no target is defined yet.
5. (Optional) If you want to set TERM (Terminal Attack) parameters such as heading (HDG), attack angle (ANG) and velocity (VEL),
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

press OSB next to TOO UFC. You will be able to enter them via the UFC. However, since we will control the missile remotely
during the terminal attack stage, these parameters are not required and we will leave them blank,
6. (Optional) We do not need O/S (Offset) parameters to the ORP since we will control the missile remotely during the terminal
attack stage. Therefore, we will not need to use O/S UFC function.

2b
5
Parameters for Station 8

4 6
2a
5

394
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.2 – Target Designation – TOO / Targeting Pod
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the
12
selected DDI to slave TDC to the targeting pod.
8. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected. 8
9. Press the Undesignate button twice to select VVSLV mode.
10. Press the Undesignate button twice to select unselect VVSLV and switch to
Snowplow mode.
11. When Snowplow is first entered, the FLIR is set to 0° left/right and -8° down.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

12. Set Zoom level, TV/FLIR mode and Field-of-View as required. 12

13. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to
slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired target.
14. To designate a target from Snowplow mode, use the TDC DEPRESS control
(“ENTER”). A diamond will appear over the designated point on the FLIR page
and on the Heads-Up Display as well.

7
Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

12

Throttle Designator Controller

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
13
14
14
Target Designation Diamond
12

10

Undesignate / Nosewheel Steering Button 395

 Steering Cue
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
Target Designation Diamond SLAM Selected
2.11.3.2 – Target Designation – TOO / Targeting Pod
HORNET
F/A-18C

Designation Mode Selected

15. The target designation diamond, steering cues, range to target, SLAM indication, TMR • TOO: Target-of-Opportunity
indication (time required to be within range of a valid SLAM launch) and TOO indication will • PP: Pre-Planned
appear on the HUD.
• Note: Since the targeting pod’s effective range is much shorter than the maximum
range of a SLAM missile, it is possible that the TMR indication is already set to IN
RNG (In Range) once you designate the target.
16. Minimum and Maximum Launch Range circles will appear on the HSI.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TMR (or IN RNG)

Designated Target Indication

TGT: Aircraft Distance to Target (nm)

SLAM Min Launch

Range Circle

SLAM Max Launch

Range Circle

You

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

396
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.2 – Target Designation – TOO / Targeting Pod
HORNET
F/A-18C

17. The coordinates and elevation of the designated target point will then directly transfer to the ORP (Offset Release Point) in the MSN page.
18. Press the OSB next to RETURN to return back to the SMS (Stores) page. We are now almost ready to begin our strike and launch the missile.
19. Please proceed to section 2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

17
Designated Target coordinates and elevation

18b

18a

397
 5
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press OSB next to MODE to toggle between TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) and PP (Pre-Planned) target designation modes. In this
case, we will choose TOO.
2. Press OSB next to MSN to enter the Mission Parameters page.
3. We can define up to two Targets of Opportunity per missile station: TOO1 and TOO2. We will designate the target on TOO1. Press
OSB next to TOO1 to select it.
4. The ORP (Offset Release Point) is the designated target point (A/G TGT). For now, the field is empty since no target is defined yet.
5. (Optional) If you want to set TERM (Terminal Attack) parameters such as heading (HDG), attack angle (ANG) and velocity (VEL),
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

press OSB next to TOO UFC. You will be able to enter them via the UFC. However, since we will control the missile remotely
during the terminal attack stage, these parameters are not required and we will leave them blank,
6. (Optional) We do not need O/S (Offset) parameters to the ORP since we will control the missile remotely during the terminal
attack stage. Therefore, we will not need to use O/S UFC function.

2b

5
Parameters for Station 8

4 6
2a
5

398
 Sensor Control Switch 7a
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM TDC 10 AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) 11
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar 12
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Select RDR ATTK page (since A/G Master Mode is selected, the air-to-ground radar page should be visible already)
and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI (RIGHT) to slave TDC (Throttle Designation
Controller) to the air-to-ground radar. Focus diamond should be visible.
8. We could designate the target directly from the MAP (Ground Mapping) mode, but we will use Expanded Modes
(EXP) to progressively get a better view before designating the target. You could switch directly from MAP to EXP3,
but going from MAP → EXP1 → EXP2 → EXP3 will make your life much easier.
9. Adjust radar range as desired, then press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP1.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

10. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).

11. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a sector map
(zoom) using the TDC controls.
12. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP1 mode.
13. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better view of the region you just
expanded.

9b 7b

9a 12
11
10

Corral

399
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM TDC 15
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) 16
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar 17
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP2.

15. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
16. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a patch map (zoom) using the TDC controls.
17. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP2 mode.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

14 17

16

400
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM TDC 19
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) 20
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar 21
HORNET
F/A-18C

18. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to EXP3.

19. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
20. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the trapezoidal corral over the desired region you want to set as a Synthetic-Aperture Radar (SAR) map (zoom) using
the TDC controls.
21. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to enter EXP3 mode.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

21

18
20

401
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
TDC Cursor
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar
HORNET
23
F/A-18C

22. Press and hold TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »). Approximative location of target
23. While TDC DEPRESS is held, slew the TDC cursor on the (typically given in mission briefing)
desired spot you want to designate using the TDC controls.
24. Release the TDC DEPRESS control to designate target. A
designation cross will be visible on the RDR ATTK display.

• Take note that target designation with the air-to-ground

PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

radar is not very precise. If visibility allows it, a good idea

would be to select the FLIR (Targeting Pod) page, which will
automatically be slewed over the air-to-ground radar
designated point. From there, you can perform some
adjustments (see section 2.11.3.3 to designate a target with
the targeting pod).

TDC 22
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) 23
24

Approximative location of target

24
402
Target Designation Cross
 Steering Cue
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
SLAM Selected
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar
HORNET
F/A-18C

Designation Mode Selected

25. The target designation diamond, steering cues, range to target, SLAM indication, TMR • TOO: Target-of-Opportunity
indication (time required to be within range of a valid SLAM launch) and TOO indication will • PP: Pre-Planned
appear on the HUD.
• Note: Since the air-to-ground expanded modes’ effective range is much shorter
(30-40 nm) than the maximum range of a SLAM missile, it is possible that the TMR
indication is already set to IN RNG (In Range) once you designate the target.
26. Minimum and Maximum Launch Range circles will appear on the HSI (Horizontal Situation
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Indicator) page.
TMR (or IN RNG)
Target Designation Diamond Indication
Designated Target

TGT: Aircraft Distance to Target (nm)

SLAM Min Launch

Range Circle

Target Designation
Cross
SLAM Max Launch
Range Circle

You

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region)

403
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.3 – Target Designation – TOO / Air-to-Ground Radar
HORNET
F/A-18C

27. The coordinates and elevation of the designated target point will then directly transfer to the ORP (Offset Release Point) in the MSN page.
28. Press the OSB next to RETURN to return back to the SMS (Stores) page. We are now almost ready to begin our strike and launch the missile.
29. Please proceed to section 2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

27
Designated Target coordinates and elevation

28b

28a

404
 5
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP)
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press OSB next to MODE to toggle between TOO (Target-of-Opportunity) and PP (Pre-Planned) target designation modes. In this case, we
will choose PP.
2. Press OSB next to MSN to enter the Mission Parameters page.
3. We can define up to five Pre-Planned targets per missile station: PP1 through PP5. We will designate the target on PP1. Press OSB next to
another PP# to select it if you desire.
4. The TGT is the pre-planned target point (A/G TGT). For now, the field is empty since no target is defined yet.
5. (Optional) If you want to set TERM (Terminal Attack) parameters such as heading (HDG), attack angle (ANG) and velocity (VEL), press OSB
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

next to TGTUFC, then press OSB next to TERM on the UFC. You will be able to enter terminal parameters via the UFC. However, since we
will control the missile remotely during the terminal attack stage, these parameters are not required and we will leave them blank, 5
6. (Optional) We do not need O/S (Offset) parameters to the TGT since we will control the missile remotely during the terminal attack stage.
Therefore, we will not need to use O/S UFC function.

3 2b

Parameters for Station 8

4 6
2a
5

405
6
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. We can get target coordinates and elevation from the mission briefing or from
the F10 map. We will need this information in the Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds
format, which can be toggled by using « LALT+Y » while being in the F10 map..

Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TGT1 33 49 17.83 N 35 29 37.64 E 39

STA8 / PP1

Target

406
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM 9
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP)
HORNET
F/A-18C

8. Crossed-out PP Points mean no valid coordinates are entered yet.

9. Make sure PP1 is selected to input Target 1 coordinates
10. Select TGT UFC
11. On the UFC, select ELEV (Elevation)
12. Select FT (« : » will appear when selected), then enter Target 1 altitude on the scratchpad (39),
then press the ENT (Enter) button.
13. Return to main UFC menu by pressing the TGT UFC button twice. 10
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

13

11

12b
12a
Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)

TGT1 33 49 17.83 N 35 29 37.64 E 39

STA8 / PP1
12c 407
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP)
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. On the UFC, select POSN (Position) « : » will appear once selected.
15. We will add the coordinates of Target 1 (PP1)
14
33 °49’17.83’’ North 35 °29’37.64’’ East
16. On the UFC, select LAT (Latitude). « : » will appear once selected. 22
17. Press « 2 » (N) to select North coordinates, type « 334917 », then « ENT »
to enter Degrees Minutes Seconds.
18. Wait for the UFC screen to reset, then type « 83 », then « ENT » to enter
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

remaining Decimal-Seconds.
19. On the UFC, select LON (Longitude). « : » will appear once selected.
20. On the UFC, press « 6 » (E) to select East coordinates, type « 352937 », 17a 18a
then « ENT » to enter Degrees Minutes Seconds.
21. Wait for the UFC screen to reset, then type « 64 », then « ENT » to enter
remaining Decimal-Seconds.
22. Return to main UFC menu by pressing the TGT UFC button twice. 16

Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
17b
TGT1 33 49 17.83 N 35 29 37.64 E 39 18b
STA8 / PP1

20a 21a

19

408
20b 21b
 Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP) Target Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
HORNET
F/A-18C

23. Once Longitude, Latitude and Elevation coordinates are entered for PP1, the PP1 icon will be boxed and no TGT1 33 49 17.83 N 35 29 37.64 E 39
longer crossed out. STA8 / PP1
24. The coordinates and elevation of the designated target point will then directly transfer to the TGT in the MSN
page.
25. Press the OSB next to RETURN to return back to the SMS (Stores) page. We are now almost ready to begin our
strike and launch the missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

23

Station 8

Target 1

25b

25a

409
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.3.4 – Target Designation – Pre-Planned (PP)
HORNET
F/A-18C

26. The SLAM indication, TMR indication (time required to be within range of a valid SLAM launch) and PP indication will appear on the HUD.
27. Minimum and Maximum Launch Range circles will appear on the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) page.
28. Please proceed to section 2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Pre-Planned Target

SLAM Min Launch

Range Circle Designation Mode Selected
• TOO: Target-of-Opportunity
• PP: Pre-Planned
SLAM Selected

SLAM Max Launch

Range Circle

You

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region) TMR Indication

410
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
Target Designation Diamond Steering Cue
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Make sure the SMS (Stores) page and HSI (Horizontal Situation SLAM Selected
Indicator) pages are both visible. I recommend setting SMS on the
left DDI and HSI on the right DDI.
2. Verify the selected SLAM missile’s status is RDY (ready), Master Designation Mode Selected
Arm is ON and the correct release profile is set. • TOO: Target-of-Opportunity
3. TTS indicates the Time-to-Seeker (time until the SLAM seeker • PP: Pre-Planned
head becomes active and can be controlled by the pilot via the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TDC and the datalink pod), in seconds. 4

4. TMR indicates the time required to be within range of a valid
SLAM launch (max range circle), in seconds.
5. Fly the aircraft towards the target designated (diamond on the
HUD or designation circle on HSI). TGT: Aircraft Distance to Target (nm)

Designated Target
4

3
SLAM Min Launch
Range Circle

SLAM Max Launch

Range Circle

2
You

LAR (Launch Acceptable Region) 411

 Steering Cue
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control Target Designation Diamond
HORNET
F/A-18C

6. Once the IN RNG (In Range) cue is visible on the Heads-Up Display and SMS
(Stores) page, you may launch the missile. However, we will do a few
verifications prior to missile launch.

In Range Cue
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Planned Missile Trajectory

You

SLAM Max Launch

Range Circle

412
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. On the SMS (Stores) page, press OSB next to SLAM to unbox it.
8. With « DL13 » only being boxed, the screen will switch to Datalink SLAM seeker head
video. Take note that no feed is yet available since the « TTS » (Time-To-Seeker » has
9a Sensor Control Switch
not yet reached 0, which means that we have not yet reached the DIST parameter
(Distance from target until seeker head activation) set previously. AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
9. Set Sensor Control Switch to the SLAM DL13 Feed DDI (Sensor Control Switch LEFT
since we showed up the DL13 feed on the left DDI). A diamond will appear to show the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

left DDI is selected.

10. The SLAM missile installed on Station 8 is currently selected. We need to verify that the 10 Station 8 Selected
Datalink pod channel corresponds to this specific station. We need to make sure that
the Datalink pod is set to Channel 008, which is the channel required for Station 8. (As 9b
an example, you would need a Datalink Pod channel of 002 for Station 2). 7 Focus Diamond
11. Press on the OSB next to UFC (Up-Front Control).
12. Press on the UFC button next to CHNL. « : » indicates Channel can be edited.
13. Enter « 8 » on the UFC scratchpad, then press ENT button to set Datalink pod to
Channel 8 (Station 8). Your SLAM and Datalink Channel should now match. DL13 Datalink
14. Press on the OSB next to UFC again to deselect UFC menu. Video Page

12

11 14

8
13a No Feed

13b

13c Datalink Channel 008

413
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
HORNET
F/A-18C

15. Press and hold the Weapon Release button

(« RALT+SPACE ») to launch SLAM missile.
16. Once SLAM is launched, the missile will fly to
the cruise altitude (FLT parameter).
17. The missile will eventually enter a dive and go
into the Low Altitude Penetration Stage
18. When the missile is close enough to the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

target, it will steer directly to the target’s area

and enter Terminal Attack Stage.

Datalink Pod sends remote

Weapon Release Button steering commands to the SLAM
15

414
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
HORNET
F/A-18C

19. When missile TTS (Time-to-Seeker) reaches zero, this means that the missile has reached the DIST range parameter (distance from target), which is 15 nm. Datalink feed will then display a clear
picture and the seeker head becomes « Uncaged ».
20. At this stage, you may not want to steer the missile needlessly yet until the missile goes into the Terminal Attack Stage (starts diving on the target designated previously).
21. Toggle field-of-view (FOV) as desired using the OSB next to FOV.
22. As a general rule, it is recommended to not fly in the same direction of the missile. If you are flying away from the missile (as in: you did a 180-deg turn to fly in opposite direction to the missile’s
trajectory), turn on the A ANT (Aft Antenna) option (boxed = on). This will turn the datalink antenna aft (facing the missile) and maintain communication between the missile and the aircraft to
allow remote control. Since we are not flying away from the target in this example, we will leave the A ANT option OFF.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

19b
TTS = 0
Feed is Live, Seeker Head Uncaged & Active

19a
TTS = 172 sec
22
No Feed, Seeker Head Caged & Inactive

21

415
 Throttle Designator Controller
2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM 24
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control

HORNET
F/A-18C

23. Once SLAM starts its Terminal Attack (dives on the target), you will have to control the missile remotely to adjust its trajectory to strike the target.
24. To modify the SLAM’s trajectory, hold the TDC Depress button while slewing the TDC with the TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT controls.
25. Slew the missile crosshair on the target using the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller).
26. Once the missile crosshair is lined up on the target, release the TDC Depress button. The missile will then keep flying until it impacts the center of the reticle.
27. You will lose TV feed once the missile impacts the target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

26

Missile Reticle Missile Reticle

(On Target)

416
 2.11 – AGM-84E SLAM Target
2.11.4 – Weapon Launch & Control
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

417
 Note: Walleyes can only be mounted on Stations 2 and 8 (BOMBS category).
2.12.1 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(No Datalink Pod) 2
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: This procedure shows you how to use the Walleye 1

without the datalink pod. The missile will operate like an AGM-
65 Infrared Maverick in a “fire & forget” manner.

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

2. Master Mode – A/G
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page

4. Click on the OSB next to WEDL to select it. The crossed-out
WEDL indication means weapon employment is inhibited.
5. Click on the OSB next to WEDL a second time to display the
Walleye TV feed. DDIs will display a green-scaled screen,
while the AMPCD will display a grey-scaled screen.

4a 5a

5b

4b

418
 2.12.1 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(No Datalink Pod) 9b
HORNET
F/A-18C

7b

6. Set Fuzing to either INST (Instantaneous), or DLY (Delayed Fuze).

7. Set Sensor Control Switch to the Walleye Feed DDI (Sensor Control
6
Switch LEFT since we showed up the WEDL feed on the left DDI). A
diamond will appear to show the left DDI is selected.
8. By default, the Walleye is Caged. When the seeker is caged, it will
always point forward at its boresight.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9. Press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the Walleye. When

uncaged, the bomb will attempt to lock onto a contrasting target
Walleye Crosshair
within the seeker center.

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

7a Target

MAP - The Missile Axis Position square indicates the

position of the seeker head relative to the missile STEP selects a Walleye
boresight. This allows for a visualization of where the from another station
seeker is looking relative to the aircraft boresight when
the bomb is on the aircraft.

Caging Retention and Boresight (CRAB)

Cage/Uncage Button Pressing and holding this option cages the seeker.

9a

419
 2.12.1 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(No Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

10. Hold the TDC Depress button while slewing the Walleye to the target. When you release the TDC Depress button, the bomb will attempt to lock its target. The Walleye can
be used from a range of 20 nm, but is most likely going to acquire a good lock from a distance of less than 10 miles.
11. When lock is acquired by Walleye:
• WE crossed-out indication will disappear from the HUD
• WEDL crossed-out indication will disappear from the Walleye Feed.
• RDY will be displayed next to the selected station.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

12. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch Walleye.

11
Weapon Release Button

11

12 11

10 Throttle Designator Controller

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

Walleye Crosshair
11 Walleye Crosshair
(On Target)

420
 2.12.1 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(No Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

This propeller acts as a generator, which powers the Walleye control surfaces and datalink.

Target

421
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

This procedure shows you how to use the Walleye with the AWW-13 Datalink pod. Once launched, the Walleye can be remote-controlled manually by the pilot.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Walleye
Walleye
(Station 8)
AWW-13 Datalink Pod (Station 2)

422
Note: Walleyes can only be mounted on Stations 2 and 8 (BOMBS category).
 7a
2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod) 2
HORNET
F/A-18C

5b
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 1
2. Master Mode – A/G
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page
4. Click on the OSB next to WEDL to select it. The crossed-out WEDL indication
means weapon employment is inhibited.
5. Click on the OSB next to DL13 to turn on the Datalink Pod and display the 6
Walleye TV feed. DDIs will display a green-scaled screen, while the AMPCD
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

will display a grey-scaled screen.

6. Click on the OSB next to WPN (weapon). This informs the data link pod that 10
it is to be paired with a data link capable weapon. Available data link
weapons will now be listed as options for pushbuttons 1 to 4. Walleye
(WEDL) will appear on pushbutton 5.
7. Click on the OSB next to WEDL to pair the Walleye and data link pod. If
6
successful, WEDL will appear below DL13.
8. Station 8 is currently selected, while Datalink pod is set to Channel 002 7b
(Station 2). This mismatch can be seen by the lack of seeker feed. We need
9
to match the station and channel. 11a
9. Press on the OSB next to UFC (Up-Front Control).
10. Press on the UFC button next to CHNL. « : » indicates Channel can be edited.
11. Enter « 8 » on the UFC scratchpad, then press ENT button to set Datalink
pod to Channel 8 (Station 8). Your Walleye and Datalink Channel should now 8 – No Feed
11b
match.
12. Press on the OSB next to UFC again to deselect UFC menu.
5a

4a 12

11c – Video feed is live

423
4b
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod) 14b 16b
HORNET
F/A-18C

13. Set Fuzing to either INST (Instantaneous), or DLY (Delayed Fuze).

14. Set Sensor Control Switch to the Walleye Feed DDI (Sensor Control Switch
AFT since we showed up the WEDL feed on the lower AMPCD). A diamond 13
will appear to show the central AMPCD is selected.
15. By default, the Walleye is Caged. When the seeker is caged, it will always
point forward at its boresight.
16. Press the Cage/Uncage Button to uncage the Walleye. When uncaged, the
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

bomb will attempt to lock onto a contrasting target within the seeker center.
Walleye Crosshair

Target
Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

14a

MAP - The Missile Axis Position square indicates the

Cage/Uncage Button position of the seeker head relative to the missile
boresight. This allows for a visualization of where the
16a seeker is looking relative to the aircraft boresight when
the bomb is on the aircraft. 424
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod) 19
HORNET
F/A-18C

17. Hold the TDC Depress button while slewing the Walleye to the target. When you release the TDC
Depress button, the bomb will attempt to lock its target. The Walleye can be used from a range of 20
nm, but is most likely going to acquire a good lock from a distance of less than 10 miles. I would advise
Walleye Crosshair
you to maintain sufficient airspeed and an altitude of at least 20000 ft; when remote-controlled, the (Near Target)
Walleye can easily run out of altitude before reaching its target.
18. Note: the Walleye does not need a lock to be launched when using the Datalink pod, however it is
recommended to have a lock prior to launching in order to make your life easier and minimize
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

corrections.
19. When lock is acquired by Walleye, verify that:
• WE crossed-out indication disappeared from the HUD
• WEDL crossed-out indication disappeared from the Walleye Feed.
• RDY is displayed next to the selected station.
20. Hold the Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch Walleye.

Walleye Crosshair
17 Throttle Designator Controller 19
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
20 Weapon Release Button

425
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

21. Once Walleye is launched, the Datalink pod allows you to control the missile
remotely. « WEDL » indication under DL13 indicates that the Walleye is
launched and the feed is directly from the Walleye TV.
22. To modify the Walleye’s trajectory, hold the TDC Depress button while
slewing the TDC with the TDC AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT controls.
23. Try to keep the missile crosshair and MAP lined up on the target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Walleye Crosshair
(On Target)

22 Throttle Designator Controller

21 MAP - The Missile Axis Position square indicates the AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
position of the seeker head relative to the missile
boresight. This allows for a visualization of where the
seeker is looking relative to the aircraft boresight when
the bomb is on the aircraft.

426
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

24. When the MAP and Walleye crosshair are overlapped, MAP square disappears. This means the missile is heading where the 24
seeker is looking.
25. Avoid overcontrolling the bomb since the bomb is heavy, draggy and loses energy very rapidly. You may run out of altitude
before the bomb hits the target.
26. You will lose TV feed once the bomb impacts the target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

26

427
 2.12.2 – AGM-62 Walleye II
(With Datalink Pod)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Redkite gives valuable tips in his video on Walleyes:

https://youtu.be/NsySaTNvprE

I would advise you to set a waypoint near the target area In Range
and designate it in order to have a better idea of the
range to target and the time to launch. Walleye Selected
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TGT: Distance to
Target (nm)

Waypoint Designated
TIMR: Time to Launch
as Target (TGT)
(sec)

TGT: Distance to
Target (nm) 428
 3.1.1 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-AIR)
Gun rounds
(FUNNEL / NO RADAR TRACKING) remaining
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)

2. Radar switch – OFF
3. Weapon Select Switch – A/A GUNS, or « LSHIFT+X »
4. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A
5. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page and select
Gun Rounds Options (MK-50 or PGU-28 rounds) 4
6. Set Gun Firing Rate Option (HI = 6000 rounds per minute, 5
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

LO = 4000 rounds per minute)

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
2
• AFT: Select Gun
3 • PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
• RIGHT: Select Amraam
• LEFT: No Function 429
 3.1.1 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-AIR)
(FUNNEL / NO RADAR TRACKING)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Fly to place either the 1000 ft Range Cue dot or the 2000 ft Range
Cue dot over the target. Once the 1000 ft (or 2000 ft) Range Cue dot
is on the aircraft and its wingspan fits inside the Gun Funnel, you are
now in range.
8. Squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar »)
8
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Gun Cross
1000 ft Range Cue

Gun Funnel

2000 ft Range
cue

Gun Selected & Armed

8 Gun rounds
remaining

430
 3.1.2 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-AIR) Gun rounds
remaining
(RADAR TRACKING)
HORNET
F/A-18C

4
5
1. Radar Switch - OPERATE
2. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
3. Weapon Select Switch – A/A GUNS (AFT), or « LSHIFT+X »
4. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A
5. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page and select 2
Gun Rounds Options (MK-50 or PGU-28 rounds)
6. Set Gun Firing Rate Option (HI = 6000 rounds per minute,
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

LO = 4000 rounds per minute)

7. When A/A GUNS is selected and radar is operating, the
radar automatically switches to the ACM (Air Combat
Maneuvering) GACQ (Guns Auto Acquisition) mode
1

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
ACM Mode

Weapon Select Switch

7 • FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder 3
GACQ Mode • RIGHT: Select Amraam 431
Scan Area • LEFT: No Function
 3.1.2 - M61A2 GUNS (AIR-TO-AIR)
(RADAR TRACKING)
HORNET
F/A-18C

8. Fly to place target in dashed circle on the HUD to lock it on

radar when at 5 nm or closer. When target is flying through
this scan zone, it is automatically locked on to in STT (Single
Target Track) mode
9. Fly to place the dot in the center of the gun reticle over the
target and squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar ») when you
see the SHOOT cue on the HUD.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

8
TD (Target Designator) Box
Diamond = Hostile / Square = Friendly

Target Locator Line

SHOOT Cue

1G Foresight Cue

Center of Gun Reticle

VC (Closure Speed in kts)

Gun Reticle

Target Range (ft)

Gun Selected & Armed

Gun Rounds
Remaining
432
9
 3.2.1 - AIM-9M SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (NO RADAR)
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Set IR COOL switch to NORM. Infrared seeker in the AIM-9 nose must be cooled down to
increase sensitivity and reduce background noise. There is enough coolant for 3 hours.
2. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
3. Radar switch – OFF 3
4. Weapon Select Switch – SIDEWINDER, or « LSHIFT+S » 6 CAGE/UNCAGE Button
5. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A
6. Press and hold the Cage/Uncage switch to uncage the Sidewinder (« C » by default).
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Once uncaged, the Sidewinder should be actively looking for a lock on the closest heat
signature. As you uncage the Sidewinder, you should hear a low growl tone when the
missile seeker is searching.

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
5
1

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder 2
• RIGHT: Select Amraam
4 • LEFT: No Function 433
 3.2.1 - AIM-9M SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (NO RADAR)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Fly to place the target inside the Sidewinder

seeker circle until a high-pitched audio sound
confirms that the missile’s seeker has
acquired a solid lock.
8. Squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar ») to
launch missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

CAGE/UNCAGE Button

Sidewinder caged 7 Sidewinder uncaged

6

Target Target

Sidewinder seeker circle

Sidewinder seeker circle

Low-Pitch Growl is heard

Number of High-Pitch Tone is heard

Sidewinder missiles available 434
selected & armed
 3.2.2 - AIM-9M SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (RADAR) CAGE/UNCAGE Button
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Set IR COOL switch to NORM. Infrared seeker in the

AIM-9 nose must be cooled down to increase
3
sensitivity and reduce background noise. There is
enough coolant for 3 hours.
2. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
3. Radar Switch - OPERATE 6b
4. Weapon Select Switch – SIDEWINDER (DOWN), or 6
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

« LSHIFT+S »
5. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A
6. When SIDEWINDER is selected and radar is operating,
press the Sensor Control Switch FWD to select ACM
(Air Combat Maneuvering) radar mode

Sensor Control Switch 5

6a AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun 2
4 • PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
• RIGHT: Select Amraam 435
• LEFT: No Function
 8b TD (Target Designator) Box
7
3.2.2 - AIM-9M SIDEWINDER Diamond = Hostile
Square = Friendly
Target Aspect Line
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (RADAR) (Target going away from us)
HORNET
F/A-18C

7. Select ACM sub-mode using the Sensor Select switch Sidewinder seeker circle
again. We will select BST sub-mode.
a) BST (Boresight), Sensor Select FWD
b) VACQ (Vertical Acquisition), Sensor Select AFT
c) WACQ (Wide Acquisition), Sensor Select LEFT VC (Closure
8. Fly to place target in dashed circle on the HUD to lock it Speed in kts)
ASE/NIRD
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

on radar when at 5 nm or closer. When target is flying Boresight reticle

through this scan zone, it is automatically locked on to
in STT (Single Target Track) mode 8a
9. Press and hold the Cage/Uncage switch (« C » by 9a
default) to uncage the Sidewinder.
10. Fly to place the Steering Dot inside the ASE/NIRD
(Allowable Steering Error / Normalized In-Range Number of Target Range (nm)
Display) Circle and squeeze the gun trigger Sidewinder missiles available
(« Spacebar ») when you see the SHOOT cue over the selected & armed
High-Pitch tone is heard
TD (Target Designation) box on the HUD to launch
missile.
Note: You can unlock a target by pressing the Undesignate 10
Low-Pitch Growl is heard
Button (« S »)
ASE/NIRD
Steering dot
Target Range

SHOOT Cue

Sensor Control Switch 7

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT
9c
6 CAGE/UNCAGE Button Radar Lock Cue
Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button 9b
SHOOT Cue
436
 3.2.2 - AIM-9M SIDEWINDER Target Aspect
Pointing Up = Target moving away from you (cold)
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (RADAR) Pointing Down = Target moving towards you (hot)
HORNET
F/A-18C

RAERO
Maximum Aerodynamic Range of Missile
RMIN
Minimum Missile Launch Range
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Target Range
Optimum missile firing range is
slightly below RNE (No Escape),
ensuring you fire from as far as
possible while guaranteeing a
missile hit.

RMAX RNE
Maximum Launch Range of Missile Missile No Escape Range

10 437
 Elevation Angle (deg)
3.3 - AIM-9X SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (JHMCS) AIM-9X Seeker Circle
HORNET
F/A-18C

6
The HMD (Helmet-Mounted Display) and JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System) allow the pilot to
project the Heads-Up Display in his field of vision at all times. It also allows the slaving of sensors and weapons
to the helmet’s line of sight. In the Hornet, the JHMCS is very useful for using missiles like the AIM-9X, an
upgraded version of the AIM-9 with TVC (Thrust Vectoring Control) allowing 80 deg off-boresight shots.
DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue)
1. Set IR COOL switch to NORM. Infrared seeker in the AIM-9 nose must be cooled down to increase sensitivity
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

and reduce background noise. There is enough coolant for 3 hours.

2. Set HMD switch to BRT (Fully Right) to power up the JHMCS (Joint Helmet Cueing System)
3. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
4. Weapon Select Switch – SIDEWINDER, or « LSHIFT+S »
5. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A
Number of
6. Move your head/helmet and try to place the DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue) and AIM-9X Seeker Circle on the AIM-9X Sidewinder missiles available
nearest target. selected & armed

Sensor Control Switch

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

5
1

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder 3
• RIGHT: Select Amraam 438
4 • LEFT: No Function
 7a
Target
3.3 - AIM-9X SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (JHMCS)
HORNET
F/A-18C

AIM-9X Seeker Circle

7. When DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue) and Sidewinder Seeker Circle are placed on a target, (Missile Caged)
press and hold the Cage/Uncage switch to uncage the Sidewinder (« C » by default). Once
uncaged, the Sidewinder should be actively looking for a lock on the closest heat signature.
8. Once the Sidewinder is uncaged and has locked a heat signature, the Seeker Circle will
become smaller and a high-pitched audio sound confirms that the missile’s seeker has
acquired a solid lock. DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue)
9. Squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar ») to launch missile.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

9
Target DAC (Dynamic Aiming Cue)

Sidewinder Seeker Circle

(Missile Uncaged & Locked)

7b CAGE/UNCAGE Button

439
High-Pitch Tone is heard
 3.3 - AIM-9X SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (JHMCS)
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

440
 3.3 - AIM-9X SIDEWINDER
AIR-TO-AIR IR MISSILE (JHMCS)
HORNET
F/A-18C

AIM-9X Sounds:

• Static: Seeker is searching.

• Double Beep: Seeker has been moved past 27.5° off boresight while searching.
• Repeating Beep: Seeker sees infrared contrast, but not enough to reliably track (i.e.
the seeker is too far from the source).
• Steady Tone: Seeker sees an infrared contrasting target.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

• Steady High Pitch Tone: Seeker is uncaged.

• Steady Higher Pitch Tone: Seeker is uncaged and is more than 27.5° off boresight.

Wags’ AIM-9X Tutorial: https://youtu.be/vLPkVOR5JY4

AIM-9X Tones: https://youtu.be/QV4GStRN5UU

441
 12 9b TDC is active on Right DDI
3.4 - AIM-7M SPARROW
AIR-TO-AIR SARH MISSILE (RADAR) 9b 10
HORNET
F/A-18C

RWS (Range While Search)

1. Radar Switch – OPERATE
2. Set RDR ATTK page on the right DDI and the SMS page on the left Radar Contact
DDI (Digital Display Indicator) by pressing the MENU OSB, then
selecting TAC or SUPT page, then choosing which menu to display Radar Contact
on which DDI. 1
3. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) Radar Contact
4. Weapon Select Switch – SPARROW, or « LSHIFT+W »
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A TDC

6. On SMS (Stores Management System) page, set your desired
target size (SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE). 7b
7. Press OSB next to MODE to select missile mode. NORM is a
normal launch, LOFT is to make the missile fly a higher trajectory
to face less dense air and thus increase energy during hitting the
target, and HELO is specifically use for helicopters. In our case,
we will use NORM. 11
8. If you have different types of Sparrows loaded, select desired
Sparrow type on the SMS page.
9. When SPARROW is selected, radar is operating, press the Sensor
Select Switch RIGHT to select BVR/RWS (Beyond Visual
6
Range/Range While Search) radar mode and slave the TDC 7a
(Throttle Designation Controller) to the radar screen.
10. Set desired radar range scale (40 nm in our case) Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT 9a
11. Set desired radar azimuth range (140 deg in our case)
12. Set desired radar bar mode (4 or 2 bars are generally used)

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder
5 • RIGHT: Select Amraam 4
8 • LEFT: No Function

Undesignate / Nosewheel
3
Steering Button 442
 Antenna Elevation
3.4 - AIM-7M SPARROW TD (Target Designator) Box
Diamond = Hostile
AIR-TO-AIR SARH MISSILE (RADAR) 13 Square = Friendly
HORNET
F/A-18C

SHOOT Cue
13. Control your antenna elevation to make sure the radar scans the Radar Contact
desired area.
14. Move the TDC over the target using the TDC controls.
15. Lock target by using the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »).
16. Fly to place target in ASE circle on the HUD to lock it on radar.
14 TDC ASE/NIRD
When target is flying through this scan zone, it is automatically
locked on to in STT (Single Target Track) mode
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

17. Fly to place the Steering Dot inside the ASE/NIRD (Allowable
Steering Error / Normalized In-Range Display) Circle and VC (Closure
squeeze the gun trigger (« Spacebar ») when you see the SHOOT Speed in kts)
cue over the TD (Target Designation) box on the HUD to launch
missile.
Steering dot
• Note 1: You can unlock a target by pressing the Undesignate
Button
• Note 2: You can also use ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) radar Target Aspect Line
modes to lock a target, as shown in the AIM-9 Sidewinder (Target going towards us)
tutorial.
15
Target Range
Target Range (nm)

Number of
missiles available
Sparrow selected
17
& armed

Target Closure Speed (kts) Radar Lock Cue

SHOOT Cue
Radar Contact Locked
CAGE/UNCAGE Button 14
Target Altitude Differential

TDC 443
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) Antenna Elevation
 3.4 - AIM-7M SPARROW
AIR-TO-AIR SARH MISSILE (RADAR)
HORNET
F/A-18C

When a radar lock is acquired, air-to-air mode is selected and a Sparrow is selected, the SMS (Stores) page displays useful information.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

ALT (Right): Barometric Altitude of Target

RNG: Range to target (meters)
TAS: True Airspeed of your aircraft (kts)
VC: Closure Speed (kts)
ASPCT (Right): Angle between your velocity vector and the target.
V: Target Speed (Mach) Positive values = above target, negative values = below target.

ALT (Left): Altitude difference between your ROLL R/L: Your aircraft’s Roll Angle (deg)
aircraft and target

ASPCT (left): Aspect of target inrelation ship to you TOF: Missile Expected Time-of-Flight to Target
(180 = going towards you)
RMIN: Minimum Launch Range of Missile (nm)

RMAX: Maximum Launch Range of Missile (nm)

Missile Beam (fps)

RNE: Missile No Escape Range (nm)

444
 Target Range
3.4 - AIM-7M SPARROW Optimum missile firing range is
slightly below RNE (No Escape), RMIN
AIR-TO-AIR SARH MISSILE (RADAR) ensuring you fire from as far as Minimum Missile
HORNET
possible while guaranteeing a Launch Range
F/A-18C

missile hit.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

TTG: Missile Time to

17 Target (sec)

(Arrow) Target Aspect

Pointing Up = Target moving away from you (cold) RNE
Pointing Down = Target moving towards you (hot) Missile No Escape Range

(Diamond) RAERO
Maximum Aerodynamic Range of Missile

(Triangle) RMAX
Maximum Launch
Range of Missile

445
 12
3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM 9b TDC is active on Right DDI

AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE 9b 10

HORNET
F/A-18C

RWS (Range While Search)

1. Radar Switch – OPERATE
2. Set RDR ATTK page on the right DDI and the SMS page on the left
DDI (Digital Display Indicator) by pressing the MENU OSB, then
selecting TAC or SUPT page, then choosing which menu to display
Radar Contact
on which DDI. TDC
3. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
4. Weapon Select Switch – Right/AMRAAM, or « LSHIFT+D »
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

5. Master Mode switch will be automatically set to A/A

6. On SMS (Stores Management System) page, set your expected
target size (SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE).
7. Set expected target RCS (Radar Cross-Section) on the SMS page
(SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE).
8. If you have different types of AMRAAMS loaded, select desired
AMRAAM station by pressing the Weapon Select Switch – 1
Right/AMRAAM, or « LSHIFT+D ». A « SEL » symbol will be near 11
the selected station. AIM-120Cs are shown as « AC » while AIM-
120Bs are shown as « AB ». 7
9. When AMRAAM is selected, radar is operating, press the Sensor
Select Switch RIGHT to select BVR/RWS (Beyond Visual
6
Range/Range While Search) radar mode and slave the TDC
(Throttle Designation Controller) to the radar screen.
10. Set desired radar range scale (40 nm in our case) Sensor Control Switch
AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT 9a
11. Set desired radar azimuth range (140 deg in our case)
12. Set desired radar bar mode (4 or 2 bars are generally used)

Weapon Select Switch

• FWD: Select Sparrow
• AFT: Select Gun
• PRESS DOWN: Select Sidewinder 4
5 • RIGHT: Select Amraam
8 • LEFT: No Function

Undesignate / Nosewheel
3 Steering Button 446
 3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM
AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: When AMRAAM is selected and there is no radar lock yet, a large dashed circle will appear on the HUD. This circle is the seeker field of view if launched with no radar lock, which is termed a
Mad Dog Launch. A Mad Dog Launch will lock on to intercept the first target the missile seeker detects within the dashed circle area out to 10 miles.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Mad Dog Launch Field-of-View Circle TDC

Radar Contact
(No Radar Lock)

AIM-120B selected & armed

VISUAL Indication means there is no radar

lock and if launched now, the missile will be
Number of
launched in Maddog mode.
missiles available

447
 3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM Target Aspect Line
Radar Contact TD (Target Designator) Box
AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
13 (Target going away from us) Diamond = Hostile
HORNET
F/A-18C

Square = Friendly
SHOOT Cue
13. Control your antenna elevation to make sure the radar scans the
desired area.
14. Move the TDC over the target using the TDC controls.
15. Lock target by using the TDC DEPRESS control (« ENTER »). VC (Closure
16. Fly to place target in ASE circle on the HUD to lock it on radar. 14 TDC Speed in kts)
When target is flying through this scan zone, it is automatically ASE/NIRD
locked on to in STT (Single Target Track) mode
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

17. Fly to place the Steering Dot inside the ASE/NIRD (Allowable Antenna Elevation
Steering Error / Normalized In-Range Display) Circle and squeeze
the gun trigger (« Spacebar ») when you see the SHOOT cue over
the TD (Target Designation) box on the HUD to launch missile.
• Note 1: You can unlock a target by pressing the Undesignate Button
Steering dot
• Note 2: You can also use ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) radar
modes to lock a target, as shown in the AIM-9 Sidewinder tutorial.

Radar Lock Cue

Target Range
SHOOT Cue Target Range (nm)

Number of
15
missiles available
AMRAAM
17
selected & armed

Radar Contact Locked

CAGE/UNCAGE Button 14

TDC 448
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress) Antenna Elevation 17
 3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM
AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
HORNET
F/A-18C

When a radar lock is acquired, air-to-air mode is selected and an AMRAAM is selected, the SMS (Stores) page displays useful information.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

RNG: Range to target (meters)

ALT (Right): Barometric Altitude of Target
VC: Closure Speed (kts)

V: Target Speed (Mach)

ALT (Left): Altitude difference between your TAS: True Airspeed of your aircraft (kts)
aircraft and target
ASPCT (Right): Angle between your velocity vector and the target.
ASPCT (left): Aspect of target inrelation ship to you Positive values = above target, negative values = below target.
(180 = going towards you)
ROLL R/L: Your aircraft’s Roll Angle (deg)

RMAX: Maximum Launch Range of Missile (nm)

RMIN: Minimum Launch Range
of Missile (nm)

RNE: Missile No Escape Range (nm)

449
 3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM
AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Missile has not been fired yet

(Arrow) Target Aspect

Pointing Up = Target moving away from you (cold)
Pointing Down = Target moving towards you (hot)
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

RMIN
Minimum Missile
Launch Range

Missile has been fired, Range of seeker is less than 10 nm

ACT (Time to Active) for
next missile not launched
RNE
Missile No Escape Range

Target Range (nm)

(Triangle) RMAX
Maximum Launch Visual Representation of
Range of Missile Missile

TTG: Missile Time to

Target (sec)
ACT: Time to Active (sec)
Target Range Time from launch to the time missile
Optimum missile firing range is slightly below RNE will go active. It displays before and
450
(No Escape), ensuring you fire from as far as during launch until the missile goes Probability of Missile
possible while guaranteeing a missile hit. active Impact (from 1 to 18) 450
 3.5 - AIM-120B AMRAAM
AIR-TO-AIR ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: When you first fire an AMRAAM missile, the missile is initially guided by your own radar. However, an « active radar homing missile » also has his own radar inside the seeker head. The moment
the missile goes « active » (meaning it will start self-homing/tracking targets on his own instead of using your aircraft’s radar) is called « Pitbull ». When the missile goes « Pitbull », the missile truly
becomes fire-and-forget. NATO brevity word “Pitbull" would be called out on the radio to inform other pilots, just as "Fox Three" would be called out upon launch.
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

Missile Launched but Not Active

Missile Launched and Active (Seeker Head Tracking on its own)

Aircraft
Missile goes Target
Active (Pitbull)

451
 4 - SELECTIVE ORDNANCE JETTISON
Emergency Jettison
HORNET
2 Button
F/A-18C

1. Set Master Arm Switch – ON

2. Consult SMS (Stores Management System) page’s
wingform to see what is loaded on what pylon
3. Select store you want to jettison (Left Inner, Right
3
Inner, Left Outer, Right Outer, Center) using the LI, RI,
LO, RO, CTR pushbuttons
1
4. Rotate the Selective Jettison knob to desired release
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

mode (we will use RACK/LCHR).

• L FUS MSL and R FUS MSL are used to jettison
AIM-7 or AIM-120 missiles attached to the
fuselage
• RACK/LCHR drops the weapon and its
launcher rack
• STORES drops the weapon but not its
attachment rack
5. Press and hold the red JETT (Jettison) button to
jettison ordnance.
6. Return Selective Jettison knob back to SAFE

5
452
HORNET
5 – VIDEO TUTORIALS
2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
F/A-18C

3 – Air-to-Air Weapons
2.1.1 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82 – CCIP)
3.1,1 – M61A2 Guns (Funnel / No Radar Tracking)
https://youtu.be/JrMDXwaSHzE
https://youtu.be/jPe4k_Zo0MM
2.1.2 – Unguided Bomb (MK-82 – CCRP/AUTO)
3.1.2 – M61A2 Guns (Radar Tracking)
https://youtu.be/JrMDXwaSHzE
https://youtu.be/jPe4k_Zo0MM
2.3 – Rockets
3.2.1 – AIM-9M (No Radar)
https://youtu.be/R1BTgGYij5o
https://youtu.be/em9Kr31nPJE
PART 10 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT

2.4 – M61A2 Guns (Air-to-Ground)

3.2.2 – AIM-9M (Radar)
https://youtu.be/R1BTgGYij5o
https://youtu.be/em9Kr31nPJE
2.5.1 – GBU-38 JDAM (Pre-Planned)
3.3 – AIM-9X (JHMCS)
https://youtu.be/UZ4uoT0sPK4
https://youtu.be/ceUtluGFFLM
2.5.2 – GBU-38 JDAM (TOO + Targeting Pod)
3.4 – AIM-7M (Radar)
https://youtu.be/HWdnLlyeEBs
https://youtu.be/3SKP0uFdI2M
2.5.3 – AGM-154A JSOW (TOO)
3.5 – AIM-120B (Radar)
https://youtu.be/YAhISGnrjtk
https://youtu.be/MJOQfylt6nE
2.6 – GBU-12 Paveway II (Laser-Guided)
https://youtu.be/urGAhuxmaEk
2.7.1 – AGM-65F/G Maverick (IR-MAVF)
https://youtu.be/cqIHsxfXsVM
2.8 – AGM-65E MAVERICK (Laser-Guided MAV)
https://youtu.be/uW7EO1VlGdw
2.9.1 – AGM-88C HARM (TOO)
https://youtu.be/2yS4eKuVjVw
2.9.2 – AGM-88C HARM (SP)
https://youtu.be/bf6EH9gRxlw
2.10.1 – AGM-84D Harpoon (BOL)
https://youtu.be/xoJLCxEzexk
2.10.2 – AGM-84D Harpoon (RB/L)
https://youtu.be/oDBPUkm2NYY
2.12 – AGM-62 Walleye II
https://youtu.be/NsySaTNvprE
453
 F/A-18C
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES HORNET

454
HORNET
INTRODUCTION
Countermeasures are very simple to use. You have three countermeasure types at your disposal: flares, chaff and an ECM (Electronic Countermeasure) jammer. We will explore together what is used
F/A-18C

against what, and how.

Missiles can generally track you using 2 things: radar signature (radar waves are sent on you and you reflect them, which is called a “radar signature”) and heat signature (like the exhaust of your engines).
Countermeasures will only be effective against the kind of weapon it was meant to counter; a heat-seeking missile will not care if you deploy electronic countermeasures against it since it tracks heat, not
radar signatures. This is why it is important to know what is attacking you in order to counter it properly. This is what the RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) is for: to help you know what is firing at you so you
can take the adequate action to counter it.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Flares are used against missiles that track heat (infrared or IR)
signatures. Instead of going for the heat signature generated by your Chaff
engines, a missile will go for a hotter heat source like flares.

Chaff is a form of “passive” jamming. Passive (reflected) jamming is

when a deceptive object or device reflects radar waves. Chaff is
simply a bundle of small pieces of metal foil with reflective coating,
which creates clusters of radar signatures that prevent a radar to get
a solid lock on the aircraft itself.

The AN/ALQ-165 Airborne Self Protection Jammer (ASPJ) is the

onboard Electronic Countermeasure (ECM) system. It is a form of
“continuous” jamming, also called “active” or “transmitted” jamming.
This device transmits its own synchronized radar waves back at your
enemy’s radar receiver to simulate erroneous radar wave returns.
Simply put, active jamming will try to drown a radar in white noise.

In order to use these three forms of countermeasures, you can use

“countermeasure programs”, routines that will deploy a number of
flares/chaff for a number of cycles at a given interval.

Flare 455
HORNET
F/A-18C
COUNTERMEASURES CONTROL SETUP

DISPENSE SWITCH (AFT)

(Grey button on RHS)
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Dispense Switch
AFT – OFF - FWD

My Setup
Setup in real aircraft

456
 AN/ALR-67 RWR
(RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

The RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) will tell if you are being searched or
locked by radar. Just press the RWR ON button below the AMPCD and set up
your EW (Early Warning) page on either DDI and you will have a top-down
view of your aircraft.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

The annunciator threat lights will tell you which type of

threat is locking you. CW is for continuous wave
emissions, AI is for Air Intercept, SAM is for surface-to-
air-missiles, and AAA is for anti-aircraft artillery radar.
DISP is for when the ALE-47 countermeasure dispenser
system has a program ready for the detected threat and Annunciator
is waiting for start consent. In addition, a DISPENSE cue Threat Lights
will be displayed on the HUD.

The EW (Early Warning) page and Azimuth Display will

locate the radar emitters’ heading but not their range.
Instead, their spacing from the center of the RWR circle
refers to the lethality of the threat. The inner band
(critical) is generally missiles in flight. The middle band
(lethal) is for radars actively tracking you. The outer band
is classified as non-lethal since these are radars searching RWR EW Page
for you, not actively tracking you.

If an indication is illuminated, it means the radar emitter

has a solid lock on you. Tones also indicate what’s
happening (new contact, radar lock warning, missile
launch, etc.) The faster the tone frequency, the greater RWR BIT (Built-In Test) Button RWR Power Switch
the danger.

DISPLAY limits display to

RWR Azimuth Display OFFSET can be seen as a the 6 greatest threats
RWR de-clutter function
457
 OFFSET can be seen as a
AN/ALR-67 RWR RWR de-clutter function
(RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

If too many contacts start overlapping each other, you can use the “OFFSET” function, which will spread out enemy contacts. This can be
quite useful when using HARMs in order to select a specific radar emitter. Keep in mind that when the OFFSET function is used, you will
no longer have any directional information on the emitters, so you will need to set the OFFSET mode to OFF.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Note: The (very loud) volume of the RWR

tones can be controlled on the Audio
Panel.

RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

Volume Control Knob

458
 AN/ALR-67 RWR
(RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Source: Eagle Dynamics Early Access Manual (as of 10/06/2018). Remember

that the RWR is currently a work-in-progress and its logic may be subject to
change. This guide will be updated accordingly if such changes are made.

Accompanying the RWR are various audio feedback tones:

PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

• Single Beep: A new ground- or sea-based emitter has been detected.

• Double Beep: A new airborne emitter has been detected.
• Repeating Beep: An emitter is tracking.
• Faster Repeating Beep: An emitter is guiding a missile or is a missile.
Area Character Meaning
I N NORMAL
I AI (Airborne Intercept)
A AAA (Anti-Air Artillery)
U UNKNOWN
F FRIENDLY
II (BLANK) FULL DISPLAY
L LIMITED DISPLAY
III (BLANK) NO FAILURE
B BIT (Built-In Test) FAILURE
T THERMAL OVERLOAD
O OFFSET DISPLAY

459
 AN/ALR-67 RWR
(RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: “U” symbol stands for “Unknown”, which is sometimes

attributed to ships. House Symbol means it
is a Ground Emitter
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Lower Bar means a Lower Arc means an

Naval Emitter Emitter is locking you

List made by .408-X~RAY 460

 AN/ALR-67 RWR
HUD & JHMCS Display
HORNET
F/A-18C

The RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) can also be displayed on the Heads-Up Display.

RWR symbols are also visible on the JHMCS (Joint Helmet-Mounted Cueing System).
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

HUD RWR Symbols

JHMCS RWR Symbols

HUD Option in the EW page will show the

RWR emitters on the Heads-Up Display

461
 AN/ALR-67 RWR
ANNUNCIATOR THREAT LIGHTS
HORNET
F/A-18C

Annunciator Threat Lights

DISP: Countermeasure dispense
program is active
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

AI: Airborne Intercept (AI) SAM: Surface-to-Air Missile tracking

Radar locked to aircraft radar locked to aircraft. Light is solid
when radar is tracking and flashing
when guiding a missile.
CW: Aircraft illuminated by AAA: Anti-Aircraft Artillery (AAA) fire
Continuous Wave (CW) radar control radar is locked to aircraft.
Steady light for all radar directed AAA
except ZSU-23-4, in which the light will
flash at 3 Hz.

Annunciator
Threat Lights

462
 5
COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
AN/ALE-47 ACMDS (AIRBORNE COUNTERMEASURES DISPENSER SYSTEM)
HORNET
F/A-18C

COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAM & USAGE TUTORIAL Chaff & Flare

Count GEN X Count
1. Set Master Arm Switch – ON
2. In the TAC menu, select the EW (Early Warning) page
3. Set DISPENSER switch – ON (MIDDLE)
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

4. Once aircraft is in the air, ALE-47 status will perform a series of built-in
tests by going to SF TEST (Self-Test), then PBIT GO, then to STBY.
5. Once ALE-47 status is set to STBY, click on the OSB above ALE-47 to
select the countermeasure dispenser. ALE-47 will be boxed in green.
6. Click the OSB next to MODE to select desired dispenser mode (MAN1
(Manual), S/A (Semi-Automatic), AUTO, STBY). We will choose MAN1.
3

4a

4b

1 1 4c
6 463
 COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
AN/ALE-47 ACMDS (AIRBORNE COUNTERMEASURES DISPENSER SYSTEM)
HORNET
F/A-18C

COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAM & USAGE TUTORIAL

7. To create a countermeasure program:
a) Press the OSB next to ARM
b) Configure Chaff by pressing the OSB next to CHAF, then use
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

7b
the Increment/Decrement OSBs to set the desired number
c) Configure Flares by pressing the OSB next to FLAR, then use
the Increment/Decrement OSBs to set the desired number
d) Configure the number of repetitions by pressing the OSB next
to RPT, then use the Increment/Decrement OSBs to set the
desired number 7c
e) Configure the interval time (sec) by pressing the OSB next to
INT, then use the Increment/Decrement OSBs to set the
desired number Increment/Decrement OSBs
f) Press the OSB next to SAVE to save countermeasure program 1

7a

7d

7e

You can set different programs by clicking

STEP to cycle through different programs

7f

464
 COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
AN/ALE-47 ACMDS (AIRBORNE COUNTERMEASURES DISPENSER SYSTEM)
HORNET
F/A-18C

COUNTERMEASURE PROGRAM & USAGE TUTORIAL Countermeasure Modes

8. To dispense countermeasures using Program 1, press the Dispense Switch – AFT • MAN: manual program that can be stored and edited. You choose
button (key binding: D). what the program is.
Note: the Dispense Switch – FWD button will use Program 5 by default. You can modify • AUTO: the ALE-47 chooses for you when to deploy countermeasures
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

which program is used by either AFT or FWD Dispense by clicking on the STEP OSB. and what to use. Very wasteful mode, but reduces pilot workload.
• S/A: Semi-Automatic. ALE-47 will choose the best countermeasure
program for you in response to the current threats, but you will have
control on when the countermeasures are dispensed.
• STBY: Standby Mode

Program 1
Program 1 Program 5

Dispense Switch 8
AFT – OFF - FWD

465
 COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
AN/ALE-47 ACMDS (AIRBORNE COUNTERMEASURES DISPENSER SYSTEM)
HORNET
F/A-18C

COUNTERMEASURE DISPENSERS
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Chaff & Flare Dispenser Cartridges

466
 AN/ALQ-165 ASPJ
(AIRBORNE SELF PROTECTION JAMMER)
HORNET
F/A-18C

The ALQ-165 Airborne Self Protection Jammer (ASPJ) is the onboard Electronic Countermeasure (ECM) system. The ALQ-
165 detects and deceives threat pulse fire control and guidance RADARs and has four operating modes: standby, receive,
transmit, and built in test. This ECM system detects, processes, and transmits a simulated target echo for deception when
a RADAR signal is received. The simulated echoes are recognized by the enemy RADAR as true target returns. Tracking
RADAR then tracks a false target and breaks lock from the true target. Threat RADAR indications are indicated as both
indicators lights and the RADAR Warning Receiver.
PART 11 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES

Note: the ASPJ is not yet implemented in Early Access. This section will be updated once it is available.

ICMCP (Integrated Countermeasures Control Panel)

467
HORNET
F/A-18C
DATALINK & IFF INTRODUCTION
One of the biggest challenges of integrated modern warfare is the identification of contacts. As various information donors like friendly fighters, ground radar stations, AWACS
(Airborne Warning and Control System, like an E-3 Sentry or an E-2 Hawkeye), and ships interrogate unknown contacts with IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) systems, this information
needs to be relayed to everyone within a given Network. This is where Datalink comes in; with Link 16 Datalink, military aircraft as well as ships and ground forces may exchange
their tactical picture in near-real time. Link 16 also supports the exchange of text messages, imagery data and provides two channels of digital voice (2.4 kbit/s and/or 16 kbit/s in
any combination).

Multifunctional Information Distribution System (MIDS) is the NATO name for the communication component of Link-16. MID is an advanced command, control,
communications, computing and intelligence (C4I) system incorporating high-capacity, jam-resistant, digital communication links for exchange of near real-time tactical
information, including both data and voice, among air, ground, and sea elements. MIDS is intended to support key theater functions such as surveillance, identification, air
control, weapons engagement coordination and direction for all Services.

HOSTILES
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

UNKNOWN

FRIENDLIES

468
HORNET
F/A-18C
TYPICAL IFF SETUP
A typical setup that favors good situational awareness and ease of access to information is as follows:
• EW (Early Warning) Page on either DDI
• RDR ATTK (Radar Attack) Page on either DDI
• SA (Situational Awareness) Page on either DDI or on the AMPCD
• RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) output repeated on HUD
Operation of the IFF System is done with the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) and the Sensor Control Switch.

TDC
Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress
Allows you to radar lock targets
HUD (Heads-Up Display)
Displays RWR output and Radar Lock
RDR ATTK Page
Used to find and interrogate targets

EW (Early Warning) Page Sensor Control Switch

PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

Used to recognize radar emitters AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

and information donors (i.e. AWACS)
Allows you to select which display to use when using the TDC.

Sensor Control Switch DEPRESS will interrogate the target.

RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)

Used to recognize radar emitters

SA (Situational Awareness) Page

Shows you HAFU (Hostile, Ambiguous, Friendly,
& Unknown) symbology
469
 E-3 AWACS using radar
SENSORS INTEGRATED VIEW
Bullseye
HORNET
F/A-18C

The F/A-18’s sensors are integrated (Waypoint 2)

wonderfully. Here is an example of all the
information you can find by consulting the
HUD, EW page, SA page and RDR ATTK page.
(Waypoint 1

Two MiG-29s are using their radar

Oliver Hazzard Perry
Class Ship using radar

Hostile Contact spotted on your Two MiG-29s are using their radar
radar, pointing to your left
Hostile Contact spotted on your Two MiG-29s are using their radar
radar, pointing to your left Unknown Contact spotted
E-3 AWACS using radar Two MiG-29s are using their radar
on your radar, pointing
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

towards you

Friendly Fighter Contact,

Friendly Surveillance (E-3
Information Donor
AWACS), Information Donor
Bullseye

Unknown Contact spotted

on your radar, pointing
towards you

Bullseye Friendly Surveillance (E-3 Friendly Fighter Contact,

AWACS), Information Donor Information Donor

Oliver Hazzard Perry

Class Ship using radar

Friendly Fighter Contact,

Friendly Fighter Contact, Information Donor
Two MiG-29s are using their radar
Information Donor 470
 Moving Map

HORNET
F/A-18C
SA (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS) PAGE Show/Hide Declutter Function Scale Selector
De-Center Function

The Situational Awareness (SA) TDC’s Bearing (251) and Range

(25.3 nm) from Bullseye
format provides a top-down view of Bearing & Range to
Selected Waypoint
the area around the airplane. It (Waypoint 1)
displays trackfiles from all sources for
the best possible situational
awareness of airborne threats and
allies. All trackfiles on the SA format SENSOR Sub-Page MiG-29 RWR Signatures
are displayed as Hostile, Ambiguous,
Friendly, or Unknown (HAFU)
symbols. TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)
Unknown Contact
1.3: Mach speed of contact selected by TDC
The SA format additionally allows for 8: Altitude of contact selected by TDC (x1000 ft) Waypoint 2
(Bullseye – A/A)
offboard trackfile sources to be
selectively filtered for all formats Hostile Contact
(Waypoint 1
displaying tracks and provides the (Selected)
ability to manually classify the HAFU Friendly Fighter Contact,
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

identification of trackfiles. Information Donor

The page also shows some Your Position

symbology and provides access to
Friendly Surveillance (E-3
some functions identical to those AWACS), Information Donor
found on the HSI format; this
excludes non-waypoint steering
options and cues, the north up
TDC Target Info
display option, and the aircraft • MG29: NCTR Identification (MiG-29)
heading line. PLID Function • 810/153: Target Ground Speed & Heading
• BRA 305/30: Bearing, Range & Altitude
from You. Target is at your 305, 30 nm out
• BE 252/22: Target bearing and range from
Bullseye. Target is at the bullseye’s 252, 22
C: Chaff Count
nm out
F: Flares Count
01: GEN X 1 Count
02: GEN X 2 Count EXPAND Function STEP Function Target Designator (TXDSG)
Function 471
HORNET
F/A-18C
SA (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS) PAGE

SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Symbol

(SA-11)
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

SAM (Surface-to-Air Missile) Site Threat Zone

• This ring is set by the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) via the
Mission Editor. This is an indicator of the SAM radar range and
this region should be avoided if possible.
• If SAM site is destroyed, the Threat Ring will remain displayed.
It does not update dynamically with the SAM site itself, it is
merely a visual marker set prior to the mission according to
currently available intelligence on deployment of enemy forces.

472
 Declutter Function
SA (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS) PAGE REJ1: Removes compass rose, ground track diamond, and SAM range rings.
REJ2: Removes REJ1 items and the waypoint/TGT data block.
FUNCTIONS MREJ1: Hides all SAM indications.
HORNET
F/A-18C

MREJ2: Not yet implemented.

• MAP: Toggles Moving Map
• DCLTR: De-Clutters SA page
• DCNTR: De-Centers SA page
• EXP: Expand Mode (Not Yet Implemented)
• STEP: "STEP" function replaces the TDC cursor with a rectangular box, always centered around a trackfile. Around the trackfile
selected is its Mach number to the left and altitude in thousands of feet. The option "steps" the STEP box through all non-
friendly trackfiles based on rank. If the TDC cursor is over a trackfile, the STEP box will first step to that track; if not, it will select
the highest ranked trackfile. Moving the TDC will bring back the cursor, which will appear where the STEP box was last.
• TXDSG: (Not Yet Implemented)
• PLID: Pilot Identification option displays whenever the TDC cursor is over a trackfile or the STEP box exists. This allows for
manual hostile, friendly, or unknown status designation of a trackfile which is not from a PPLI (Precise Participant Location and
Identification) donor. De-Center Function Moving Map
Show/Hide
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

STEP Function

TXDSG Function 473

EXPAND Function
 SA (SITUATIONAL AWARENESS) PAGE
SENSORS SUB-PAGE
HORNET
F/A-18C

The SENSR (Sensor) SA Sub-Page controls what sensors

contribute to the displays throughout the aircraft. Selecting
SA returns to the main format.

SENSOR Sub-Page
• LINK4: Toggles trackfile information being displayed from LINK-4 Datalink
• FLTR: Not Yet Implemented
• HARM: Not Yet Implemented
• IFF: Not Yet Implemented
• RWR: Toggles display of the four most priority air-to-air RWR bearings, shown in
yellow as a triangle with the emitter identifier. This affects the SA format itself and
also the RDR ATTK with MSI enabled. This always displays hostiles and unknowns, but
will also display friendly bearings based on the FRIEND setting. Unboxed will show no
RWR bearings, "ALL" will show all, "CRIT LETH" will show only critical and lethal
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

bearings, and "CRIT" will only show critical bearings.

• FRIEND: Toggles display of friendly air-to-air RWR bearings for the SA and RDR ATTK
format. "OFF" shows none. "NO ID" shows friendly RWR bearings but without the
emitter type in the triangle. "RWR ID" shows friendly RWR bearings with both the
triangle and emitter type. Note that only the priority four emitters are displayed, so
friendly emitters will not always be displayed even with the option enabled.
• UNK: Toggles display of unknown HAFU trackfiles.
• OCS1/OCS2: Not Yet Implemented
• F/F: Toggles trackfile information being displayed from fighter-fighter (F/F) donors.
• PPLI: Toggles trackfile information being displayed from Precise Participant Location
and Identification (PPLI) donors.
• SURV: Toggles trackfile information being displayed from surveillance (SURV) donors.

474
 Trackfile Azimuth Upper Part: This is what you have
HORNET
F/A-18C
HAFU SYMBOLOGY identified.

This symbol shows an Unknown Target

that has not been interrogated by either
Hostile, Ambiguous, Friendly or Unknown (HAFU) is a symbology system used by the
yourself or any other information donor
F/A-18 to represent trackfiles; specifically, to show its status as a friendly or hostile. It
(i.e. AWACS).
is usually what trackfiles are displayed as across the software.

Here are four HAFU symbols:

• Triangle: Hostile (red when colored)

• Thick Staple: Ambiguous (yellow when colored)
• Half-Circle: Friendly (green when colored)
• Thin Staple: Unknown (yellow when colored)

A hostile HAFU will be assigned whenever:

A negative IFF response is returned, and
• An NCTR print returns with an aircraft type that is on the hostile coalition;
or
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

• A SURV (surveillance, like an AWACS) source over datalink also marks it

Lower Part: This is what information donors
hostile; or have identified.
• A F/F (fighter-to-fighter, like another F/A-18) source over datalink also
marks it hostile. This symbol shows an Unknown Target that
you have not interrogated yet, but that has
An ambiguous HAFU will be assigned when the aircraft and a donor have conflicting been interrogated and confirmed hostile by
identifications (friendly and hostile). another information donor (i.e. AWACS).

A friendly HAFU will be assigned whenever an IFF interrogation returns as friendly or

Lower Part: This is what information donors
the track itself is contributed to by the Precise Participant Location and Identification
have identified.
(PPLI) system.
This symbol shows an Unknown Target that
An unknown HAFU will be assigned by default until it is updated by meeting one of you have not interrogated yet, but that has
the requirements above. been interrogated and confirmed friendly by
another information donor (i.e. AWACS).
A number is assigned on the HAFU symbol to show the level of criticality (1 being the 475
most critical).
 HAFU SYMBOLOGY
F/A-18C HORNET LINK 16 SA PAGE SYMBOLOGY & HAFU
HORNET
F/A-18C

A C2 HAFU represents a Command

The Precise Participant Location and Identification and Control Aircraft (AWACS, E3A
(PPLI) system broadcasts to other aircraft on Sentry, E2C Hawkeye, etc.), which is a
datalink positional information about the PPLI friendly information donor.
donor itself. The dot on the side means it is a
friendly fighter-to-fighter information donor.

You have acquired this track

(onboard trackfile), but no other
information donor has given you
information about it.

You have acquired this track and

another information donor has given
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

you information (offboard trackfile)

about it as well. This means this
information is correlated/coherent
between an onboard (you) and an
offboard information source.

This information comes from a

friendly fighter donor (F/F: Fighter-
to-Fighter) on the same datalink
network, however you have not
acquired this track yourself. This is an
offboard trackfile. This vector line represents the
direction of the trackfile/contact.

This information comes from a

surveillance donor (like an AWACS or a
ship) on the same datalink network.
This is an offboard trackfile.

476
 MANUAL IFF TUTORIAL
The IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) and Datalink systems need to be ON when wanting to identify radar contacts. Remember:
HORNET
F/A-18C

• NCTR: Non-Cooperative Target Recognition is done from the RDR ATTK (Radar Attack) page. Mode 4 Transponder operation is done when interrogating a contact.

1. Power Up IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system by pressing the IFF Button, then holding the ON button on the UFC for a few seconds. When « ON » is displayed, the IFF has
been powered up correctly.
2. Power Up Datalink system by pressing the D/L Button, then holding the ON button on the UFC for a few seconds. When « ON » is displayed, the Datalink has been
powered up correctly.
3. On UFC, set desired Datalink Frequency by entering it on the scratchpad, then pressing « ENT ». 127 is used by default, you can keep it.

1c 2c 3
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

1b 2b
1a 2a 477
HORNET
F/A-18C
MANUAL IFF TUTORIAL – NCTR
4. Make sure your Radar Power switch is set to
OPR.
5. Set Sensor Control Switch to the RDR ATTK
DDI (Sensor Control Switch Right since we
showed up the RDR ATTK on the right DDI). A
diamond will appear to show the right DDI is 7
selected.
4
6. Press the OSB next to NCTR (Non-Cooperative TDC
Target Recognition) activate (boxed) Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress
7. Move the TDC over the target using the TDC 5a 8
controls. Sensor Control Switch
8. Interrogate target by using the Sensor Control AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
If you radar lock a target after
Switch DEPRESS control. You can radar lock having interrogated it, you will get
your target by pressing TDC DEPRESS. additional information like closure
speed (Vc) in kts and range (nm).

5b
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

7b 8
Contact
Contact

TDC
TDC over contact, TDC not depressed
yet. Contact flies at Mach 0.7 at 6500 ft
7a

TDC’s Bearing (314) and Range TDC over contact, TDC depressed, contact interrogated but
(27.1 nm) from You still unknown.
8
6 TD Box: Contact interrogated but
still unknown (Square).

478
 Square: Radar Locked Target,

HORNET
F/A-18C
MANUAL IFF TUTORIAL – NCTR Identified as Friendly or Unknown by
yourself alone

9. In NCTR Mode, targets that are farther than 25 nm may remain

UNKNOWN or AMBIGUOUS. To get a proper identification, make Square with Half Circle: Radar Locked
sure you are within 25 nm. Target, Identified as Friendly by
yourself and another Link-16 Datalink
10. After a few seconds, the trackfile should turn to either HOSTILE, Donor
FRIENDLY or AMBIGUOUS HAFU symbols. See HAFU legend.
11. You can set your Sensor Control Switch to the SA Page (Sensor
Control Switch Down since we showed up the SA Page on the Lower Diamond: Radar Locked Target,
AMPCD). A diamond will appear to show the AMPCD is selected. Identified as Hostile by yourself alone
Then, you can move the TDC over a contact and gain additional
information from it.
Diamond with Caret: Radar Locked
TDC’s Bearing (224) and Range TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Target, Identified as Hostile by
10
(18.6 nm) from Bullseye 0.8: Mach speed of contact selected by TDC yourself and another Link-16 Datalink
6: Altitude of contact selected by TDC (x1000 ft) Donor
Contact interrogated and confirmed hostile
AMPCD Sensor Selected

11
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

Bearing & Range to

Selected Waypoint
(Waypoint 1)

Waypoint 2
(Bullseye – A/A)

(Waypoint 1
(Selected)
Hostile Contact
10
TDC Target Info
• UKN: NCTR Identification (Unknown aircraft TD Box: Contact interrogated and
type) confirmed hostile (Diamond).
• 544/131: Target Ground Speed & Heading
• BRA 311/5: Bearing, Range & Altitude from
You. Target is at your 311, 5 nm out
• BE 225/18: Target bearing and range from
Bullseye. Target is at the bullseye’s 225, 18
nm out
Your Position SA Page
479
 Waypoint 2
HORNET
F/A-18C
MANUAL IFF TUTORIAL – EXAMPLES (Bullseye – A/A)

Note: When hovering the TDC on a friendly target, the TDC Target Info differs slightly. See notes
in red and green.
TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)
0.9: Mach speed of contact selected by TDC
1: Altitude of contact selected by TDC (x1000 ft)

TDC’s Bearing (240) and Range Bearing & Range to

(12.2 nm) from Bullseye Selected Waypoint
(Waypoint 1)
Hostile Contact

(Waypoint 1
(Selected)

Waypoint 2
(Bullseye – A/A)

(Waypoint 1
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

(Selected)
TDC (Throttle Designator Controller)
0.6: Mach speed of contact selected by TDC
6: Altitude of contact selected by TDC (x1000 ft)

Your Position

TDC Target Info

• FA18: NCTR Identification (F/A-18 Hornet)
Friendly Contact • 0111/10.7: Friendly Contact Callsign &
Range
TDC Target Info • BRA 332/12: Bearing, Range & Altitude
• MG29: NCTR Identification (MiG-29) Your Position
from You. Target is at your 332, 12 nm out
• 593/024: Target Ground Speed & Heading • BE 232/12: Target bearing and range from
• BRA 333/14: Bearing, Range & Altitude Bullseye. Target is at the bullseye’s 232, 12
from You. Target is at your 333, 14 nm out nm out
• BE 244/11: Target bearing and range from
Bullseye. Target is at the bullseye’s 244, 11
nm out 480
HORNET
PLID (PILOT IDENTIFICATION)
The Pilot Identification (PLID) is a nice function to the Situational Awareness
F/A-18C

(SA) page that you can use if you want to manually set the top half of a HAFU
(your identification) for a non-PPLI (Precise Participant Location and
Identification) donors contact on the SA page. The top half of the HAFU can be
manually set to friendly, hostile, or unknown.

1. Open SA page
2. Set your Sensor Control Switch to the SA Page (Sensor Control Switch Down
since we showed up the SA Page on the Lower AMPCD). A diamond will
2a
appear to show the AMPCD is selected.
3. Move the TDC over a contact and gain additional information from it. Sensor Control Switch 5
4. Press the OSB next to PLID AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS
5. Select which HAFU type you want to set (i.e. HOS for HOSTILE).
6. The HAFU symbol will change accordingly.
2b
1
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

3b

3a
4
TDC
(Left/Right/Up/Down/Depress)
481
HORNET
F/A-18C
A/A WAYPOINTS & BULLSEYE
A “Bullseye” is a fictional point in space used as a reference to locate yourself, friendly contacts and enemy contacts. If you know where the bullseye is and the enemy
doesn’t, it gives you a way to communicate positions without the enemy knowing where to look from. Your wingmen and AWACS will often refer to “bulls” or “bullseye” on
the radio. A bullseye call, used to communicate your position, is done in the following format:
• Bearing from bullseye
• Range from bullseye
• Altitude

Bullseye Explanation by JediLinks: https://youtu.be/vgcXcfeGb2M

Bullseye (Waypoint 2)

Bullseye, 17 nm
Bearing 180 from
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

Hornet 411

Hornet 421
482
 TDC
HORNET
A/A WAYPOINTS & BULLSEYE
In order to gain trackfile information that uses
F/A-18C

Bullseye (Waypoint 2)
Bullseye as a reference on your SA page, you
need to select an existing waypoint and
designate it as an “A/A” (Air-to-Air) Waypoint.
TDC’s Bearing (284) and Range
1. Open HSI page (15.7 nm) from Bullseye
TDC Target Info
2. Select DATA sub-menu • BE 276/17: Target bearing and range from
3. If we want to set Waypoint 2 as our Bullseye, Your Position Bullseye. Target is at the bullseye’s 276, 17 nm out
select Waypoint 2 using the WYPT arrows.
4. Press the OSB next to “A/A WP” to set
Waypoint 2 as an A/A Bullseye Waypoint. Bullseye (Waypoint 2)
5. You should now see the Bullseye (circle with
an arrow pointing North) on your SA page
and see a “BE” section in your TDC Target SA Page 5
Info.

1
PART 12 – DATALINK & IFF

4
Your Position
483
HSI Page HSI Page
HORNET
ARC-210 RADIO - INTRO
The ARC-210 radio provides transmission and reception of amplitude
F/A-18C

and frequency modulated (AM & FM) on frequencies ranging from 30

MHz to 399.975 MHz.

The Hornet has two radios installed: COMM1 and COMM2. They are
independent and have 20 preset channels each. The preset COMM1 & COMM2
frequencies are set in the mission editor. Preset Frequencies

You can control the radio through the Up-Front Control (UFC).
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

UFC: Up Front Control

COMMS Switch
UP = Selects COMM 1
DOWN = Selects COMM 2 484
 UFC: Up Front Control Radio Frequency Display OSB 1 through 5
HORNET
ARC-210 RADIO - UFC
To turn on radios, rotate the VOL knobs of COMM1 and COMM 2.
F/A-18C

To change preset frequency, rotate the COMM1 or COMM2

Channel selector knobs.

To set radio options, press the OSB (Option Select Buttons) to

toggle parameters for each option.

To transmit to either COMM1 or COMM2, use the “COMM AFT:

Select COMM2” and the “COMM FWD: Select COMM1” bindings.

Option Select Button (OSB) 1

GRCV: Guard Receive

Option Select Button (OSB) 2 COMM1 Volume Knob

Toggles Squelch. “:” means
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

Squelch is active.

Option Select Button (OSB) 3

Toggles cipher modes: PLN
(plain), CIPH (cipher) and DLY COMM2 Volume Knob
(delay). Not simulated.

Option Select Button (OSB) 4

Selects AM or FM Frequency band. “:AM” means AM COMM1 Channel Selector COMM2 Channel Selector
Frequency is selected, while “:FM” means FM
Frequency is selected. This option is only visible when COMM1 Preset Channel Selected COMM2 Preset Channel Selected
the frequency selected is within the FM/AM bands as • M: Manual • M: Manual
shown on the previous page. • 1 through 20: Preset Channel • 1 through 20: Preset Channel
• G: Guard (243.000) • G: Guard (243.000)
Option Select Button (OSB) 5 • C: Cue Channel for Single Channel Ground • C: Cue Channel for Single Channel Ground
Menu Button and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS)
• S: Maritime (Sea) • S: Maritime (Sea) 485
HORNET
ARC-210 RADIO - UFC
To set a radio frequency manually on an
F/A-18C

4b
existing preset frequency:

1. Left click on the COMM1 knob to 3

pull it and select COMM1 Radio
2. Scroll mousewheel on COMM1
Radio Channel Selector to M
(Manual) Mode
3. Press the OSB next to AM or FM to 2
2 4a
select the desired frequency band 1
(if we choose FM, the “:FM”
symbol will appear when selected)
4. Press CLR on the UFC to clear
current frequency
5. Type “127500” on the UFC to set
carrier radio frequency 127.5 MHz
PART 13 – RADIO TUTORIAL

6. Press ENT on the UFC to enter this

frequency.
7. Press the COMM switch – COMM1
on your throttle to transmit.

5
COMMS Switch
7 UP = Selects COMM 1
DOWN = Selects COMM 2

6
486
HORNET
AFCS (AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)
The Hornet has a number of autopilot “relief modes” that assist the pilot in flying
F/A-18C

the aircraft. You can combine multiple autopilot modes together, in conjunction
with the ATC (Automatic Throttle Controller). If you want to steer the aircraft to a
particular heading while maintaining a certain speed and altitude, you could for
instance engage the AFCS “BALT” mode to maintain altitude, then set the “HSEL”
mode to steer your aircraft to the desired heading, then set the ATC to CRUISE
mode to maintain your current airspeed. Powerful stuff!

AUTOPILOT AFCS MODES

• ATTH: Attitude Hold. Aircraft will maintain the existing pitch and roll AFCS OVERVIEW
attitude in pitch and +/- 70 degrees in roll

• BALT: Barometric Altitude Hold. When engaged, aircraft will maintain

current heading and barometric altitude between 0 and 70000 ft

• HSEL: Heading Select. Aircraft will turn to and fly the heading as set on
the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator).
PART 14 – AUTOPILOT

• RALT: Radar Altitude Hold. Aircraft will maintain current heading and
radar altitude between 0 and 5000 ft

487
HORNET
AFCS (AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)
PROCEDURE
F/A-18C

2
1. Make sure your stick is centered, no force is applied on it and that you have an appropriate
deadzone (see CONTROLS SETUP - WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED section). Stick movement
automatically inhibits autopilot activation.
2. If you intend to use the HSEL (Heading Select) mode, set the desired heading with the HDG
switch above the AMPCD screen. Otherwise, disregard this step.
3. Press the A/P button on the UFC (Up-Front Controller) to display autopilot modes
4. Press on the OSB (Option Select Button) next to the desired autopilot mode:
• ATTH: Attitude Hold. Aircraft will maintain the existing pitch and roll attitude between
+/- degrees in pitch and +/- 70-degrees in roll
• BALT: Barometric Altitude Hold. When engaged, aircraft will maintain current heading
and barometric altitude between 0 and 70000 ft Heading
Select Bug
• HSEL: Heading Select. Aircraft will turn to and fly the heading as set on the HSI
(Horizontal Situation Indicator).
• RALT: Radar Altitude Hold. Aircraft will maintain current heading and radar altitude
between 0 and 5000 ft.
5. You can disengage autopilot by pressing the Paddle Switch on the control stick. HSEL: Heading Selected
PART 14 – AUTOPILOT

Paddle Switch
(Nosewheel steering 4
disengage, Autopilot
disengage & G-limiter
override switch)

3 488
 ATC CRUISE MODE
HORNET
F/A-18C
ATC (AUTOMATIC THROTTLE CONTROL)

The ATC (Automatic Throttle Control) system is a two-mode auto-throttle system that automatically
maintains angle of attack (approach mode) or airspeed (cruise mode) by modulating engine thrust in the
range of FLIGHT IDLE through MILITARY power.

When either mode is engaged, the ECS (Environment Control System) air to the torque boosters is shut off,
the throttles are initially backdriven, a stop is extended in the power lever control (PLC) to limit throttle
travel from flight idle to MIL, and an ATC advisory is displayed on the HUD.

If either mode does not engage when selected, or automatically disengages after engagement, the ATC
display flashes for 10 seconds and is then removed from the HUD. If a force of approximately 12 pounds
(with friction off) is applied to either throttle the system automatically disengages. This force is sufficient to
permit the hand to follow throttle movement without causing disengagement. Switching flap position also
disengages the system.
ATC Engaged Indication

ATC APPROACH MODE

PART 14 – AUTOPILOT

ATC Engage/Disengage Switch

ATC Engaged Indication

AoA Indexer Light 489

HORNET
F/A-18C
ATC (AUTOMATIC THROTTLE CONTROL)

ATC APPROACH MODE: ATC CRUISE MODE:

HOW TO ENGAGE HOW TO ENGAGE

Approach mode is engaged by pressing and releasing the ATC button (T) on Cruise mode is engaged by pressing and releasing the ATC button (T) on the
the left throttle with the FLAP switch in HALF or FULL and the trailing edge left throttle with the FLAP switch in AUTO.
flaps extended at least 72 deg.
WHAT IT DOES
WHAT IT DOES When ATC is engaged in the cruise mode, existing airspeed is used by the
When ATC is engaged in the approach mode, the flight control computer flight control computer to module engine thrust to maintain this existing
modulates engine thrust to maintain on-speed AoA (Angle of Attack). airspeed. Existing airspeed is the airspeed being sent from the ADC (Air Data
Computer uses inputs of AoA, normal load factor, stabilator position, pitch Computer) to the flight control computers via the mission computers.
rate and angle of bank to generate command signals. These signals drive the
throttle, which in turn commands engine fuel controls. Thrust will vary with HOW TO DISENGAGE
pilot induced pitch changes and banking manoeuvers provide additional Normal disengagement is accomplished by pressing the ATC button (T).
thrust to prevent the aircraft from falling out of the sky.

HOW TO DISENGAGE
Normal disengagement is accomplished by pressing the ATC button (T).
PART 14 – AUTOPILOT

ATC Approach Mode ATC Cruise Mode

Automatic Disengage Conditions Automatic Disengage Conditions

490
 NAVIGATION
SECTION STRUCTURE
SECTION STRUCTURE
•
HORNET

1 – Navigation Introduction
F/A-18C

• 2 – Moving Map – DMS (Digital Map Set)

• 3 – HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)
• 3.1 – HSI Main Page
• 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
• 3.2.1 – DATA A/C Tab
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

• 3.2.2 – DATA WYPT Tab

• 3.2.3 – DATA TCN Tab
• 3.2.4 – DATA MDATA Tab
• 4 – Navigation Point Types
• 5 – Waypoints
• 5.1 – Introduction
• 5.2 – Waypoint Navigation
• 5.3 – Manual vs Automatic Sequencing
• 5.4 – How to Add/Remove Waypoints
• 5.5 – How to Edit Waypoints
• 6 – Markpoints
• 6.1 – Markpoint Navigation
• 6.2 – How to Add Markpoints
• 6.3 – How to Use Markpoints
• 7 – ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) Navigation
• 8 – TACAN Navigation
• 9 – ICLS (Instrument Carrier Landing System) Tutorial / Case III Recovery
491
 1 – NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
Navigation in the F/A-18 is mostly done through the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator), which is a top-down view that displays your heading and navigation aids such as
HORNET
F/A-18C

TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) beacons and waypoints entered before flight in the mission editor.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

HUD (Heads-Up Display)

UFC (Up-front Control)

HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator)

SUPT (Support) Page

Moving Map (with HSI overlay)

492
HORNET
2 – MOVING MAP – DMS (DIGITAL MAP SET)
The Moving Map can only be seen on the AMPCD (Advanced Multi-Purpose Color Display). However, most of its functions will be covered in the “HSI“ section.
F/A-18C

HSI Modes Sub-Menu

Map Scale T-UP option selects the TRACK IS UP (up is aligned N-UP option selects the
(160/80/40/20/10/5) with the aircraft heading) map orientation NORTH IS UP map orientation
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

True Airspeed (kts)

Ground Speed (kts)

MAP: enables or DCTR option selects Map Decenter

disables Moving Map Aircraft Icon will be moved to the bottom of the
screen and HSI overlay will be hidden
HSI Mode Menu
Aircraft (top down view)
SLEW: Map Slew (not yet enabled)
493
HORNET
F/A-18C
3.1 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)
The HSI page is pretty much the most important tool at your disposal for navigation. Basically, it is a top-down view of your aircraft, flight plan and navigation aids. You can select it by
pressing twice on the MENU OSB (Option Select Button).
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

2
4

494
 DATA selects the Data display mode
3.1 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR) (information about tracked
aircraft/waypoint/TACAN)
HORNET
F/A-18C

HSI Scale Waypoint Data

Selects Mark Points
(160/80/40/20/10/5) Bearing (degrees) Distance (Nm)
(MK)
Time-to-Go to Waypoint (minutes:seconds)
Position Keeping Source Option
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Waypoint Selected
(Boxed)
TCN selects the TACAN
tracking mode

ILS selects the

Instrumented Landing
System tracking mode Ownship True
Waypoint Increment
Airspeed (kts)
HSI Mode Menu
• MAP: toggles the chart overlay. This is only visible on the
AMPCD.
• T UP: track up. The HSI will be oriented so that the aircraft's
track (horizontal velocity across the ground) is always Waypoint Selected
pointed up. However, technically the aircraft heading is (Waypoint 1)
always pointed directly up.
• N UP: north up. The HSI swill be oriented so that north is Waypoint Decrement
always up. Ground Speed (kts)
• DCTR: decenter. Places aircraft at the bottom of the HSI
instead of the center and places the track up. Aircraft (top down view) WPDSG: designates the
current waypoint as a
target waypoint (TGT)
VEC: Not Functional
SEQ#: when selected and boxed, all
waypoints of the sequence are displayed
ACL: Not Functional on the HSI and dashed lines connect them
in sequence

SENSORS: aerial targets detected

by the RADAR in range and AUTO: automatic sequence steering to the next waypoint is
azimuth are displayed on the HSI 495 method
enabled. WYPT must be selected as the navigation
TIMEUFC: Sets Clock Time
HORNET
F/A-18C
3.1 – HSI (HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR)

Compass Rose
Lubber Line (Aircraft Heading)
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Aircraft Symbol
Ground Track Pointer

Ownship True Airspeed (kts)

Ownship Ground Speed (kts)

Course Line
ADF (Automatic Direction
Finder) Symbol

Time Heading Select Marker

Selected Heading Selected Course (CSEL)

496
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.1 – DATA A/C Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

The DATA sublevel of the HSI provides numerous navigation-related options. It is split into multiple tabs, selectable at the top. Selecting "HSI" will return to the main format.
• The A/C tab on the DATA sublevel displays information regarding the aircraft itself and the inertial navigation system.

Accesses DATA Sub-Page Returns to HSI Page

PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

HSI Page HSI – DATA – A/C Page

497
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.1 – DATA A/C Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

Aircraft Positional Information Selected Position Source Returns to HSI Page

• Current aircraft latitude
• Current aircraft longitude
• Wind Speed (kts)
• Wind Direction
• Magnetic Variation at current aircraft location
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Not Simulated Not Simulated

Not Simulated
Magnetic / True North Selection
Selects between magnetic north and true
north as the heading source for the aircraft
Not Simulated

Not Simulated

Not Simulated
LATLN Coordinates Formatting Toggle
Changes latitude/longitude coordinate
presentation throughout HIS format.
• DCML: Degrees/decimal-minutes
• SEC: Degrees/minutes/seconds
Warning Altitudes
Selects radar and barometric warning, or “soft” altitudes.
Selecting either will allow for a value to be entered on the TAWS (Terrain Awareness System) Toggle
UFC. When either altitude is reached in a descent, GPS (Global Positioning System) Information Toggles TAWS verbal annunciations
“ALTITUDE, ALTITUDE” aural cue will be audible. • Horizontal Error
• Vertical Error 498
• ZULU Time according to GPS
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.2 – DATA WYPT Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

The DATA sublevel of the HSI provides numerous navigation-related options. It is split into multiple tabs, selectable at the top. Selecting "HSI" will return to the main format.
• The WYPT tab allows for detailed information about waypoints to be viewed and edited.

UFC (Up-Front Control) Returns to HSI Page

Brings up UFC options for the currently selected waypoint:
• POSN: Enter desired waypoint location, first the latitude and then the longitude. This is entered
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

in degrees/minutes/seconds or degrees/minutes, depending on the display setting in the A/C

tab. Without precise coordinate mode, they are entered with all six digits at once. In the precise
coordinate mode, the first four are entered, "ENTER" is pressed, and then the next four are
entered.
• ELEV: Enter waypoint elevation. Option is given to enter in feet or meters.
• GRID: Not yet implemented.
• O/S: Offset, Not yet implemented. Not Simulated

A/A Waypoint
Designates the currently selected waypoint as the air-to-air waypoint or "bullseye".
This is for communicating target locations and is used in other formats.

SEQUFC (Sequence Up-Front Control) Function

Brings up UFC options for the currently selected sequence.
• GSPD: enter the desired ground speed in knots to be en route to the designated target
waypoint (not to be confused with the waypoint designate/TGT function). This is used
in conjunction with TOT. For waypoints in the sequence before it, the required ground
speed will allow for the plane to be at this groundspeed en route to the target Not Simulated
waypoint.
• TGT: Designate a waypoint number to be the target waypoint for the TOT function. It
is important to note this operates entirely independently of the A/G Target.
• TOT: Designate a desired time on target in ZULU time in the format HH:MM:SS. The
HSI will then display a required groundspeed to reach the target at that time.
• INS: Insert waypoints to the currently selected sequence. To add one in between two
current ones, enter the preceding waypoint and then the in-between waypoint.
• DEL: Select a waypoint to delete from the sequence. Not Simulated
Not Simulated
PRECISE Coordinates
Toggles precise coordinate mode. When PRECISE is boxed,
Not Simulated
coordinates in the HSI format will show as 8 digits, other
wise they will show as 6 digits.
499
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.2 – DATA WYPT Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

Waypoint Position
Returns to HSI Page
• Current aircraft latitude
• Current aircraft longitude
• Grid
• Elevation
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Waypoint Offset
(Not Simulated)

Entered TOT (Time On Target)

Entered Ground Speed to Target (GSPD)

Waypoints In Sequence

500
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.3 – DATA TCN Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

The DATA sublevel of the HSI provides numerous navigation-related options. It is split into multiple tabs, selectable at the top. Selecting "HSI" will return to the main format.
• The TCN tab allows for information to be viewed about TACAN stations in the aircraft database.

Returns to HSI Page

TACAN Frequency
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

UFC (Up-Front Control) Function

Allows for the coordinates/elevation/magnetic variation Not Simulated
to be manually edited on the UFC

TACAN Database
Cycles TACANs in the database
Not Simulated

TACAN Station Information

• Latitude
• Longitude
• Elevation
• Magnetic Variation at TACAN

501
 3.2 – HSI DATA Sub-Page
3.2.4 – DATA MDATA Tab
HORNET
F/A-18C

Not Yet Implemented.

PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

502
HORNET
F/A-18C
4 – NAVIGATION POINT TYPES
These are the available Navigation Point types used in the Hornet:

• Steerpoints / Waypoints
• Steerpoints (or Waypoints) are pre-planned navigational points of reference for you
to follow on route to your area of operation. You can create new ones, edit their A/A Waypoint
coordinates and create flight plans with them. You can have up to 60 waypoints. (Bullseye)
• Markpoints
• Markpoints are used to "mark" a point of interest, whether flying over an interesting
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

area or designating an enemy sighting. You can create up to 9 markpoints; they are
numbered from MK1 to MK9.

• A/A Waypoint / Anchor Point / Bullseye

• Also referred to as a “Bullseye” or “Anchor Point”, the A/A Waypoint serves as a
common geographic reference for a mission amongst friendly forces.

Waypoint

You

Selected Waypoint (#4)

HSI Page SA Page 503

 5 - WAYPOINTS
5.1 - WAYPOINT INTRODUCTION
HORNET
F/A-18C

Your waypoints are usually already set up

with the mission editor. They are generally
set up as a “sequence” and numbered 1, 2,
3… for a maximum of 60 waypoints. You can
have up to three different sequences of
waypoints.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

You will have a number of options that you

can select like WYPT, SEQ, AUTO, etc. You can
select them by clicking on the Option Select
Buttons next to them. A boxed option means
it is selected. Waypoint 1 Tracked

AUTO: automatic sequence steering to the next waypoint is

enabled. WYPT must be selected as the navigation method

SEQ#: when selected and boxed, all waypoints of the

sequence are displayed on the HSI and dashed lines
Waypoint 1
connect them in sequence

Waypoint Sequence

504
 5 - WAYPOINTS
5.2 - WAYPOINT NAVIGATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to WYPT to set tracking mode to
WAYPOINT.
2. Select desired waypoint sequence by pressing the OSB next to SEQ#. We Aircraft Heading
will pick Sequence 1. To display the sequence lines, press on the OSB again
to make the SEQ1 text boxed. Waypoint Data
3. To select a waypoint, press the OSBs to increment or decrement the TO Waypoint 1 Bearing Bearing (degrees) Distance (Nm)
waypoint number. Time-to-Go to Waypoint (minutes:seconds)
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

4. Use the HSI and HUD to navigate towards waypoint

Aircraft Heading Waypoint Sequence 1 Bearing

1

WYPT Waypoint Selected

(Boxed)
Waypoint Sequence 1 Lines

Waypoint 1 (Selected)
Heading Scale Waypoint Increment 3

Waypoint Selected
Aircraft (top down view) (Waypoint 1)

Waypoint Decrement

Waypoint 1 (Selected)

Distance to Waypoint 1 (nm)

Waypoint Sequence 1 2
(Boxed)
FROM Waypoint 1 Bearing

505
 5 - WAYPOINTS
5.3 - MANUAL VS AUTO SEQUENCING
HORNET
F/A-18C

When following a flight plan and reaching the waypoint you have currently selected, “sequencing” modes determine whether you need to manually select the next waypoint with the
Increment/Decrement OSBs (Manual Sequencing) or if the navigation computer will automatically select the next waypoint in your flight plan (AUTO Sequencing).

To select Automatic or Manual Waypoint Sequencing:

1. Go in HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) page

2. Select desired Waypoint Sequence (SEQ#1, SEQ#2 or SEQ#3 depending on your flight plan)
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

3. Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to AUTO if you want automatic waypoint sequencing (boxed). Leave it OFF if you want manual waypoint sequencing (unboxed)

Selected Waypoint

Selected Waypoint

Waypoints within the flight plan

are linked with dashed lines
Waypoint
Increment/Decrement

You
SEQ#1 selected

Manual Sequencing
Automatic Sequencing
(AUTO unboxed) 506
(AUTO boxed)
 5 - WAYPOINTS
5.4 - HOW TO ADD/REMOVE WAYPOINTS
HORNET
F/A-18C

TO ADD WAYPOINTS:
1. In the HSI page, press the OSB next to DATA.
2. You will see the waypoint sequence. We want to insert a 7th 6
waypoint after Waypoint 6, which we will call Waypoint 7.
3. Press the OSB next to SEQUFC (Sequence UFC)
4. On the UFC, press the OSB next to INS (Insert). « : » will appear once 5
selected.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

5. Press « 7 », then « ENT » to enter Waypoint 7.

6. Waypoint 7 will need coordinates, which we will add in the « HOW
TO EDIT WAYPOINTS » tutorial.
4
TO REMOVE WAYPOINTS:
a) In the HSI page, press the OSB next to DATA.
b) You will see the waypoint sequence. Let’s say we want to delete waypoint 2.
c) Press the OSB next to SEQUFC (Sequence UFC)
d) Press « CLR » to clear any displayed number on the UFC display
e) On the UFC, press the OSB next to DEL (Delete). « : » will appear once selected.
f) Press « 2 », then « ENT » to delete Waypoint 2
g) And that’s it!

507
 5
5 - WAYPOINTS
5.5 - HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS 4
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. In the HSI page, press the OSB next to DATA.

2. You will see the waypoint sequence. We want to edit the coordinates 7
of Waypoint 7 (which we created in the previous tutorial).
3. Press the Waypoint Increment/Decrement OSBs to select WYPT 7
4. Press the OSB next to UFC (Up-Front Controller)
5. On the UFC, press the OSB next to POSN (Position). « : » will appear 3
once selected.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

6. We will add the coordinates of the Senaki-Kolkhi Airdrome, which are

in (deg, minutes, sec):
42 °14’19’’ North 42 °03’39’’ East
7. On the UFC, press « 2 » (N) to select North coordinates, type
« 421419 », then « ENT » to enter them.
8. On the UFC, press « 6 » (E) to select East coordinates, type « 420339 »,
then « ENT » to enter them.
9. And that’s it! You have edited Waypoint 7’s coordinates. If you click on
the OSB next to HSI, you can see that Waypoint 7 is now visible in the
sequence lines.
9b
Coordinate format you input in the UFC is Degree, Minute, Seconds. 1
Coordinate format displayed on the DATA page is Degree, Minute, Decimal.
INPUT 42 deg 14 minutes 19 seconds = OUTPUT 42 deg 14.31 minutes

9c
9a

508
 6 - MARKPOINTS Markpoint Tutorial by Redkite:
https://youtu.be/zP8Xl__XAA0
6.1 - MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

To navigate to an existing markpoint:

1. From the HSI page, Press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to WYPT to set tracking
mode to WAYPOINT.
2. To select a markpoint, press the OSBs to increment or decrement the waypoint number. Markpoint Data
Since the Waypoint Database can contain up to 60 waypoints and 9 additional Bearing (degrees) Distance (Nm)
TO Markpoint 2 Bearing Time-to-Go to Markpoint (minutes:seconds)
markpoints (stored AFTER waypoint 59). I would suggest using the decrement OSB
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

instead of the increment OSB (quicker way to go to the MK#). since going through 60
waypoints can be a bit time-consuming.
3. Use the HSI and HUD to navigate towards waypoint 1
Aircraft Heading WYPT Waypoint Selected
Heading Scale (Boxed)
Aircraft Heading Markpoint 2 Bearing

Waypoint Increment

Markpoint 2 (Selected)
Markpoint Selected
(MK2)

Aircraft (top down view) Waypoint Decrement

FROM Markpoint 2 Bearing

Distance to Markpoint 2 (nm) Markpoint 2 (Selected)

509
 6 - MARKPOINTS
6.1 - MARKPOINT NAVIGATION
HORNET
F/A-18C

To consult markpoint data:

1. From the HSI page, press the OSB next to DATA to enter the DATA sub-page
2. Select desired markpoint using the increment/decrement OSBs
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

1 Select DATA page

Waypoint Increment

Markpoint Selected
(MK2)

Waypoint Decrement

510
 6 - MARKPOINTS
6.2 - HOW TO ADD MARKPOINTS
HORNET
F/A-18C

There are two main methods of creating a markpoint in the Hornet:

• Overfly Method: you create a markpoint at the current location your aircraft is flying over
• Target Designate Method: you create a markpoint at the designated point/target by an existing sensor (i.e. targeting pod, air-to-ground radar, waypoint designate, etc.)

OVERFLY METHOD

1. Make sure that no target is designated with any sensor (targeting pod, air-to-ground radar, waypoint designate). Use the Undesignate Button if you wish to un-designate a target.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

2. Fly over the location you want to mark

3. From either the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) or the SA (Situational Awareness) page, press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to MK#.
4. The MK# will increment and the markpoint will be created at the coordinates you were at when pressing the MK# OSB.
• Note: Once MK#9 is created (the last of the 9 available markpoints), the next created MK# will overwrite MK#1, and so on and so forth.
3

4
MK#1 created

Undesignate / Nosewheel
Steering Button
511
 4
6 - MARKPOINTS
6.2 - HOW TO ADD MARKPOINTS
HORNET
F/A-18C

TARGET DESIGNATE METHOD (USING TARGETING POD)

1. Slew the targeting pod to the desired markpoint location (see targeting pod section).
2. To designate a target, use the TDC DEPRESS control (“ENTER”).
3. A diamond will appear over the designated point on the FLIR page and on the Heads-Up Display as well.
4. From either the HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) or the SA (Situational Awareness) page, press the OSB (Option Select Button)
next to MK#.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

5. The MK# will increment and the markpoint will be created at the designated target point selected when pressing the MK# OSB.
• Note: Once MK#9 is created (the last of the 9 available markpoints), the next created MK# will overwrite MK#1, and so on and so
forth.

Throttle Designator Controller

AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

3 5
Designated Target Point MK#2 created

512
 6 - MARKPOINTS
6.3 - HOW TO USE MARKPOINTS
HORNET
F/A-18C

Now that we have created markpoints, what do we do with them? Well, we can slave our sensors (i.e. targeting pod) to these markpoints Sensor Control Switch
and use them as reference to launch weapons at. We will use a similar approach to the “Waypoint Slave” function of the targeting pod. AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT

1. We will assume Markpoint #2 (M2) has already been created beforehand with the Target Designate method mentioned earlier.
2. Select FLIR page and press the Sensor Control Switch in the direction of the selected DDI.
3. The Select Focus Diamond indicates what display is selected.
4. On HSI (Horizontal Situation Indicator) page, select desired markpoint using the OSBs (Option Select Button) next to UP or DOWN
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

arrows.
5. Press OSB next to WYPT (boxed = selected)
6. Press on OSB next to WPSDG to designate waypoint/markpoint as the target point (boxed = selected)
7. Targeting pod will automatically slew to the selected waypoint/markpoint.

Markpoint 2 Markpoint 2 Designated Target Diamond

(Selected but not designated) (Selected and designated with WPDSG) (Slaved to Markpoint M2) Select Focus Diamond
7
5 7

513
 Throttle Designator Controller
6 - MARKPOINTS AFT/FWD/LEFT/RIGHT/DEPRESS

6.3 - HOW TO USE MARKPOINTS

HORNET
F/A-18C

8. Use the TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Aft/Fwd/Left/Right controls to slew the targeting pod reticle over the desired
target if adjustments are required.
9. You can then use a weapon of your choice like a Maverick and fire it on the designated point (markpoint in WPDSG).

Designated Target Diamond

PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

(Slaved to Markpoint M2)

Distance to Markpoint M2
(designated TGT)

Designated Target Diamond

(Slaved to Markpoint M2)
514
HORNET
7 – ADF NAVIGATION 1

5
F/A-18C

To track an ADF (Automatic Direction Finder):

We want to track NDB (Non-Directional Beacon) 113.6.

1. Set ADF switch to ADF1 (UP) 6
2. Left click on the COMM1 knob to pull it and select COMM1 Radio
3. Scroll mousewheel on COMM1 Radio Channel Selector to M
(Manual) Mode 7
4. Press the OSB next to FM (“:” will appear when selected)
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

5. Press CLR on the UFC to clear current frequency

6. Type “113600” on the UFC to set ADF frequency 113.6 MHz 3
7. Press ENT on the UFC to enter this frequency 4
8. You will now see a circle on the HSI compass rose. This is the 2
heading towards the ADF beacon.

ADF Frequency

You 8

515
NDB (Non-Directional Beacon)
 8 – TACAN NAVIGATION
TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations are navigation aids typically used by the military and provide you directional and distance guidance. They can be installed on airdromes, air refueling tankers
HORNET
F/A-18C

or even aircraft carriers like the CVN-74 John Stennis (74-X frequency typically).

1. Determine the TACAN frequency you want to track by opening the map with F10 and by clicking on the airport you want to track. The frequency of the TACAN beacon for Senaki-Kolkhi is 31X
(TSK).
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

TSK TACAN Beacon

You

516
 8 – TACAN NAVIGATION
2. Select the HSI page on either DDI
HORNET
F/A-18C

3. On the UFC (Up-Front Control) Panel, press the TCN button and press the ON/OFF button if the ON indication is extinguished.
4. Press the T/R OSB button to set it to Transmit/Receive. The “:” symbol indicates that it is selected.
5. Press “31” on the scratchpad and press “ENT” to enter frequency.
6. Press the X or Y OSB to select the right letter of the TACAN frequency (31X in our case).
7. If you are tracking an aerial TACAN beacon (i.e. on a tanker), press the A/A OSB button to select air-to-air mode. The “:” symbol indicates that the mode is selected. Otherwise, make sure A/A is not
selected (no “:” symbol).
8. Press the OSB next to TACAN to select tracking mode to TACAN. Once selected, TCN should be boxed.
9. Click and hold (Left/Right mouse button) the CRS (Course Set) knob to set desired course (CSEL) for TACAN approach. This is useful when approaching a carrier/airfield from a certain direction.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

10. Once frequency is set and options are set, you can track the TACAN beacon via the HSI page and the HUD (Heads-Up Display).

TACAN Bearing 9b

Aircraft Heading 6

TACAN Name
(TSK)
3
TACAN Course Deviation Distance to
Reference (4 deg deviation) TACAN (nm)

5
TACAN Course Indication 9a
TACAN Course Deviation 9b
Reference (8 deg deviation) (CSEL, selected course)
517
 8 – TACAN NAVIGATION TSK TACAN Data
Bearing (degrees) Distance (Nm)
Time-to-Go to TACAN (minutes:seconds)
HORNET
F/A-18C

TACAN Name Aircraft Track

TACAN Bearing
(T Triangle)

TACAN Bearing Arrow

PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Aircraft Heading
Course Line Arrow

TACAN

TACAN Name
TACAN Course Deviation (TSK) You
Reference (4 deg deviation)
Distance to
TACAN (nm)
TACAN Course Deviation
Reference (8 deg deviation)

Course Selected
(CSEL)

518
 8 – TACAN NAVIGATION
Here’s a nice trick for you. If you click the OSB next to DATA while in the main HSI page, then click the OSB next to TCN, you can find the whole TACAN database. You can cycle through every TACAN
HORNET
F/A-18C

station using the Increment/Decrement OSBs.

2
1
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

TACAN Increment

3
TACAN Frequency

TACAN Coordinates

TACAN Beacon Elevation

TACAN Magnetic Variation (MVAR)

TACAN Selected
(4th TACAN in database)

TACAN Decrement

519
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

520
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY CV-1 Approach
HORNET
F/A-18C

Reference: CNATRA P-816

Case III recovery is used for all night operations, as well as during the day when the weather is below
Case II minimums (less than 1,000-3). In other words, a Case III recovery is used for bad weather with
low visibility conditions. The ICLS (Instrumented Carrier Landing System) will act sort of like an ILS
(Instrumented Landing System) but for a carrier (d’uh).
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

521
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

The landing looks complicated, but it’s not that bad once you figure out what you need to do.
Don’t worry, we’ll go through it together.
Case III Chart
• You will generally start a Case III recovery in the Marshal Zone. It’s an airspace 25 nautical Reference: Matt Wagner
miles from the carrier where aircraft wait for landing clearances. We will use the carrier’s Aircraft Carrier
TACAN beacon to orient ourselves and approach the carrier from a certain direction in BRC 009
reference to the beacon, which is what we call a radial. The Marshal Radial is usually 15 to
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

30 degrees off the Final Bearing. In our case, the final bearing is 360 deg, so the Marshal
Radial is 030.

• We will follow the Marshal Radial (030) and descend from 10,000 ft to 5,000 ft at 250 kts
with a descent rate of 4000 ft/min

• Once we are 15 nm from the carrier on the Marshal Radial, we will turn 90 degrees right
(030 + 90 degrees = 120 degrees) and maintain a 12 nm separation with the carrier.

• We will follow the “arc” until we reach the Final Bearing radial (360/000) approximately
10 nm from the carrier. We will then drop our gear down, set our flaps to full and set our Final Bearing 360
angle of attack to ON SPEED AOA.

• Once we have turned to 360/000 and captured the carrier’s localizer (indicates lateral
deviation with runway centerline), we will then capture the glide slope (indicates vertical
deviation with optimal path) using the ICLS (Instrumented Carrier Landing System).

• Once we are 3/4 nm from the aircraft, we will track the meatball and use it as a reference
to land.
Marshal Zone
Radial 030
• The TACAN is mostly used to help you track your radials and distance from the carrier
during your approach. The ICLS, on the other hand, is used to give you a reference on
where you should be during the final landing phase.

522
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

If you want to practice Case III recoveries, don’t forget that a carrier needs the Activate
TACAN and Activate ICLS “Perform Commands” actions in the Mission Editor.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

523
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

Here is a brief overview of what we’ll do.

PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Fly Heading 120 for 12 nm

Aircraft Carrier

3/4 nm from carrier

Use Meatball as a reference to land

5,000 ft, 15 nm from carrier

Steer 90 deg right to 120 deg Entering Final Bearing
Intercept localizer and glide slope

8 nm from carrier
Gear down, full flaps, ON SPEED AoA

10 nm from carrier
Steer to Heading 360 for Final

You
Inside Marshal Zone, 25 nm from Carrier
10,000 ft, 250 kts, 4000 ft/min descent
524
 1g
9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY 1h
HORNET
F/A-18C

1. Contact Carrier to turn on the lights

a. Left click on the COMM1 knob to pull it and select COMM1 Radio 1c
b. Scroll mousewheel on COMM1 Radio Channel Selector to M (Manual) Mode
c. Press the OSB next to AM or FM to select the FM frequency (“:FM” will appear
when selected)
1h 1b
d. Press CLR on the UFC to clear current frequency
e. Type “127500” on the UFC to set carrier radio frequency 127.5 MHz
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

1a 1b
f. Press ENT on the UFC to enter this frequency
g. Press the COMM switch – COMM1 on your throttle to contact the carrier (RALT+\)
h. Go in F5 – AT5 menu, then to the CVN-74 menu, then to the F1 – Inbound menu.
i. And that’s it, the carrier is now illuminated.

1d

1h
1i

1d

1e

1f

525
 3
9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

2. Adjust your interior cockpit lights as required

3. Set your HSI page on the left DDI, your FCS page on the right DDI,
and the CHKLST page on the center AMPCD.
4. Set ALTITUDE Switch to RDR to use your radar altimeter as a
reference for your HUD and set radar altimeter index to 370 ft or
320 (as you prefer). You use 370 ft to remind you that you need
to make the ball call or 320 ft to make sure you have the proper
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

altitude when 3/4 nm from the carrier.

4a 526
4b
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

9
Note: we will assume the carrier’s TACAN frequency is 74X and our ICLS channel is 11.
5. On the UFC (Up-Front Control) Panel, press the TCN button and press the ON/OFF button if the
ON indication is extinguished.
6. Press the T/R OSB button to set it to Transmit/Receive. The “:” symbol indicates that it is
selected.
7. Press “74” on the scratchpad and press “ENT” to enter frequency.
8. Press the X or Y OSB to select the right letter of the TACAN frequency (74X in our case).
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

9. Press the OSB next to TACAN to select tracking mode to TACAN. Once selected, TCN should be 10b
boxed.
10. Click and hold (Left/Right mouse button) the CRS (Course Set) knob to set desired course (CSEL)
for TACAN approach (030 for the Marshal Radial).

5c 6

7 10b
8 CSEL, Selected Course

10a

5b
5a 527
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

Note: we will assume the carrier’s TACAN frequency is 74X and our ICLS channel is 11.
11. On the UFC (Up-Front Control) Panel, press the ILS button and press the ON/OFF button if the ON indication is extinguished.
12. Press “11” on the scratchpad and press “ENT” to enter ICLS frequency.
13. Press the OSB next to ILS to select tracking mode to ICLS. Once selected, ILS should be boxed.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

11c

12

13

11a 11b
528
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

14. When you are 25 nm from carrier, follow the Marshal Radial (030) and descend from 10,000 ft
to 5,000 ft at 250 kts.
15. Maintain 5,000 ft until being 15 nm from carrier

14 14
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

8 deg deviation dot 4 deg deviation dot

Aircraft Carrier

7 deg deviation from

TACAN radial 030 25 nm from TACAN
5,000 ft, 15 nm from carrier
15 15 Steer 90 deg right to 120 deg

15

14

2 deg deviation from Inside Marshal Zone, 25 nm from Carrier

10,000 ft, 250 kts, 4000 ft/min descent 529
TACAN radial 030 15 nm from TACAN
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

16. Steer 90 deg right to a heading of 120 and set TACAN course to the Carrier Runway Heading
(000/360).
17. When crossing the carrier’s runway heading radial of 360, steer aircraft to 360 for Final Approach.

16 16
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Heading 120

Fly Heading 120 for 12 nm

Aircraft Carrier

5,000 ft, 15 nm from carrier

Steer 90 deg right to 120 deg
17 17
17

Heading 360 10 nm from carrier

Steer to Heading 360 for Final

16

530
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL Localizer Bar

CASE III RECOVERY

HORNET
F/A-18C

18. When reaching 8 nm from carrier, set landing gear down, full flaps, On Speed AoA, Anti-Skid Switch to
OFF, Hook Lever DOWN, Hook Bypass Switch to CARRIER.
19. When entering final bearing, intercept localizer line to guide yourself laterally on the runway. Line up Velocity Vector
Velocity Vector with the Localizer Line. « Chase » the line.
20. When Reaching approx. 7 nm from the carrier, the glide slope line will appear. Intercept the glide
slope line to guide yourself vertically on the glide path. Line up Velocity Vector with the Glide Slope
Line. « Chase » the line.
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

18 18

Aircraft Carrier

3/4 nm from carrier

Use Meatball as a reference to land

8 nm Entering Final Bearing

ON SPEED AoA 18 Intercept localizer and glide slope

19 20 8 nm from carrier
Gear down, full flaps, ON SPEED AoA

10 nm from carrier
Steer to Heading 360 for Final

Localizer Bar &

Glide Slope Bar Localizer and Glide Slope Bars
Velocity Vector Aligned
aligned with Velocity Vector 531
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C

21. Keep your velocity vector lined up with the glide slope bar and the localizer bar. Perform gentle
corrections until you reach 3/4 nm from the carrier.
22. Use Meatball as reference when at 3/4 nm and land.

21
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

Aircraft Carrier
22
3/4 nm from carrier
Use Meatball as a reference to land

Entering Final Bearing

Intercept localizer and glide slope

8 nm from carrier
Gear down, full flaps, ON SPEED AoA

10 nm from carrier
Steer to Heading 360 for Final

532
 9 – ICLS CARRIER LANDING TUTORIAL
CASE III RECOVERY
HORNET
F/A-18C
PART 15 – NAVIGATION & ICLS LANDING

533
HORNET
INTRODUCTION

AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING – WHY WE ALL HATE IT

F/A-18C

Air-to-air refueling is one of the hardest, most hated, and most

frustrating tasks in DCS. Ever. Of all time.

Why? Well, one of the main reasons for the difficulty behind refueling is
the skill required to do formation flying. Flying in formation with
another aircraft requires much more practice than you would initially
think. Another reason is pure physics: there is this thing called “wake
turbulence”. An aircraft flies through a fluid: air. Just like with any fluid,
if you have something that displaces itself through it at a certain speed,
the fluid will become disrupted (turbulence). Wingtip vortices and
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

jetwash are both effects of this simple concept. Wake turbulence is the
reason why airliners need to wait a minimum time between takeoffs:
flying through disrupted air will destabilize the aircraft and it is unsafe,
especially during critical phases of flight like takeoff and landing.

Unfortunately, wake turbulence is something a pilot has to deal with

during air-to-air refueling. This is why the aircraft will fly just fine when
approaching the tanker, but start wobbling around when flying in close
proximity of the refueling basket/drogue and tanker engines.

534
 TYPES OF AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
• There are four main air-to-air refueling techniques used in military aviation:
• Probe-and-drogue (refueling probe must be inserted in the tanker’s drogue basket)
HORNET
• Flying Refueling Boom (guided by boom operator aboard the tanker)
F/A-18C

• Buddy Refueling (two fighters can refuel one another independently without a tanker)
• Nose-Probe refueling

• The refueling aircraft available in DCS are:

• The Ilyushin Il-78M “Midas”, a russian probe-and-drogue tanker, which was developed from
the Il-76
• The Boeing KC-135 “Stratotanker”, a US Air Force flying boom tanker, which was developed Il-78M
from the Boeing 367-80
• The Lockheed S-3B “Viking”, a US Navy probe-and-drogue tanker
• The Lockheed KC-130 “Hercules”, a USMC probe-and-drogue tanker, which was developed
from the C-130.
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

The Hornet is equipped with a Probe-and-Drogue system, so air-to-air refueling will only be performed
from either an Il-78M, a KC-130 or a S-3B tanker.

Refueling Probe

KC-130
Refueling Boom
Drogue Basket

F-105 Thunderchiefs being refueled by Tornado GR4 being refueling by a S-3B 535
a Boom system during the Vietnam War Probe-and-Drogue system
HORNET
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING DEMO
1. Consult mission briefing to know on which radio frequency you need to contact the tanker.
F/A-18C

In our case, we will use the frequency 251.000 AM on the COMM1 radio.
2. Find tanker using TACAN frequency as shown in the NAVIGATION - TACAN section.
3. Set your radio to 251 AM and turn radio VOL knobs ON, and press “/” to communicate
with TEXACO (tanker callsign).
4. Select Tanker – Texaco (F6) communication menu, and then select “Intent to Refuel”
5. TEXACO should give you a pre-contact altitude (in our case 8,000 ft).
6. Set Master Arm Switch – OFF (DOWN)
7. Set Flaps to AUTO
8. Set PROBE switch to EXTEND (right click).

Note: Some tankers like the KC-130 are 7

equipped with a TACAN beacon, which 2
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

can give you a direction to find it easily.

Just make sure you have the correct
TACAN frequency set in the A/A (Air-to-
Air) Mode. Set TACAN using the 8
NAVIGATION TACAN tutorial. 6

4a

4b

3
Pre-contact information:
rendez-vous at 8,000 ft 536
5
 AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING DEMO 9

9. Make sure refueling probe has deployed correctly.

HORNET
F/A-18C

10. When you are less than 0.1 nm away from tanker, position yourself as shown on
picture.
11. When in position, use your radio menu to select “Ready Pre-Contact” (F1).
12. The tanker’s pilot should answer you with “Cleared Contact” and should deploy his
drogue basket and start to accelerate to cruising speed.
10
13. Fly formation with the tanker and approach the drogue basket very slowly (make
sure you remain about 2-3 kts faster than the tanker) with very gentle inputs. Use
stick for big corrections, but keep trimming constantly for small corrections. Probe Retracted Probe Extended
14. Keep the aircraft trimmed at ALL TIMES. Approaching untrimmed is living hell. Be
careful with the throttle since it has a long response time. Use airbrake if you need
to slow down quickly while maintaining altitude.
15. Insert your probe into the drogue basket by using your reference points. The 10 deg 11
Pitch Line should be lined up vertically with the left-most engine, and you should
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

be aligned with the engine pylon for lateral movements

16. Additional drag should be generated by the drogue once you have contact with the Use this vertical line as a reference
drogue: your aircraft will slightly decelerate. Throttle up a little to keep the probe 15 point for lateral movements
in. Once the probe is taking fuel, the tanker pilot should tell you “You’re taking fuel”
and a green light should illuminate on the tanker’s engine.
17. Keep formation with the tanker until your refueling is complete. Don’t aim for the
probe, aim for the tanker’s engine.
18. Detach your probe form the basket by throttling down and set PROBE switch to 10 deg Pitch Line
RETRACT.

Tanker’s green light, you’re taking

fuel.

Airspeed (kts)

Velocity Vector
537
 AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING DEMO
Of course, all of this seems much easier said than done. You will
HORNET
F/A-18C

very likely do following mistakes:

• Approach too fast and miss the basket

• Oscillate vertically without being able to line up with the basket
• Keep going either too fast or too slow
• Drift left or right
• Overcompensate control inputs
• Forget the airbrake on

Here are various demos of air-to-air refueling.

• https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T5dOLIqGQ-I
• https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=k8gDUUYy8Io
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

The next slide will give you a couple of tips to help you catch that
basket and slurp that delicious jet fuel like a crack addict.

538
HORNET
TIPS AND TRICKS
• Remaining CALM is key for a successful refueling. If you lose your
F/A-18C

cool, take a break and try again once you are relaxed. Silk hands
and a clear head are needed for that part.
• If you overshoot (or are about to fly past) the tanker, you can bleed
speed very fast by deploying your airbrakes. You can go from 400
kts to 300 kts in a matter of seconds.
• Avoid rolling your aircraft when you are tracking the basket: you
will change the orientation of your lift vector and it will make you
drift vertically and horizontally, which doesn’t help at all. Try to
stay in the same horizontal plane as much as possible.
• It is easier if you try to “break down” your control inputs in
separate movements. I try to avoid gunning my throttle, pitching
up/down and using my rudder at the same time. The aircraft reacts
PART 16 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING

in a way that makes it all very difficult for your brain to predict and
process. I tend to make sure my plane is straight and level at first
and that I am more or less lined up with the basket. Use this vertical line as a reference
• Once I have a satisfying attitude and that the basket is placed as point for lateral movements
per the reference points (10 deg pitch line lined up with engine), I
gradually throttle up and increase speed to match the tanker’s

VERTICAL
speed. In this case, the tanker’s speed is 270 kts. Make sure that 10 deg Pitch Line
you keep a constant speed.
• Avoid big throttle movements as the Hornet’s engines respond very
slowly. HORIZONTAL RUDDER
• Once my speed matches the tanker’s, I can gradually accelerate to

STICK
a speed that is 2-3 kts faster (271 in our case), approaching the
basket very slowly. At that part, the ONLY two things I am Airspeed (kts)
watching are my AIRSPEED and the 10 DEG PITCH LINE BEING
LINED UP WITH THE TANKER’S ENGINE (NOT THE BASKET).
Nothing else matters.
• Once I am approaching the basket, I make sure to avoid inducing
rolling motions while displacing myself with the rudder and the
vertical stick input ONLY. This way, your aircraft stays straight and
delicately drifts left or right based on the rudder input, while you
can fine-tune your vertical attitude with your stick.
Velocity Vector
539
HORNET
USEFUL RESOURCES
A1-F18AC-NFM-000
F/A-18C

NATOPS Flight Manual

https://info.publicintelligence.net/F18-ABCD-000.pdf

Eagle Dynamics (Official Developer) Work-In-Progress Early Access Guide

https://drive.google.com/file/d/1vJ94f1Z2RIz078bYUak-lPKJN8A0B1wB/view

Matt Wagner (Eagle Dynamics Producer) DCS F/A-18C Hornet Video Tutorials
https://www.youtube.com/user/wagmatt/videos

Hoggit Wiki
https://wiki.hoggitworld.com/view/F/A-18C
PART 17 – OTHER RESOURCES

Redkite’s Youtube Tutorials

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iKLrnJpc8I4&list=PLml_c09ciuctIreNtpLoPg1DByY5upg6v

Jabbers’ Youtube Tutorials

https://youtu.be/lm-M3VUy-_I

A.E.W.’s Youtube Discussions on CASE I Recovery (Carrier Landing)

https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCNvV27UZkI8W-jvMA-iGqyQ/videos

Maverick’s Air-to-Air Refueling Tutorial

https://youtu.be/T5dOLIqGQ-I

540
 THANK YOU TO ALL MY PATRONS
Creating these guides is no easy task, and I would like to take the time to properly thank every single one of my Patreon supporters. The following people have donated a very generous
amount to help me keep supporting existing guides and work on new projects as well:

• Merlin Kötz
• Scorch71
• Gerrit Buss
• ChazFlyz
• Ilko van der Velden
• Yves Blanchard
• Austin Green

541
542